《Legacy of the Multiverse》


 Chapter 1 - Part I Re-birth

    It all begins with the death of Kai, once known as the most brilliant mind ever born but now after death will be in the history books be known as the harbor of death as he created a virus which resulted in the death of 3/4 of the human population around the globe.


    As kai in his silver-colored soul form pass through the bridge of the afterlife suddenly gets sucked into space which appeared out of nowhere. Kai found himself standing in front of a giant white ball of light which radiated for miles and miles covering everything which exists or will ever exist.


    Ball: I''m what you humans describe as god and also what is known as the devil. Tell me, Human, Why kill all those people?


    Kai: Greetings Supreme being, aren''t you omnipotent you must already know the reason right?


    God: Hm... It seems you don''t regret it huh?


    Kai: Why would I regret it? I will be remembered, feared, known and respected throughout the Human civilization like you. People worship you cause they fear you, Fear about what you will do if they stop praying


    God: I thought you were intelligent but I see now that you are just a coward, Boy I can read your mind I know you did this to protect them from themselves, your contributions for your civilizations will be remembered even by the lesser god Gaea for she is the mother of your race.


    Kai: Supreme lord, I would like to ask what am I doing here?


    God: Like I said Gaea request for you to be given a second chance in the world for your karma and I also agree with her So I will give you the opportunity to be reincarnated in another world, and no You will not get a system or anything like that, With the power of your karma I will connect your wishes with the Gaea by which you achieve your dream of knowledge.


    Kai: I thank the supreme being and Gaea. Lord, will I get any choices?


    God: You can wish 2 things, First, the world you wish to be birth in, the time and as whom you wish to be birth as. Secondly, in each world you go after your first world you can have one power thing with you. You can''t take people or any living being as it would violate the world law of that world. You will be birth in the mortal world first and you can go to other worlds.


    Kai: Lord who will guide me to another world?


    God: For that, I will give you a travel pass which will remain in your soul and only come into being when you have reached the top of your world.


    Kai: Will I be issued missions or anything like that?


    God: That will depend on the lesser god of each world, some gods only control one world like your Gaea she had the power to rule multiple worlds but chose to focus on one earth thus making your earth the center of reality and thus the ability to human to peek into other worlds and write stories about it.


    Kai: Lord can you tell me about the worlds which exist?


    God: Worlds are stories you have read like Harry potter mangas as in naruto and bleach novel as in Emperor domination, Martial World and many more.


    Kai: Lord Can I retravel to the previous worlds?


    God: Good question, Yes you can but once you have selected an idea you want to take from that world you can''t take anything else.


    Kai: Lord If I were to reincarnate in some world as the protagonist who has the system then what would happen?


    God: Systems exist with the blessing of the gods so you would have to seek the blessing of that world''s god.


    Kai: Will I be reborn as a baby every time?


    God: When you want, who you want to and at what time are your choices, you can choose to be born as a baby or anytime during their life?


    Kai: What if they die moments after I transfer to their body


    God: You will lear this trivial thing as you go on.


    Kai: Thank you for the opportunity lord. I would like to request and you kindly send my regards to the mother of Human race Gaea for me too.


    God: Good, Which world would you like to go first?


    Kai: You said to start with the Moral world so I would Like to start with Sword Art Online. The time of 7 years before the birth of the protagonist Kirito, the location is to be born in one of the wealthiest families.


    God: Good choice, You can learn a lot during the arc.


    Kai: Lord I would like to ask if there is anyone else who would also be given the chance to reincarnate?


    God: Sometimes Lesser gods reincarnate people but don''t worry I have changed your soul to be stronger then their so if you want you can take over their bodies too.


    Kai: Thank you, Lord, Will I carry my knowledge with me through my journey?


    God: That Is the reason you''re going on the journey, to understand and expand your knowledge thus It will be bound to your soul, you will carry all the knowledge you acquire. And each time you select some time to carry to the next world it will marge with your soul thus making it a part of you.


    Kai: Thank you, Lord, I''m ready.


    God weaved his hand and space cracked and consumed the Kai.

 Chapter 2 - Part II Start

    Kai after waking up from sleep found himself surrounded by liquid, He understood that he is in the stomach of women.


    He tried to move his hand and legs a little and heard a sound of women crying or he stopped then after some time he felt that something is pushing him out so he decided to go with the flow and went out head first out of his mother.


    The moment he went out he started crying loudly as to act normal like other children. After crying a bit he felt tired and went to sleep.


    During which 3 people rushed into the room, One an overly old elder with a full set of white hair on his head and beard, elderly women and handsome men with very dark hair and looks which can make anyone stunt.


    Nurse: Mister Lu, you don''t need to worry everything went perfectly. The mother and the baby are completely safe. The baby is a boy weighing 7.7 lb. The mother is sleeping now.


    The man looked at his wife first kissed her over the head and then picked the baby.


    Master Lu: Have you too decided the name yet?


    Lu TingXiao: An, Lu An


    Lu Chongshan: Good, good.


    Madam Lu: Let me hold him for a bit, he looks so cute.


    Lu TingXiao handed the baby to his mother and looked at his wife and pulled his phone in the pocket.


    Lu TingXiao: Born. Everything perfect. Bring little treasure and Lu Yuexi


    Kai feeling the noise outside started crying loudly waking his mother who took him from who he presumed to be his grandmother and started shaking him. Kai feeling the joy started laughing loudly.


    Women/ Ning Xi: Oh he looks just like you.


    The man moved his eyes a little and took the baby from his wife and started shaking it. Kai enjoying this laughed the whole time but started feeling tired so went to sleep.


    Kai''s life went on He gets to know he is born in the family of Lu from the novel Full marks hidden marriage in china. He is the third son. and his name now is Lu Ah. He knew basis mandrin and started to observe his surroundings more and more to learn about there cultures while acting like a baby. after 10 months he started using words to indicate what he liked and disliked and walking on his feet. He also became close to his elder brother and only spoke complete sentences to him.


    At the age of 1 and a half, he started running like a normal kid but still talked in worlds to others only. His intelligence was already noticed by his mother and father.


    When he turned 2 he requested his elder brother to ask his parents to let him go to school. His elder brother also doted on him and fulfilled all his request so asked his parents but his mother denied it and said that he can have the books to read and enroll in school by the time he turns 3. During his childhood, he also met a friend of his mother, Han Xiao and his wife Anna. From the novel, he remembered that Han Xiao is the strongest fighter in the world then he went and begged him to become his teacher. His mother disapproved but he got on his knees and refused to move even after his father told him to move he refused, thus Han Xiao finally broke down and agreed to teach him only some basics when he is 5.


    Kai started basic training such as running 10 km and doing 100 push up and 100 pullups on his own. He completed all his books till 1 standard within 10 days and started begging his brother for more books. As he refused to talk to anyone other than his brother in a complete sentence.


    Ning Xi: He is too isolated, we both know he is very intelligent but why doesn''t he talk to me or you? Little treasure what do you think we should do?


    Little treasure: Mother I once asked his why he only talk to me, he said "Others are boring" and when I asked him what he means he told me to invest in Lupan and Ace Holding companies in the USA.


    The man seating silently holding his wife''s hand: Go call him here


    Little treasure nodded and ran upstairs


    Ning Xi: What do you think we should do?


    Lu TingXiao: Let me talk to him


    Little treasure came back with an almost 100cm boy with a very bright and expressionless face.


    Lu TingXiao: Why do you want more books?


    Lu An: Study


    Lu TingXiao: Why do you need to study?


    Lu An: Money


    Lu TingXiao: How much do you want? I have a lot


    Lu An: Yours


    Lu TingXiao: Why don''t you talk to your mother or me in complete sentences?


    Lu An face moved a little making the environment grow colder around the room which learned by watching his father: You both are stopping me from growing and achieving my full potential. It''s not my fault matured fasted watching you all neither is it my fault for desiring to learn something. only big brother helps me while you all want me to be a baby.


    Lu TingXiao and Ning Xi both got shocked hearing their almost 3-year-old speak in such a cold voice.


    Ning XI: So you just want to study and train?


    Lu An shaking his head: Something like that.


    Ning Xi: So let''s say we let you study and train then you also have to be participatory in the family? Agreed?


    Lu An: Okay


    Lu TingXiao: How do you know about those companies?


    Lu An smiled at both his father and mother and said in the cutest voice: Because I''m such a cute baby. then went upstairs again


    Ning XI: What do you think we should do?


    Lu TingXiao: He just wants to study so let his study don''t worry about it. as for the training we already agreed to let his train when he is 5. Let''s observe him till them. Little treasure tries to assert how intelligent he is. we all from the start knew he is very intelligent.


    Following the discussion, Lu An got his books and started studying seriously after 6 months completed High school and requested senior school book and then went on to complete than in 13 months and received a letter from all the ivy colleges for admission but the choice to not go.


    The day he turned 5 he started training with both Han Xiao and Anna. Anna taught his medicine while Han Xiao taught him fighting. learning the basics in 5 months, he then bagged both his parents and teachers to let him study fighting more, using his cute baby charm he got the approval in promise to return when his brother goes to college, following which Han Xiao to taught him everything he knows about fighting, Han Xiao knowing the complete potential of Lu An thought him everything meanwhile Anna started teaching him ancient medicine and passed her knowledge.


    The training went on for 3 years during which his brother too completed school and started looking for colleges like him little treasure all got admission in all the colleges. Thus, Like his promise, he decided to follow his brother into college as he had learned all the practice knowledge of fighting and medicine from but didn''t have much experience. During his training he grows more distant from his family, he never attended any functions or went to the company as he went around all over china following his teachers, he stayed in contact with his family via mobile and video call but to the outside world it was as if he had completely disappeared from the world, rumors of him thrown out or getting kidnapped or being death circulated throughout the society everyone knew about him but no one saw his face anything about him. After 3 years of training, he finally returned and saw that a celebration is going on he too has received the invite. He handed the invite at the front door and went inside, saw his mother and sister standing side by side greeting guests and started walking towards them. while he was going some kids while playing with each other collided into him as Lu An was well trained and was almost 135 cm long the other kid fall on the floor and started crying hearing the cry of a 7-year-old boy the guest in the surrounding started paying attention toward him. Suddenly a woman in full branded clothes come running out of the crowd and started shouting


    Women: How dare you? push my son? Who do you think you are?


    when women saw that Lu An was wearing simple clothes her ego got a boost and started screaming in an even louder voice.


    Women: How dare you enter here? Don''t you know my niece is getting married? Who allowed you to enter here? Guards Guards


    Hearing the sound of someone screaming both Lu TingXiao along with Little treasure and Ning Xi along her daughter moved toward the sound.


    Women grabbed Lu An by the collar and started pushing him back: Get on your knees now and beg my son for forgiveness.


    By this time the entire Lu family along with the rest of the guest and arrived where he was. From start till now Lu An have neither made a sound or spoken anything just carried an indifferent expressionless face. Seeing the arrival of his father mother sister and brother Lu An moved a little to the right and spoke: Greeting Father, mother.


    Women: Oh your parents are here, let me see who they are I will have them thrown out along with you


    Then she turned around and saw the CEO of Lu corporation along with his family standing there.


    Little treasure: Little An you''re finally here come let''s go and greet uncle.


    Lu An nodded and started walking but turn around and spoke to the women while pointing toward his parents: They are my parents, throw them out then we will speak.


    Women at that time were sweating and hoping that Lu''s main family didn''t hear her but then she heard the boy speak and fall to the ground: Miss Lu I didn''t know he was your son, I have a big mouth and speak nonsense all the time please forgive me.


    Ning Xi hasn''t seen her son for the past 3 years and when she saw his being abused she almost rushed to kick the women''s ass but Lu TingXiao stopped her, she could see that her husband was waiting to see what his son would do but he did nothing.


    Lu TingXiao: Okay


    Meanwhile, the market outside was in a war state as for the Yu family who the women belong to was already on the verge of being bankrupt.

 Chapter 3 - Part III One rule of ruling them all.

    During the 3 years of training other than learning how to fight and about medicine, Lu An also started working on creating his old friend back to life, In his previous life, he was famous for creating the most powerful AI.


    Using the knowledge of the precious world and it this one he created another AI of it''s Kind who he named Hope.


    Hope was the current reason for the war in the share market, His AI started a company and started taking over other companies on a day to day basis. To not attach too much attention Lu An instructed the AI to only take certain no of companies to provide any and all funds he may require in the future. He also incorporated all the fighting and medical knowledge he had and started studying new knowledge AI gathered for him. This was also his purpose for coming back to China. He has decided to complete his education and start a company different then Lu in japan as Sword art Online will start in about 13 years.


    After the fiasco at the wedding, everyone in the High society circle came to know about the return of the 2nd son of Lu''s family.


    His brother along with his father decided on the management course offered by Harvard, He was not much interested in it so he decided to learn more about mechanics, thus he and his brother both enrolled in Harvard in different courses.


    Lu An college life was simple he studies everything that AI found topped all the courses which he was offered and completed his branch of education in 1 year. Little treasure also completed his branch of management and decided to learn more about mechanics as he was also interested in Robotics. Thus both enrolled in the same course.


    Lu An paying attention to his brother and scored only a bit higher or almost the same as his brother. Both completed the course again in 1 year. Little treasure decided to go back and join the company with his brother but Lu An only being 10 years old decided to study further and enrolled in MIT and started getting degrees in various engineering courses and finally graduated summa c.u.m laude at the age of 15, youngest in the History to get so many degrees. He returned to China and lived with his family for 2 years during which he showed no interest in the business or the company and just stayed at home. During this 2 year, he started with the creation of nanotech and started using them to make changes to his body making it more potentially active and stronger than human capacity.


    After 2 year period of silence, and one year of traveling around the globe the moment he turned 18 he asked his father if he can open his own company in Japan. After getting consent from his parents, he moved to Japan during which he instructed his AI to observe another Japanese empire ruled by Zhuo Jingren and his wife Lily Qin and collect information about both. His AI starting with there bank to everything in between collected all the evidence to take them down.


    Lu An started with a small company which makes programs as in mobile games and various other uses full tools he also started copying product other companies have created and release them with a bit of improvement. Slowly within the period of 2 years, his company spread through every and all field, making his company within the top 500 companies of the world, then he moved his gaze toward to banking sector Zhuo Jingren primary business and then toward the lily business of takeovers. First came the death of all people related to Zhuo Jingren in japan and the underworld connection lily had in Europe. Cripling them one at a time. After driving Zhuo Jingren out of Japan and limiting his reach to hong kong Lu An started building an underground empire in Japan.


    By the time SAO was to be released Lu An controlled 43% of the total global market in dark by his AI. Akihiko Kayaba completed the creation of what he believed to be SAO but with the control of Hope, Lu An created systematic changes and similarly gain control over the game as the GM of the game. The game was to act as a training ground for the battle techniques and knowledge and lead down the foundation for the next world.


    6th November 2022, the release of SAO and the headgear. Lu An is one of the people who funded to project and received one of the helmets for free. With the help of the Hope, he modified the helmet to act as a transmitter to stay connected with it. Zhuo Jingren along with his wife has made various attempts to acquire knowledge regarding him as No one has ever seen him or any photos are available online. The only photo available is that when he was a child and attended school. Other then that no one knew anything about where he lived stayed and what not.

 Chapter 4 - Part IV The Clan

    Before the start of the game approximately 1 year ago, he went back home to meet his family and invite his brother to come work as his companies CEO while the time he plays the game. His father and mother could be more proud of the level of succus he was able to achieve without family support.


    His father with his connection in the underground full knew what kind of company his son was running and how deep was it. The things he has heard about him about his dealing in Europe and about the European king''s family even frightened him. The whisper he heard was of a team of his son have trained, the whispers were such that there were many small kids his son found in the slums while traveling, who his son took and trained in various things varying from art medicine to everything that exists like the boogeyman who is known as the perfect assassin or mad hand who has God''s hand which can heal anywhere thing under the sun.


    On November 6th, 2022 with the official launch of SAO. Lu An also logged in the system.


    The first thing he saw was the blue sky over his head and very few people surrounding him in the middle of a rock constructed field, He assumed it to be the spawning area. and moved out of it and went through the town.


    Lu An: Hope are you there?


    Hope: Yes master, everything is progressing as planned, as you have asked you gamer name is Kai. The group has also registered and are know to assemble as we speak.


    Kai: Good Good. After he is down with declaring that this is a death game and locked into the game, Take over the system and unlock all the classes and fighting technique along with the class, I don''t want to be limited to one class of swordsman or something.


    Hope: Okay Master. Everyone has assembled and waiting for your instructions.


    Kai: I see, let''s go them.


    Kai come to an open field were a large group of people is gathered, Kai looked at them and Nodded. Upon seeing Kai a boy around 19 years old came forth and greeted him: Master everyone is here.


    Kai: Okay, How many were able to take part in this project?


    Boy: 93 master others are doing assignments outside.


    Kai: I see, Well you will be the leader and maintain the position of the strongest guild. After floor level 70 I too will join the guild and take charge. For now, train your guild should be the one to defeat the 2nd-floor boss. I will take the first one.


    Boy: Understood master.


    Kai: I hope you don''t disappoint me, Klaus.


    Klaus moved a little and bowed as Kai walked away.


    Kai: Hope direct me to the most populated monster area, I want to level up as fast as I can.


    Hope: Yes master.


    Kai started by practicing some sword attacks followed by an attack by bare hands but failed as the system didn''t have any attack technique. After practicing a bit he noticed it''s almost time that everyone is gathered, So he put his sword down and enjoyed the sweet breeze of air going through the grass field, while he was observing he heard 2 people talking.


    Voice 1: As soon as I got the money together, I rushed out and bought all the hardware to play, Sao stood in line and scored one of the 10,000 hard copies guess you could say I was pretty lucky to come through you sir were 10 times as lucky as getting to beta test


    Voice 2: Hm...


    Voice 1: Dude only a thousand people got the chance


    Voice 2: Yes I guess I got the chance I was lucky


    Voice 1: Hey mind if I ask how far you got in the beta


    Kai through to leave them but then he saw the name above one of the person health Bar ''Kirito'' and decided to join them


    Kai: Hello there fellow players.


    Both Kirito and Klein both got startled by sudden interpretation.


    Looking back they saw a man 6''1 in height with a complete set of black hair. The man looked unbelievably beautiful with a very fair white face both of them at the same time taught the amazing effects customization effect of the game at complete use.


    Kai: So fellow gamers I''m Kai, Hows the game is going on so far?


    Kirito: It''s good, allowing achieving dreams to the fullest.


    Klein: What about you?


    Kai: Yes I''m also a new player the same as you, I heard you guys talking about being lucky and becoming a beta and become interested. Sorry about that


    Klein: Well you guys keep talking I ordered a pizza it must almost be there let''s meet later.


    Kai: Bye Bye


    Kirito: Bye man.


    Klein: Hm... I''m unable to log out.


    Kai: Try contacting the GM


    Kirito: Yes


    Klein: It''s not working


    Hope: Master you can log out anytime you want, as your instructions all the people who die are being transferred to secure facilities and studied under the hidden Project of S.O.U.L.S while the effect on the outside will remain the same as which was intended by the original inventor of the game of players death by frying there brain.


    Kai: Okay. but only collect a specific part of them for study while leaving the rest for going through the normal process of dying. Police will look into everything from the way to the medium so pay specific attention


    Soon all three are transported to the spawning area with the rest of the people. Soon Akihiko Kayaba in his almighty form came in front of everyone and announced the start of the death game while rewarding all players with the Hand mirror. When taken out changed the appearance of the body to that of its original form.


    Kirito turned into a short and baby face 17-year-old meanwhile Klein turned into a guy in his thirties, and Kai stayed the same, both Kirito and Klein are shocked by the non-change but soon decided to pay attention to the big issue of death game at the moment.

 Chapter 5 - Part V The fight

    Following the change done by the mirror, players started freaking out and running around searching for ways to get out of the game. Kai Stood in the same place with an expressionless face and just observed the surrounding.


    Kai: Hope, send a message to Klaus to use this moment to leave town and go to all high experience places.


    Hope: Done. All the hidden classes have been unlocked. All the knowledge and skill are transferring directly to the master''s mind.


    Kai: Okay good.


    Hope: Skill will be embedded into muscle and Host can directly activate them to practice.


    Kai: Okay, level up to the required level needed to fight the boss and then show me the way to the boss.


    As he was walking out of the town he was suddenly stopped by Kirito who invited him to form a party with him. But Kai rejected him stating that he is not interested in fighting and will open a shop somewhere.


    Kirito feeling sad left after adding to the friend list.


    Kai smiled and started slowly walking along the path while playing with a very heavy sword for practice. Soon he arrived in a dungeon inside which many paths were going around but with the help of Hope, he directly went to maximum monster spawning area practice all his skills then went to fight the boss, as he was going to fight the boss he saw a large crowd of people coming his way among which was Kirito.


    When Kirito saw Kai alone standing in front of the boss gate he had a bad feeling so he tried to call out his name but he saw Kai smiling then entering the dungeon. People around him too have long noticed the boy and screamed at him to stop but regardless Kai just entered.


    Kai knew that Illfang the kobold lord was the final boss of this floor along with his three minions. Not caring a thing kai straight forth throw his sword and impelled one of the minions to the ground while punching the other into the remaining third, while running and sliding below Illfang dodging his the large ax which is trying to cut him in half he quickly recovers his sword and strikes back at the Illfang, striking again and again while practicing many different types of attacks, With each attack both Kai and Illfang start losing health, Kai inhales a heath potion and start fighting again. Ordering Hope to summon another heavy sword to practice double hand sword style fighting which Kirito gets later. He first pushes the one minion Running toward him while chopping off the arm of Illfang. Iffang roars and pulls out n¨­dachi used for close combat like katana. Seeing this Kai too, impelled both his sword into the last minion and take out his katana given to him by Hope. He and Illfang once again start fighting in close quarters ignoring all damages try different techniques and attacks, with the help of Hope drinking health portion every time his health goes into the red. After trying some techniques kai pushes Illfang with all his strength and puts away his katana and pick his both his swords he has impelled the minion who has long disappeared. Putting one of the swords away Kai impels Illfang into the ground killing him instantly.


    As he was picking the loot offered by boss death ''Coat of midnight'' the gate of the boss room opened and people came rushing in and looked at the player sole standing there. Among the crowd, Kirito came out running and said: Kai, Are you okay? Why didn''t you waited for others and barged into the room on your own?


    Kai: Well I told you I want to open a shop right?


    Kirito: Yes, what does this have to do with that?


    Kai: There was no good place on the first floor to open the shop so I decided to go to 2nd floor, You guys would have just slowed he down so I came on my own


    Hearing his response someone from the crowd come forth and started screaming: Look at this beta sc.u.m criticizing us, Now little shit pay us compensation for taking the boss alone and making every one of us waste our time.


    Kai moved his head a bit then swang his sword cutting one of the arms of the player.


    Kai: Well Kirito, I will meet you later, I have to hurry up or all the good locations will be taken again


    Before Kirito or anyone else can reply Kai has pushed open the door and went on the second floor. A large announcement ran out throughout the Aincrad.


    Kai smiled and started moving toward the village on the second floor.


    Now it was time to practice other fields of the blacksmith, Painter among others. Kai with the help of money provided by Hope which was in control of the entire Cardinal system bought a large shop and started forging various kinds of weapons using knowledge already learned by the system. Using modern knowledge with ancient knowledge acquired by the system Kai started experimenting. Meanwhile on the outside Klaus leading the guild ''Hope'' cleared the remaining 9 floors and achieved gained the title of the strongest. They also started requiring players to act secondly creating 9 command units to deal with various things. Asuna one of Kai''s favorite characters too enrolled into Hope believing it to live up to its name and climbed to no 3 within no 2 division.


    By the time floor 26th was cleared, Kai completed his experiments and gained mastery over the class group of blacksmith painter, fisherman among others.


    Kai decided to explore a bit and explored floors while practicing remaining sword skill and whatnot. after exploring everything He got tired and decided to join the guild who along with the rest of the front line has reached flood 28th. So he went to send a message to Klaus regarding his coming and Joining the guild. Klaus informed him of a meeting which is to take place to discuss floor boss plans.


    Kai wearing a simple jacket and having an ordinary sword arrived on the 28th floor and went into the meeting were various clans including Knight of the blood among others. Kai simply went near a wall and rested Soon Klaus accompanied by 3 people which included Asuna arrives in the room seeing Kai resting on the wall. Klaus nodded his head and started the meeting. Declaring that the leader of Hope will alone take on flood 28th boss. Everyone Along with his companion is startled by the announcement and various leaders started debating that Hope being the strongest clan should not turn arrogant. Klaus refuted the argument and said Hope''s leader will be the one fighting the boss alone and prove to everyone what it means to be powerful. Various leaders got enraged and asked the companions of Klaus to come to talk to them when Klaus is dead to which his companion replied that Klaus is not the leader but just a division head which got everyone confused.


    With Angre and arrogance, many guilds left leaving some small guild, knight of the blood and Hope members and Kirito behind.


    Klaus went forth and bowed to Kai: Welcome back master.


    The companions of his too: Well come back master.


    Kirito and rest curious over who the master is looked over and was completely stunned to see a tall 6''1 tall man with a complete set of black hair and expressionless face. Kayaba Akihiko too was a stunt to see the man he feared the most standing in front of him he never knew that the man too has been trapped in the game. Akihiko was one of the very few who have met Kai in the real world. Kai has even provided some answers to creating the game when he was facing a problem. Kai looked at Kirito and smiled and waved his hand a little. Then he looked at Asuna and smiled a little more: Thanks for all your hard work.


    Asuna seeing the most handsome man she has seen in life saying something like this completely turned red.


    Kirito was at first doubt whether the person standing in front of him was his friend or not but seeing him wave, He went forward to talk: Hey, I didn''t know you were such a big short, Why fight the boss alone?


    Kai: I hear there are these hot potatoes that are being sold on the 29th floor I don''t want to fight over others so I will rush in to be the first in line.


    Kirito: Stop joking, How about I go with you? You can eat the sweet potatoes afterward alone if you want


    Kai putting a hand on the heart and saying: No No sorry but I can''t change. Well anyway can you guys wait outside I need to talk to Knight of the blood leader He requests me to meet him today that''s why I''m especially here.


    Kirito: Okay I will wait outside.


    Klaus nodded and went outside along with other people who have stayed behind


    Heathcliff too orders his man to wait outside.


    Kai: Do you know why I wanted to meet you?


    Heathcliff: Master Lu, I truly didn''t know you were present during the game.


    Kai: Don''t worry about it. Try to control the GM function.


    Heathcliff hesitated and decided to call out the command: GM login ID: Heathcliff password xxxxxxx


    After getting no response he tried again but nothing happened.


    Heathcliff: Master have you done something?


    Kai: Yes, I wanted something you created so I joined in but then you went and trapped me so I decided to trap everyone


    Heathcliff: Master what do you want?


    Kai: Nothing, the game will continue as it''s going I like a girl so will be using your came to pursue her Hahaha


    Heathcliff: Master any command for me?


    Kai: Na continue your game


    Heathcliff: Okay master.


    Then Kai along with Heathcliff walked out of the meeting room.


    Kirito: So what did you two talked about?


    Kai: Well he wanted to duel with me when we reach flood 60. To decide who will lead to the party.


    Kirito: I have some work so I will be leaving first, see you later.


    Kai nodded and turned to his clan members: I will go and clear the floor then meet you in the evening for dinner. Invite them to my House I will cook for them.


    Klaus: Yes master.


    Kai nodded and started walking but then turned around looked at Asuna: Come along, Leaders usually have guards or something. I have decided to have a cute sword maiden.


    Asuna again turned red then ran after Kai


    After walking in silence for a while, Kai: Maiden I think you should pull out your sword. Some people are here to kill me.


    Asuna got startled for a moment then hurriedly pulled her sword


    Kai simply summoned his sword rushed to the center and broke the sword of all three players who were following them: Huh kids? Go back report to you captain I want compensation for this attempt. Bye.


    Asuna watched all this happen her mouth open in the shape of O


    Kai looked at her smiled and said: I know a good method to close a girl''s mouth do you want to see that.


    Asuna''s face turned red again and she hurriedly closed her mouth.


    Kai: Why don''t you speak? tell me how''s clan treating you?


    Asuna: b.. big brother Ryu and others are very corporative and supporting, they spoke a lot about there master every time they drank, I didn''t know you were there master.


    Kai: Ha they like to brag well anyway I have seen you on the first floor wearing a hoodie, You looked very cute.


    Asuna: Thank you. Why does everyone call you master?


    Kai: Well I use to teach them all when we were kids so continued to call me master till today. Do you want to eat something?


    Kai opened his lunch bag which had 3 burgers in it.


    Asuna nodded and picked one of those burgers: This is good. Did you create sauce too? Can you teach me too? I''m also interested in cooking


    Kai: Okay okay calm down eat we will talk afterward.


    Asuna nodded with a red face and ate the burgers slowly.


    Kai after completely eating the burger: Come it''s time for me to challenge the boss Asuna nodded and followed him


    Kai entered the dungeon alone and looked at the boss who had a body structure of a wolf but was standing on two legs holding 2 swords in his hands.


    Kai rushed into the boss and summon two swords in both his arms using one to block the attack of wolf boss while sweeping another toward the face and cutting one of his eyes making the boss loss 1/3 of the health on the 4th health bar, Kai without waiting for the boss to recover again swept his sword and cut one leg of the boss while using another to deflect the sword coming toward him. This is something he learned when he was practicing with other players to deflect by motioning the sword moment in another direction without talking on the force behind them. After deflecting Kai moved a bit backward and throw one of his swords toward the other leg hoping to impale it but the boss wolf moved back a bit and avoided the blade and swept both his swords toward Kai. Kai slid on the ground and attacked its legs once again making it lose the remaining health on the 3rd bar.


    Boss wolf moved a little backward creating space and then throwing both its sword toward Kai, Kai rushed and pulled out the sword which was impelled earlier and deflected the sword back to the boss wolf. Boss wolf out of nowhere pulled two short knives and jumped up toward Kai, due to the sudden jump of the boss Kai wasn''t able to respond clearly and used his swords to deflect the knives attack. Jumping backward to create some distance but the boss monster didn''t let loss so Kai throw both his swords one by one at the monster. Getting some opportunity, Kai too pulled 2 knives drank a heath portion and run toward the monster. Both of them got into a knifing contest, Kai on the losing end due to height difference. With only one bar remaining of health the monster roar and jumped on the kai, Kai giving no opportunity to the monster first jumped into the air avoiding the first knife while deflecting the other with his own and implanted the other Knive into the right eyes of the monster while pulling it downwards with complete strength, leaving no time for the monster to recover he swept his another knife into the monster''s chest where he pressured his heart his and scar it down to making the monster loss it last health bar at once.

 Chapter 6 - Part VI Sword Art Online

    Kai put the knives back to inventory and fixed his dress. After taking over the cardinal system Kai has already received the pass for another world it looked like a very ordinary just a slip paper slip like a bus ticket with English written on it. Kai had a long time ago decided to take his AI hope with him. After Killing the floor boss of 28th level rumors regarding Kai and his power spread throughout Aircard, Guild activities went on as normal managed by Klaus, Kai only focused on 2 things I flirting with Asuna and 2nd training her in Sword art. Two got very close and started their relationship in the open. Guild along with the corporations of other guilds started challenging the floor bosses. Neither Kai nor Asuna participated in the battle after floor 35th both stayed on floor 23rd and lead a normal life.


    It was at that time when Klaus along with other cleared floor 50th that Kai asked Asuna to marry him who said Yes. After getting married both Asuna and Kai enjoyed their time together till floor 55th was cleared. Kai returned to the front lines for the floor 56th floor and soloed the floor and went on to challenge all the floor following after a month break on each floor during which He and Asuna explored the floor. When sweeping floor 59th He sent a message to Heathcliff for battle in the Arena along with the message that it''s time to end the game.


    Heathcliff accepted the challenge.


    All the members of Hope were ordered to assemble and come floor 54th where New HQ was established.


    Kai in his speech spoke against the anti-guilds who Hunt human and declared that Hope will sweep each floor and hunt down all members of such guild. Kai also declared the name of the members within the guild itself who were spies of such guilds. Members were arrested and confined by Hope. Kai leading all the Division Heads attacked Laughing Coffin at their base, It was a surprise attack loss of the Hope side were nil whereas 2/3 of the Laughing Coffin members were whipped out. Kai leading the charge gave them two options either surrender or fight. After losing most of its leading members, players surrendered. Many more guilds such as Titan''s Hand after the defeat of Laughing Coffin chose to surrender, Such players ID tags were noted down and were confined in jails and such.


    After a month of push and pull, the time to battle Heathcliff had arrived.


    Kai walked out in the Arena where he found Heathcliff standing in front of him with his battle gear, Kai nodded and took out 2 swords surprising everyone.


    The battle was short, Kai charged into Heathcliff who first deflected both Kai swords then swept his sword toward him, Kai mid-air twisted his body and blocked his sword with his own and pushed his another sword toward the leg of Heathcliff cutting it off clean.


    Heathcliff having his leg cut off went on the support of his shield to stand and block the attack of Kai. Kai follows through with an attack in which he used one of his swords to push the shield away from Heathcliff thus creating an opportunity to attack directly on his body. Heathcliff seeing this used his other hand to create defense but Kai glided his sword onto Heathcliff''s sword and ripped Heathcliff in Half making him lose all his remaining health but just as soon as his health went into the red a notification stating

 Chapter 7 - Part VII The return of the beginning

    It''s been 3 years since the death games have stopped, Lu An after some modification to the egg making it operates and assessable via the Hope which acted as the parent umbrella covering everything that is created under the egg including anything which is created using the egg as a model, after releasing the egg on the server for people to download for free and release their games giving complete freedom to the users. Asuna completed her studies and got engaged to Lu An while waiting to get married after she completes her college, meanwhile Little treasure got married to his long-time girlfriend Kim who Lu An believed was from the novel What''s wrong with secretary Kim? but due to his influence, the company she was supposed to work in and meet her childhood hero doesn''t exist or have been destroyed. Lu An acted as the best man at the wedding leading an Image of him to be published and the world coming to know about the reclusive Emporer of the world.


    Lu An also decided that Japan was too small for him so he expended his company to other nations throughout the world while overtaking underground and creating bases in Europe, China, and America. Expending his fang through everything occupying 68% of the market in one way or another. He created a clan-based system making so that the generations to come will act as the branch family while protecting and serving the main branch.


    Soon after 8 years, Lu An found that Asuna to be a patient of Huntington''s disease. Knowing about the disease Asuna decided not to give birth respecting her decision Lu An also didn''t push for anything. Thus, Lu An decided to divide his empire in part giving half to both his family while giving another to people who have served him throughout the years and retire somewhere peaceful with Asuna.


    Asuna and Lu An lived peacefully for the entire 19 years together after which disease started showing it''s symptoms. Asuna begged him to leave her alone and go on to the next world. During these 19 years, Lu An told her about everything and also told her she can live on in him by uploading her consciousness, Asuna just smiled and told him He needs to learn to let it go and something are just meant to be remembered in memories only.


    December 24, 2057, marked the death of Asuna. Asuna''s dead peacefully holding the hand of Lu An while smiling at him. Lu An after her death stayed at the same place for 3 years then returned to China to meet his parents one last time before leaving the world.


    Lu An arrived in China on 2nd February 2061, No one came to pick him up or to greet him. Instructing Hope to arrange for a taxi, Lu An arrived at his birth home, the Lu mansion located on a secluded hill.


    Lu An got out of the taxi and started slowly walking toward the Home while remembering his childhood and the rest of his life. The moment he went near the mansion he heard Little treasure laughing along with his wife. He first tried to move on but heard them talking.


    Kim Mo: What do you think happened to your brother it''s been a while since we heard from him?


    Little treasure: Who cares? He is just a ghost from the past.


    Kim Mo: Have you formed a plan for your parents to give you a complete part of his company?


    Little treasure: Don''t worry about it. He loved me the most and left the most for me so no need to worry about such small things. Since childhood, he overshadowed me doing everything Humanly possible. The least he can do is leave me his company now that he has run off with a dumb Whore who has brought his what? Nothing but destruction.


    Lu An eyes moved a little hearing his brother, he shocks his head and realized he too seems to have forgotten the concept of Greed and what it can make out of a person.


    He then after thinking a while instructed Hope to take over everything again after he gets permission from his parents.


    Shaking his head he went into the house and found his mother and father sitting on the sofa looking at an old childhood photo of him and his siblings. His father holding his mother while she turned each page while commenting on everything.


    Lu An went up to them and hugged his parents.


    Both his parents got startled but when they saw it was their third soon got stunted.


    Ning Xi: What happened? Is everything okay?


    Lu An: Nothing I just missed you both.


    Overcoming from the shock his father asked: Why are you sad?


    Lu An: This is the last time I might be seeing you both for a while


    Ning Xi: Are you going somewhere?


    Lu An: Yes


    Lu An got on his knees and bowed to both his parents for giving birth to him.


    Ning Xi: You know We both love you very much right?


    Lu An: Yes. I love you both very much too. I have decided to donate all my properties to orphans I hope you both approve of my actions.


    Ning Xi: It''s your money, do whatever you want we will always be proud of you.


    Lu TingXiao: Yes. Take care of yourself.


    Lu An nodded hugged his parents again instructed Hope to distribute all his assets to the orphans around the globe in Asuna''s name. then went to his room in the old mansion and pulled out the ticket which was always in his pocket anytime he wishes to see it. grabbing the ticket.


    Lu An: I wish to travel to the next world which is Naruto and wants to be reborn as Naruto when He is 3 years old.

 Chapter 8 - Part VIII The world of death

    Lu An felt a pull space in front of him broke and he arrived in front of a counter. Greeted by a young man: Welcome to Hotel del Luna. Due to your special circ.u.mstances. I have already informed the manager to come.


    Lu An got stunt hearing the name of the Hotel as he remembered it being a TV Korean drama of some kind. Soon he is greeted by young women who told him to follow her. Lu An nodded and went after her soon they arrived in front of the room -21 room. Young women told him to go in and place the body on the bed so that his soul can move onto the next world. Lu An placed his body on the bed and then felt a pull sucking him whole into space leaving Behind an empty body on the bed.


    Lu An soon found himself sleeping on the floor. near a garbage can. He found his height to be too short in height and poor muscle density. Going near a pool of water he saw himself. A yellow-haired kid with very bright blue eyes. After staring for a while, he started asserting his memories. Lu An who has brought along Hope with him as his soul bound item started analyzing his memories and condition of the body. After listing all his memories he understood he has been thrown out of the orphanage when he turned 3 and now is living on the street. He started laughing out loud after thinking that he donated billions to orphans in his previous life and now has turned into an orphan who has been throw out of the orphanage. Following this, his mood is uplifted.


    Lu An/Naruto instructs Hope is access the line connecting him and the Nine tail. Hope analysis the f¨±injutsu provides that it needs more information regarding the subject to fully control the seal and that for now all it can do is show Naruto in front of the nine tail trapped inside the seal.


    Naruto: Link it


    Naruto soon found himself standing in the pool of water in front of a huge gate


    Naruto: I''m sorry about the death of your previous host. I''m named kai let''s get along. I have some plans where I will need you to corporate. For now, I want to ask if you know how to do transformation Jutsu.


    Kyuubi moved a little opened its eyes and saw a very little boy standing in front of him speaking in a language he didn''t know: Boy I can''t understand you.


    Naruto nodded and started speaking Japanese instead of English which he usually spoke.


    Kyuubi got startled hearing that naruto has died and got up on all four of his feet.


    Naruto: I can understand you are upset by his death but let''s give it meaning. Do you have some kind of summoning contract?


    Kyuubi observed boy in front of him then nodded and pulled one of its teeth out and gave it to naruto: Boy this is one of the contacts of the fox. I once broke into Mount Myoboku and saw those damn frogs practicing Senjutsu so I copied them stole their special liquid and created a special branch of foxes who would practice Senjutsu.


    Naruto nodded: From what I know you can estimate people by their feeling and emotions can you help me find something?


    Kyuubi: What are you looking for?


    Naruto: Do you know a person named Orochimaru? the one who smells like a snake?


    Kyuubi: Yes I remember that bastard. He once took some of my chakras too.


    Naruto: Can you find his hideouts?


    Kyuubi: Okay go left and then straight into the forest for about 2 Km you will arrive there. You can also sign the contract and then have one of those foxes carry you there.


    Naruto: Thanks, let''s first sign the contract.


    Naruto signed the contract of the fox and summoned a small fox of about 3 meters in height.


    Fox looked at Naruto: Are you the one who has summoned me?


    Naruto: Yes, Kyuubi sama told me you can help me solve my problem


    Fox: I see, so Kyuubi sama and instructed, Okay my name is Yuto what do you need?


    Naruto: there is this location we have to go there without anyone seeing us.


    Yuto: Get on my back and tell me where to take you.


    Naruto after getting on his back: Go to the places which smell like old snakes.


    Yuto: Hold tight.


    Soon naruto and Yuto arrived at one of the water tanks.


    Naruto looked at Yuto and asked: Are you sure this is the spot?


    Yuto: Yes, the Upper half is empty and is filled with old snake skins.


    Naruto nodded and started looking for some kind of door with the help of Hope. Soon found a little doorway inside it was a small room filled with all different sorts of doc.u.ments. Naruto memorized everything with the help of Hope giving him perfect recall ability. After memorizing everything naruto put everything back and went over to the other locations. He finally hit jackpot when he found three very small tubes of blood marked 1st Hokage 2nd Hokage and Mito Uzumaki. Naruto hurridly put them away.


    Naruto also asked Yuto about the fox clan and their Senjutsu.


    Yuto: See I don''t know how to use Senjutsu only 3 elders are known to be perfect Senjutsu, You can come and try your luck maybe you might learn something.


    Naruto nodded and told Yuto to reverse summon him, from his memory he remembered Kakashi finding naruto on the street when he was 4 and then taking him to the Hokage who then gave him a separate home and some monthly pocket money.


    Naruto arrived in the land of the fox which looked like a Huge mountain with many caves in it.


    Yuto brought along Naruto to meet the elders who upon learning about him being Kyuubi''s Host agree to let him study Senjutsu.


    With the help of the foxes, naruto learned basic of the Senjutsu and was able to gather natural chakra while remaining in a single place.


    Soon 7 months went by Hokage too have noticed that naruto is missing and issued mission to all ninjas to be on the lookout.


    Naruto after learning the basics went back to Konoha while hiding the three tubes of blood with the foxes.


    Naruto wearing the same clothes since he has been thrown out of orphanage walked into the Hokage tower. People soon noticed a bad smell coming toward them and saw a child walking toward them.


    Naruto walked up to the reception and asked to inform Hokage he wants to meet him


    The receptionist just ignored him while continuing to work on her nails so naruto too ignored her and went inside the Hokage tower and knocked on the Hokage office door.


    Hokage: Come in


    Naruto opened the door and went inside with an indifferent face.


    Hiruzen got startled seeing naruto appear out of nowhere but before he could speak Naruto spoke.


    Naruto: I came to offer my greeting, I hear you might be having a grandson or daughter soon, I just hope unlike 4th Hokage child 3rd Hokage grandchild doesn''t have to go around picking food from the garbage around the town to fill his hunger.


    Naruto smiled a bit then bowed and turned around to leave.


    Hiruzen: What do you mean naruto? Where have you been? I have been looking everywhere for you.


    Naruto turned back and spoke in a very cold voice: I mean I hope your grandchild doesn''t end up like me after your death, being the son of a Hokage but neither has a house to call home nor any means to fulfill his stomach. I was always here. I ask you where were you? When on my birthday people gathered together to kill me? When I was thrown out of the orphanage? You talk about the will of fire, is this your will of fire to throw the son of a hero who saved your village on the street?


    Hiruzen: Naruto I don''t know what you are talking about?


    Naruto smiled: Goodbye Old man I will return one day and make sure your grandchildren understand what I''m feeling.


    And with a poof naruto disappeared, He resummoned into the land of the fox. His motive to go to the village was to do two things first collect material like wire and stuff which he found easily in the garbage secondly to collect all the inheritance left in the Namikaze house with the help of Kyuubi he arrived at his parent house easily due to the blood seals which his parents have used around the house others couldn''t enter the compound.


    Naruto being their son easily entered and started collecting all the things due to the presence of Hope in his soul naruto only has to go through anything once and everything is already uploaded in his brain. He also found notes of his mother and father on various F¨±injutsu and absorbed everything. He also found the ninja Jutsu scroll of his father with various techniques including Multi shadow clone Jutsu among others. Naruto learned everything within minutes with the help of Hope. After collecting everything he went around the house looking for money. He found some storage scroll collected them. After completing everything He went to the Hokage tower.

 Chapter 9 - Part something Return something

    9 years pass by Naruto stayed in the land of foxes practicing various things. He gained complete mastery over F¨±injutsu and started creating a various seal on own his with the help of Hope. He also created his computer and analyzed the blood of 1st 2nd and Mito Uzumaki. After 6 years of deep research into DNA genetics, Naruto finally broke down the mystery of bloodlines. after analyzing everything. He focused on two things only first learning Senjutsu, secondly learning and creating new Jutsu, as the use of chakra was limitless. He also remembered that the Uchiha massacre will be happening soon so he decided to cash in too. Soon after Tobi and Itachi were done killing people, Naruto stored the body of one sample each one kid who hasn''t unlocked the Sharingan one who has unlocked it one who has unlocked all three totems and finally the one who has unlocked Mangekyo Sharingan. after collecting his share naruto went back to the land of fox and started analyzing the blood at a different level again. He also ordered one of his foxes to be on the lookout of any Hyuga members who are going out on their own. Soon after only three days of wait, one of the branch members went out. Fox named Roi quickly informed naruto who made a Rasangen and waited for the next phase of the plan foxes around the forest started leaving leaves on the floor, Leafs with seals on them. As soon as the branch member went close to the leaf naruto appeared in a flash and embedded Rasangen right into the heath of the Hyuga. Picking up the body of the now-dead Hyuga naruto placed it into a storage scroll and then along with all the foxes disappeared.


    Within 7 years Naruto has understood the concept of bloodline and how it changes and was sure he can change and modify his own but for the moment decided to focus on 2 things alone first complete chakra control second creating and doing Jutsu of various elements.


    When he reached the age of 11 he has completed all his goals and sent one of his foxes to spy on Tazuna the bridge builder. Roi followed Tazuna from the land of waves to the Konoha and informed Naruto about the progress. Naruto too got excited finally achieving the thing he has been looking for. Following days Roi reported the team of Kakashi along with Sasuke, Sakura, and Hinata leaving the village. Naruto too decided to wait along till the final battle at the bridge. after Kakashi got trapped in the water bubble, the rest of the team turned useless. Sasuke in his arrogance rushed to attack alone meanwhile Hinata and Sakura stood by Tazuna. Kakashi seeing Sasuke running alone decided Now or never moment and used his Mangekyo Sharingan and created a gape in the water buddle freeing and then attacking Zabuza who was distracted due to Sasuke. Soon Yuki comes up in the form of Hunter nin and took injured Zabuza away. Meanwhile, Tazuna carried Kakashi and went to the land of waves along with the rest of the team. Naruto watching all this wanted to beat his head against the wall, about how useless everyone in the team is.


    One fine morning naruto sleeping in the grass is awakened by Haku. Naruto seeing that it''s Haku attacks him using sleeping powder. and quickly with his speed put Haku to sleep. After collecting a tube of Haku blood. Naruto left Haku sleeping on the ground and went away soon after 15 mins or so Haku gained consciousness.


    Naruto hiding in the shadow waiting for the battle to begin soon Zabuza along with Haku appear but this time Kakashi and his team didn''t appear alone but brought along team 8 which consists of Kurenai Y¨±hi as leader Shiro Kiba and Amell Hyuga as it''s a member.


    Soon the battle starts with Zabuza taking on injured Kakashi and Kurenai alone while Haku taking the genins of both teams 7 and 8. Hinata along with clan member Amell went to protect the client using Byakugan. Sasuke already alone rushed toward Haku along with Kiba who though of the battle as a game. Shiro maintained a small distance and observed the battle meanwhile sakura just stood in her position looking pretty. The battle was very boring. Zabuza alone was enough to hold both Kakashi and Kurenai Haku played with little genins for a while making Sasuke fare one totem Sharingan over his hatred of being powerless. Naruto got bored after a while and decided to Jump in the battle.


    Naruto wearing a lit Blue t-shirt and black jeans and sports shoes jumped in the middle of Zabuza and Kakashi fighting Kicking both Mid air and creating a distance between the two.


    Zabuza and Kakashi both got stunted seeing someone pop out of nowhere.


    Naruto moved to Zabuza: I need half of that sword so why don''t you give it to me? I will leave after that.


    then turned his face toward Kakashi: Is the old man dead yet? Should I come back to kick his grandson on the street?


    Zabuza quickly recovered and screamed: Over my dead body kid


    Naruto shook his head and disappeared appearing in front of Zabuza the very next second with a Rasangen in his hand implanted it into Zabuza''s stomach.


    Zabuza suddenly felt his muscles twist and finally break into many pieces.


    Haku ran toward Zabuza as soon as he saw his conditions.


    Naruto ignoring everything picked up the sword and started measuring it.


    Zabuza broke his last breath in Haku''s arm, making Haku go into a crazy state and rushed toward Naruto who kept examining the blade. As soon as Haku was ready to attack Naruto, Naruto simply swept the sword in diagonal form. Naruto: I left you alive once already. If I leave you alive now too, people will take it as a bad example so bye-bye I guess.


    Naruto nodding his head appreciation the blade moved his gaze toward Kakashi: I would also need that Sharingan you have, will you give it too me or I have to take it?


    Kakashi: Naruto, Come back to the village we can sit down and talk


    Naruto: Man, You all could have locked me in a prison trained into a weapon or at worst make me a mindless tool but you guys shouldn''t have left me to eat on the street. That did a number on me. Well anyway, I heard your father white fang was famous for swords so did you learn anything from him?


    Kakashi: Naruto for what we did we are sorry to come back to the village, Hokage sama will explain everything to you.


    Naruto: I''m bored, So Kakashi Sharingan or you precious students and then I will ripe out the Sharingan myself?


    Kakashi: Naruto this was a gift from my dead friend I can''t under any condition give it to you.


    Naruto nodded then rushed to injured Sasuke awake him by twisting his hand and collected his blood in a tube: Man Blood from a living Uchiha, dream come true. Itachi was so sad when I brought up the topic of killing Sasuke, He almost revealed the secret. How Hokage along with Danzo forced him to kill everyone in Uchiha clan while they hold his little brother as their Hostage. It''s kind of funny don''t you think about how you want to kill the only person who is hellbent on saving you? Hahahaha


    Sasuke eye''s wide open as he heard naruto spoke about Itachi.


    Naruto: Well anyway, Next time you see Itachi tells him to come and eat my shit or else I will kill you. Hahahaha knowing Itachi he might do it to keep his idiotic brother alive.


    Kakashi: Naruto don''t speak nonsense


    Naruto: How am I speaking nonsense? Isn''t it true that Itachi is currently acting like a dog for the Hokage who''s job is to go into S criminals who can kill him anytime they want and provide information on them in exchange for baby Sasuke''s good night sleep.


    Naruto throws Sasuke away while speaking: Anyway, Sharingan or your students?


    Kakashi pissed at naruto reveling an S rank secret: Naruto If you want to talk then talk if not then fight


    Naruto next moment disappeared and a rain of blood come out. Sakura''s body split in two one head and then rest of the body.


    Kakashi stunted to see naruto killing someone.


    Naruto turned around and saw Kurenai trying to activate Genjutsu, Naruto just smiled at her: I''m what people call a monster Kurenai sama Genjutsu doesn''t work on the little old me.

 Chapter 10 - Part X Sharingan or sa la la?

    Naruto smiled at both Kakashi and Kurenai: Kakashi do you remember this?


    Naruto created Chidori in the right hand and showed it to Kakashi: I will ask again Sharingan or a person life


    Kakashi: Wait, naruto we can talk about this


    Naruto once again disappeared and the next moment his hand went through the chest of Amell the member of team 8. next he pulled out his hand and pushed it on the ground killing all the bugs on it Which Shiro has been placing since earlier when Naruto started talking.


    Naruto looked at him and said: Don''t worry you and your bugs will be next.


    Kakashi: No Wait, naruto, I will take you to your godfather.


    Naruto: I already met that pervert don''t worry after that Old man dies I will make sure anyone who interferes in making his grandson a beggar will die.


    Naruto slowly starts walking towards Shiro while having Chidori in his hand: Don''t worry it will not be painful


    Naruto suddenly disappeared and stabs Akamaru separating one of its legs.


    Kiba: NOOO...


    Naruto: Do you think I don''t know what you''re trying to do Kakashi? What was the name of the dog? Pakku or something right who you sent to call for reinforcements. Don''t worry we both know I can take your eyes right now but I won''t, I will wait for you to each time lead a team outside Konoha and then kill them all in front of you. Making sure you know what it means to live in hell every day. And you baby Sasuke make sure you deliver my message to Itachi I will save my largest poop for him to eat. Hahahaha.


    Kyuubi: Why do you need to act crazy again?


    Naruto: Because if people think you want to burn the world and you burn down the world no one truly cares. You see Kurama people are stupid they worship the powerful but also fear them. It''s just a cycle of never-ending hate which goes on and on in a circle. Well anyway, we got what we needed let''s go back.


    With the reverse summoning Jutsu, Naruto went into the land of foxes and started by studying the sword and it''s properties first. the sword can reproduce itself by taking iron from the blood of its victim.


    Naruto researched various properties and methods of the inner workings of the sword and started creating nanotech using it.


    Using nano teach created by the sword Naruto went into Hibernation for 5 months during which his DNA sequence modified and changed into the properties of Senju Uchiha Uzumaki and Hyuga clan. turning his hair dark red while changing his eye color to dark purple nano teach also enhanced his body structure making him about 6''1 like his previous life and turned Him into a completely different man. His chakra reverse too went off the marks almost matching 6 tail while his talent grade also upgraded making it easier for him to create and be compatible with new elements such as darkness and light.


    Naruto sent one of his foxes to be on the lookout for the latest news coming out of Konoha. One of the foxes informed him that Chunin exams will be held in Konoha after 8 months, Naruto knowing about the Orochimaru''s attack started hatching a plan to obtain Shisui''s Mangeky¨­ Sharingan from Danzo so he started training in Nine tail chakra mode, due to changes made using nanotech on its body and modification in his bloodline, His body could take up to 5 tails of nine tail chakra, for insurance Naruto also started practicing wooden Jutsu which he can use as a distractions and escape.


    With everything in place, naruto practice hard throughout the 8 months reaching the strength of lower-level Kage in normal mode whereas capable of fighting Higher if he uses both nine tail chakra and Senjutsu.


    With the change in His appearance through modification, Naruto simply walked in Konoha through the front gate possing as one of the other side villagers coming to see Chunin exam finals.


    Naruto saw that Sasuke has changed and now caring a dead look in his eyes, not arrogance like he usually does, With the death of Sakura and Amell dying while and Kiba losing his partner leading team 7 and 8 appears to be merged now consisting of Sasuke, Hinata, and Shiro with Kakashi and Kurenai as their leader. Naruto also observed Hokage looking bit older than the last time he saw him seated near him the Kazekage Naruto noticing that the fights are about to begin got up and went to the bathroom leaving a clone in place, geared up Senjutsu to find the location of Danzo and sensed him inside northern part of the village rushing to his location Naruto in a flash pulled two short knives with seal marks of Flying thunder God technique on them summoned 10 shadow clone each with knives in their hand. Out of the shadow out of nowhere Naruto along with his clone throw knives at Danzo and his escort team of 2, as soon as the knifes got close, 2 clones disappeared and embedded Rasengan into the two guards, while real naruto flashed in front of Danzo who being a Kage level ninja himself, blocked Naruto hand which was about to plant a punch in his stomach.


    After blocking the attack, Danzo jumped backward and created some distance and saw his attacker.


    A tall about 6'' men with dark purple eyes standing near the two now dead escort root member.


    Naruto smiled at Danzo: Do you remember me Danzo sama?


    Danzo: Who are you boy?


    Naruto: I''m the monster you created don''t you remember? You told the whole village how I''m the reincarnation of the big bad fox and I don''t deserve to live


    Danzo: You''re Naruto??? Why are you here?


    Naruto: I''m here to collect the Sharingan you stole, see I don''t have parents but even I know it''s bad to steal from others.


    Danzo started thinking about how does Naruto knows about the sharingan but decided to put his thoughts aside for now and focused on Naruto: You want Sharingan soo much so here you can have it?


    With a quick motion of the hand, Danzo tried to remove the bandage covering his Mangeky¨­ Sharingan but a hand stopped midway, Danzo tried to move it using his complete force but wasn''t able too


    Naruto: You see last time I clashed with a team from Konoha they had a member from Aburame clan, I liked their use to bugs to attack the enemy without them Knowing. So I made some bugs of my own, some of which are currently inside you controlling your everything. Well anyway, I will be taking that Sharingan now.


    Naruto comes forth and pulled out the Sharingan from his right eyes after which Naruto punched and blinded the other eye of Danzo.


    Naruto smiled and said: Well I need you to do one last thing now


    Danzo''s fake arm with first Hokage cells started going out of control and started growing a Huge tree, Naruto laughed loudly waved Danzo bye and disappeared using the seal he had created earlier went back to the arena in a flash. Taking his original seat as the observer He waited for the attack to start.


    Matches were boring some tried to overpower the other while some just used basics to outwit the other. Naruto observed the formation around the Hokage first and then started calculating ways he can interpret the fight and cash out big, One of the ways he could think was that to kill one of the sound 4 giving no opportunity for the barrier to be created but quickly dismissed it thinking that it might lead the Hokage coming out alive. Thus after thinking a lot, he finalizes that at first he will tag one of the sound four then observe the fight while leaving a seal knife inside the barrier thus creating the opportunity to intervene can cash out.


    Naruto nodded and after creating 5 clones to go and plant seals started acting like a normal viewer and started to bet on the matches.

 Chapter 11 - Part XI The great expriment.

    Soon the attack begins, Gaara started losing control his cousins quickly carried him off out of the arena, while both kage stood up getting ready to fight, sound 4 rushing to create the barrier but Naruto clone in the form of root members interpreted them leaving seal on each of them.


    while leaving a knife on top of the dorm while in the pretense of rebounded weapon. Kabuto with his plan activated mass hypnotize making the crowd sleep, Naruto too acted as if he has been caught in the effect and pretended to sleep


    Soon battle went on Orochimaru summoned all three Hokages but failed to revive 4th Hokage placed the seal on 1st and the 2nd Hokage. Naruto seeing the time have some disappeared and went to Hokage compound to get the last thing Konoha can offer him, the Forbidden Jutsu scrolls. Naruto quickly copies the scroll with the help of Home again disappeared and appearing inside the barrier when Hashirama Senju has just used deep forest Jutsu. Naruto appeared and used the same Jutsu matching the power used by the first Hokage.


    Surprising both the third Hokage and his student.


    3rd: Who might you be?


    Naruto: Old man I have come to collect, I told you didn''t I? I will make your grandson live the life of a beggar like you made me live.


    3rd shocked: NARUTO??


    Naruto ignoring Hiruzen looked at Orochimaru: I''m quite interested in your research regarding different bloodlines, I will soon come to collect it. See you then.


    Naruto looked back at Hokage: I have heard disabled beggars get more pity thus more food don''t worry I will make your grandson into a proper beggar.


    Naruto nodding his head looked at 1st and 2nd Hokage: I''m the current Host of Nine tail. The moment you trapped them into humans was the moment you insured peace doesn''t exist in this world. I''m proud of both of you, God of Shinobi huh?


    Naruto with the puff disappeared again appearing outside the barrier in the original viewer''s gallery where various Jonin''s and Chunin''s fought the sound and sand nin, Naruto using the seal he left on Kakashi when he kicked him back while interpreting the fight Kakashi and Zabuza''s fight. Naruto in a quick motion with the help of 3 clones that he had created earlier in preparation quickly attacked arm and leg of Kakashi while it dug out the Sharingan out of his eyes.


    After digging out the eyes, Naruto quickly jumped backward as Gai came to rescue Kakashi. Naruto using the seal on various places around Konoha quickly disappeared leaving Gai no chance to retaliate.


    Naruto put the Sharingan into another liquid tube stored it in a scroll then used Senjutsu to locate Gaara to collect a bit of one tail chakra.


    Naruto running in a fast speed raced toward Gaara after arriving saw Gaara in his incomplete one tail form attacking Sasuke and Hinata.


    Naruto rushed and kicked Gaara to the ground turned to Sasuke: Did you pass my message? Have you seen Itachi yet?


    Sasuke and Hinata got stunted seeing Naruto who looked very different from the last time they have seen him.


    Naruto ignoring both of them rushed to Gaara and started making various seals, with the help of Hope unlocking the seal of one tail which was placed on Gaara when he was a kid.


    One tail roar and came it''s beast form expending to a full-scale monster.


    Naruto seeing this nodded: Kurama, Do you want to come out and Play?


    Kurama: I thought you will never ask.


    Naruto and Kurama switched positions, Naruto''s body started covering in red chakra and started expending reaching the size of complete 9 tail in its beast form Kurama roared letting his chakra befall everywhere.


    Shukaku: Stupid fox why are you here?


    Kurama: I need a bit of your chakra will you give it nicely or do I have to take it myself?


    Shukaku: Come and show me what you got you stupid fox.


    Shukaku quickly jumped in the area and sent an air blast toward Kurama, who simple repealed the air blast using its tail and then rushed to gather the Shukaku who was in mid-air and flipped him. Kurama quickly went jumped into the air slashing the only tail Shukaku had off clean.


    One of the clones of Naruto quickly went and storied the tail.


    Kurama seeing that their task is complete, switched with Naruto who came into human form again. Naruto then used a wooden style to push Shukaku to the ground punching Gaara walking him up then Using proper sealing Jutsu to seal one tail properly into Gaara.


    With all, it''s tasks completed, Naruto decided to leave Konoha. He looked back at Sasuke and Hinata who were staring at him in fear.


    Naruto gave them a flashing smile and then disappeared.


    Naruto knew that Tobi will start collecting beast about 4 years from now, decided to start planning. Naruto went back to the land of fox and started by learning and practicing all the Jutsu''s from the forbidden scroll. When he came upon the summoning: Impure world reincarnation He gave hope the task to modify the Jutsu during which he leaned all the wooden Jutsu''s of First Hokage and completed some of the incomplete Jutuse of the second Hokage. One of his foxes informed him about the death of 3rd Hokage and the princess being nominated for the Hokage position. Without Gaara and Orochimaru losing the ability to perform Jutsu. Jiraya swept the entire forces using Senjutsu.


    Naruto also put in his Nanotech into use to modify both the Sharingan''s so that they can change into Eternal Mangeky¨­ Sharingan when he implants them in his eyes. Using Orochimaru as the basic naruto also started working on modifying Dead demon consuming seal, Naruto after planning a lot. Naruto decided to summon the reaper to come in contact with the lesser God of this world and know if they have any task for him.


    After 6 months he has successfully implanted both the Sharingan. After that, he started practicing the use Kotoamatsukami on people making them do His bidding, using one such person he taught them Dead demon consuming seal and have them summon the reaper.


    Shinigami: Why have you summoned me mortal?


    Naruto bowed: Greeting lord death, I bear the wish to fulfill any task you deem need to be complete in this world or any


    Shinigami: I know about your deal and karma but I''m just an image of my true self thus can''t give you a task but if you wish you can go and complete the task I have in the next world.


    Naruto: I thank Lord''s death for giving me this opportunity. Can you kindly give me any information about the task I have to perform?


    Shinigami: In that world, there was a bridge which always brought the soul of the people who tried to cross it but one day a group of three brothers came forth, using magic and working together they created a wooden bridge and crossed the river, seeing their quick wit and courage to face me I decided to reward them each with a wish, First wished for the strongest wand to be more powerful then anyone in the world, Second chose to bring back someone who has already crossed afterlife while the third humbly wished for child and upcoming generation to be safe. I fulfilled the wish of the first by giving him a wand made out of elder tree, while told the second that his wish can''t be fulfilled but the lateral begged and whipped for the wish so I gave in while I gave the third a blanket made out of my clothes which would act as a surety of hope even in the darkest time. First went on to challenge people after people using the wand I gave him, His victory got to his head and he started bragging how he has even defeated even me. Second, he brought along his now revived lover and also bragged how I after facing defeat brought back his lover back. the third one quietly went home, Kissed him a wife and gave the blanket to his son whose name was Edward de Elder who united all of England and later become known as the true King of England. Greed possed people turned against the first two brothers, First was killed by his closest friend while he was sleeping which the second''s lover was r.a.p.ed and abused in front of him leading him to kill both his lover and then Himself. I want you to collect all three gifts from that world if you fulfill that task I will reward you.


    Naruto: Thank you Lord for the opportunity, After completing this world I will embark on the journey to finish your quest.


    Shinigami: Good, As a reward for taking the task I will help you get in touch with this world god.


    Naruto: I thank the Lord for the reward.

 Chapter 12 - Prepration

    ???: Mortal I have a task for you, there are currently 3 god trees around different planets including this one I want you to go and remove them and kill all those damn Otsutsuki members, If you fulfill the task I will fulfill one wish of yours. I''m sleepy so do whatever you want.


    Leaving behind a stunt Naruto, space closes again and the Shinigami too disappeared.


    After recovering from the shock, Naruto went quite before speaking: Kurama you understand what this means right?


    Kurama: We always knew about the possibility, let''s go according to the plan and use the wish in the end.


    Naruto nodded: Yes remember our code, Be bad or people will thing bad. Hahaha


    With about three years remaining Naruto changed his plans.


    He created about 500 clones and told them to gain maximum chakra manipulation ability. He created another 50 clones to build a real-world version of Hope super AI to analyze the DNA genetic in depth. While creating around 50 clones to work on modifying Sasuke''s DNA so that he can gain Rinnegan. Naruto then used the rest of his and Kurama chakra into creating 1500 clones of which 500 would work on creating different seals. 500 of whom will go around and gather bodies of the dead for his arm while 200 will work on creating new Jutsu and the remaining 300 would practice each element and gain affiliation to the max.


    Like this 3 years went by Naruto with the help of Hope unlock more genetic locks in his blood and become able to manipulate any part of his body at will, while gaining Rinnegan with 11 totems in each eye. He also gained the ability to manipulate chakra at will and manifest a physical form of it in the real world using which he can seal anything or block anything. With his proficiency, he also gained the ability to do Jutsu via one hand. And also the ability to suck chakra of others via those manifested chakra chains.


    Each totem of Rinnegan reflecting an element: Fire, water, air, earth, Lighting, Lava, Magnet, Boil, Yin, Yang, Yin-Yang. which he gained after collecting chakra from each tail beast with the help of Kurama. He also collected over 300 Kage rank shinobi from all around the world and created their summoning Jutsu which included the likes of all the previous leaders of the 5 villages and all people who died in the Shinobi war or during the period of war state. He used the knowledge of the first 2 leaders of the Uzumaki clan who were more than happy to teach the last of the royal bloodline he then went on to incorporate new techniques with the knowledge he acquired from them He also came to know about Uzumaki ancient f¨±injutsu teaching summoning animal Panda, with the help of the 2nd leader of Uzumaki he entered the relics of Uzushiogakure and gained all the knowledge available their while also gaining panda summoning contract. He sent about 50 of his clones to learn everything about f¨±injutsu from Panda clan.


    With the help of Hope Super AI, he also analyzed Byakugan and found that he can combine his Rinnegan with Byakugan but will need to become 10 tail host along with some of Kaguya''s blood to envolve it as he is not a descendant of Hyuga clan thus can''t envolve his Byakugan via taking chakra from Hamura.


    His foxes from time to time gave updates on Konoha to him, Sasuke still after everything ran away to train with Orochimaru. Tsunade the 5th Hokage has issued a missing notice regarding him while also spreading the news that he can return to the village, all his crimes will be cleared. Kakashi without the Sharingan wasn''t special anymore and just reached normal high Jonin level. Danzo''s body was found attached to a huge tree making people suspect Danzo and soon Anbu found evidence of Danzo and Orochimaru colluding, thus lead to declaring Danzo''s name as a traitor of the leaf and responsible for the attack on the leaf during Chunin exams.


    Naruto, after completing his training and achieving all his goals, decided to go back to the village for fun.


    Naruto returned 2 days before the attack on Gaara who has become Kazekage of the sand village now.


    Naruto wearing black T-shirt with the symbol of Uzumaki clan on the back and little blue Pants while wearing converse sneakers of the same light blue color. walked toward the door of the Konoha. He went up to the counter were 2 guards were writing the visitor''s name.


    Naruto: Hello, I''m returning to the Village. I was gone for a few years due to business purpose but now am returning.


    Guard 1: Hm... okay what''s the name?


    Naruto: Uzumaki Naruto


    Guard 1: Hm... Uzumaki Naruto, WHAT UZUMAKI NARUTO ??


    Guard 2 who was sleeping peacefully also wake up hearing his fellow guard screaming: What happened now?


    Guard 1 with a broken fearful voice: he... he.. he is Uzumaki Naruto


    Guard 2 also stunted hearing this his eyes again moved to the man standing in front of him


    Naruto smiled and started walking into the village


    Guard 2 after mustering up the courage: Why are you here?


    Naruto stopped turned back moved one finger in front of his lips and said while smiling: That''s a secret


    Naruto disappeared from the spot and teleported directly into the Hokage office, He saw Tsunade working on her desk and haven''t noticed him.


    Naruto: I hear you''re looking for me?


    As soon as he spoke 5 Anbu pointing sword toward his neck surrounded him.

 Chapter 13 - Im bored.

    Tsunade was stunted to hear the sudden voice when she looked up saw a tall more than 6ft tall men standing with dark red hair and purple eyes which seems to mock everything under the sun.


    Naruto gave a menacing smile: Will you move them or should I do it myself?


    Tsunade came back from shock: Moved back he doesn''t appear to be here to fight.


    Naruto went forward and set on my of the chairs: So I heard you are looking for me?


    Tsunade: Yes you''re the Jinchuriki, we would like to talk about a corporation of you working for the village. We didn''t find any indication of you being affiliated with any criminal activities or organizations and other villages too haven''t reported anything about you.


    Naruto: Yes yes I would like that too but sadly I don''t need anything from the village


    Tsunade: But first before we need you to return the Sharingan you took from Kakashi.


    Naruto: I don''t know if you much about me but you see I''m just a simple beggar made by your teacher who has to do a different thing to earn money selling unique eyes is just one of them. If you have the money I can sell you Sharingan or Byakugan too of different levels of course. You were supposed to be my Godmother but were busy gambling and drinking I won''t take it to the heart and offer you a 10% discount first-time customer discount.


    Tsunade: I want the eyes you took from Kakashi.


    Naruto: Sorry already sold them, it''s a big market out there, many people looking for these eyes.


    Without allowing Tsunade to speak.


    Naruto stood up and walked toward the window: I was bored to tell you the truth, I thought you would be a bit interesting but... well anyway take care now. Oh, I almost forgot the 4th Shinobi war will start soon, I as your dear cherished godson am giving you the news beforehand. It will start as per my estimation in 10 months. And another thing, I think you should call back my beloved godfather I''m afraid he will run into something he won''t be able to can''t defeat even with the help of the frogs.


    Naruto walking on the streets of Konoha without a care in the world decided to go to R¨¡men Ichiraku one of the most sought after places in Naruto world.


    Their Ramen was truly one of the best dishes Naruto has eaten in the three worlds he has been in.


    Naruto knew that the kidnapping of Gaara was just the beginning so he decided to wait it out and started packing things as soon after the battle he would leave this planet to Hunt for rest of the God trees and then Otsutsuki clan.


    Naruto started by unlocking the nine tail seal and replacing it with a normal seal via which Nine tail can stay in naruto if so he desires. Naruto then started placing other seals, one to remove any possibility of chakra absorption another to stop any chakra from entering his body making it impossible to place him under Genjutsu. Naruto also placed a seal over both his eyes making them useless if they are stolen somehow while placing 11 seals around his body each consisting of natural chakra worth of one tail in each. Naruto also went into creating 600 clones each using Senjutsu to control 300 reincarnated shinobis. While also cleaning his cave in the Land of the fox and then went on to Land of the panda to thank them for everyone for teaching him.


    Months went by Akatsuki went on to collect each of the tail beasts up till 7, for the 8th tail Village in the cloud called for the conference and established the alliance, Konoha also participated with the condition that Nine tail if found to be returned to them. Meanwhile, Sasuke killed Orochimaru when the lateral tried to take Sasuke''s body. Naruto in the meantime killed everyone who came looking for him, He wanted to make sure the balance from the original timeline is maintained thus started killing Akatsuki members who naruto defeated in the original timeline


    Naruto indifferent to all this waited for the moment Madara is revied by Nagato. Tobi went on as planned used Nagato to revive Madara who then took both the Rennigen back from Nagato and went forth to collect the 8th tail from Killer B. Killing all the Kages and major of the shinobi forces in the process with the help of Obito


    Madara tied to summon Kurama but failed, when tried to using Hashirama cell''s Senjutsu to locate nine tail and then failing again he started looking for alternatives. Deciding to complete the 10 tail Madara with the help of kabuto revived 4th Hokage and took his part of the Nine tail and started the process of becoming the host of the ten tail and activated Infinite Tsukuyomi by showing Rinne- Sharingan to the moon.


    Naruto calmly watched as Tobi gave a bright smile of his mission being finally complete while black Zetsu slowly took over a body of dead ninja and punch a fist through Madara''s chest shocking both Madara and Obito. Madara soon turned into a huge big black ball from which Kaguya Otsutsuki come into being. Naruto who was watching everything form another dimension waited for a moment as Kaguya tries to recover from being unsealed. Naruto using Rinnegan punched Kaguya across the face in a flash, through the dimensional gap, Kaguya who wasn''t originally paying attention suddenly felt the push.


    Naruto through punch embedded nanotech inside Kaguya to collect chakra, bloodline from her. Controlling her would be impossible as she is too powerful being the ten tail host. Also used Kotoamatsukami onto Kaguya making her memories so making her believe that Naruto is trying to help her.


    Kaguya having no combat training what so ever only had the power of having too much chakra. Naruto quickly tried created 10 clones completely surrounding her and used Chakra manifested chains to completely lock her, restricting her from using tricks such as Dimension hopping Jutsu''s such as Amenominaka, the chains not only turned unbreakable but also absorbed chakra from Kaguya who needed High chakra to manifest and change her surrounding into one of her personal dimensions.


    Chains stopped her from using Yomotsu Hirasaka too making her stay in one place, thus limiting her options.


    Naruto without giving any opportunity to Kaguya created 1000 more clones unlocking 2 of the Senjutsu seal to absorb the chakra faster forcing Kaguya to spill all the power she had absorbed from the god tree. As naruto pulled out the chakra out of by chains Naruto used that chakra to create even more clones and restricted Kaguya more, black Zetsu seeing that its Mother is trapped tried to come out of her arm and use All killing ash bones to reduce the clones but couldn''t move as chain bound him too.


    Slowly Naruto drained all the chakra out of Kaguya making her fall down from the sky unlike earlier when she was Hanging in the air.


    Naruto slowly took over every bit of chakra sealing them into different seals on his body. As Kaguya and God tree has merged while absorbing the remaining chakra Kaguya life force too started burning, see this Hagoromo came into being and requested Naruto, Naruto smiled and just simply ignored him.


    After observing all the chakra, Naruto didn''t release God: Nativity of a World of Trees which was put on by Madara. Naruto started merging all the chakra sealed earlier in seals with Kurama who grow in size and started changing shape gaining one more tail while it''s body structure too started changed, his skin started turning into black liquid Kurama at first turned into a very big 10 tail beast first completely of black color which melted into black liquid, Naruto seeing this changed the seal on him which connected him to Kurama, dividing seal into 11 sections where 10 parts stored 10 equal portions of 10 tail chakra which Kurama can control as he please while remaining one portion control the whole seal making it impossible for anyone to absorb or touch the chakra within the seal.


    The black mass of liquid slowly changed into Kurama much bigger in height and completely white. Naruto quietly observed as the surrounding of the previously watery tunnel changed into a dense forest with 10 suns revolving in the sky the white Kurama slowly opened its eyes which were identical to Naruto consisting of 11 totems.


    White Kurama looked at naruto: Boy, our plan worked. I didn''t lose my mind.


    Naruto seeing Kurama responding normally too relaxed: Let''s start then.


    Naruto comes forth and took back the nanotech he has left earlier in Kaguya. Seeing her blood naruto got excited as this was the answer to everything space travel and many others including bloodline abilities.


    Naruto gaining control over God: Nativity of a World of Trees tried to control it but failed. Then with the advice of Kurama connected and merged his chakra with that of Kurama.


    With the merger of chakra, both of his Rinnegan changed into Rinne Sharingan, unlike Madara or Kaguya who got one on their forehead.


    Using the new eyes he instructed the tree to absorb every bit of chakra in everything living or in items such as weapons created by six sage path, removing the chakra network from all over the world thus removing all the ability and affliction anyone had, turning them into normal human or animals, the tree invaded even the Hidden animal realms removing any traces of chakra only leaving those which uses Senjutsu or are product of Senjutsu.


    After collecting everything, Hagoromo too disappeared who use to live through the chakra network. Naruto absorbed all the chakra as it was part of the ten tail that Hagoromo distributed. after absorbing everything tree too was absorbed into Naruto''s body while releasing people from Infinite Tsukuyomi. Naruto smiled moved to a different dimension and then pulled out Hope Super AI he has earlier collected from Land of the foxes and started analyzing the royal blood of Otsutsuki Clan.


    The DNA structure of the blood was such that it would give maximization amplitude for improvement while giving a much bigger life force than all the clans found together combined. Naruto concluded his research stating the Otsutsuki bloodline is the result of many purifications done due to eating the chakra fruit, Kaguya being the royal princess had it in the purest form.


    Naruto instructed Hope to marge different structure to unlock the unlimited genetic potential. Hope proving it worth unlock the genetic sequence showing different evolution blood will take showing unlimited possibilities.


    Naruto analyzed everything and with the help of Hope started changing and modifying his own body.


    After the changes, Naruto changed his body into that of Lu An form. With a complete set of black hair, purple eyes Naruto changed into the same expressionless man he was in the previous world.

 Chapter 14 - The Moonwalker.

    The modification made it such that naruto blood and body changed completely similar to Kurama his body too turned into liquid changing into whatever form he desired, his eyes too combined into a single normal purple eye giving him all the ability of the Rinnegan, Bayakugan, EMS, Rinne Sharingan and finally Tenseigan.


    Naruto after completing his modification. put away the Hope Super AI physical machine into a personal dimension started flying toward the moon to collect the last of God tree chakra. Arriving in a flesh Naruto without wasting time killed off all the members of the Hamura branch living on the moon and absorbed their chakra through chakra chain, then rushed to the core using Expansive Truth-seeking ball breaking through all barriers which Hamura has placed and absorbed all the chakra present there. making the Moon lose its core and just becoming a body of rock revolving around the planet.


    After collecting the last bit of God tree chakra, Naruto along with Kurama gained the ability to seek other trees and people who are carrying trees chakra. Naruto after a bit of probing found that the near one is the base or Otsutsuki clan while distant one is an old tree that was planned just before Kaguya was sent out.


    Naruto using Rinne Sharingan''s ability turned through the dimensional gape and arrived at the distant tree to find 2 Otsutsuki members present there each having Byakugan. The rest of the planet looked lifeless the fruit on the tree looked almost about to rip.


    Naruto used the Temporary Paralysis Technique on both of them from the Yomotsu Hirasaka window while they both were distracted then impelling them both on the ground using the truth-seeking ball and then absorbing all their chakra and along with life force. After killing both of them Naruto started feeding the God tree using his chakra forming a connection with the tree slowly gaining control over the tree naruto started absorbing the chakra of tree-like previously channeling the power to Kurama using 11 more seals, thus absorbing all the complete tree and gaining the ticket to the next world.


    Naruto put away the ticket to complete the last mission of killing the Otsutsuki clan member and collecting the last tree from their home planet. Naruto changed into something similar one of the guards which were guarding the God tree changed his eyes to Byakugan too used Yomotsu Hirasaka and arrived on the base planet of Otsutsuki clan. The base planet was big in comparison to Naruto''s planet while having 3 moons in the sky, using his eyes he saw that the moons are empty and just pieces of rock. So he started observing his surroundings


    He saw that the God tree was spread throughout the Otsutsuki empire big branches of the tree going toward the Hight and Mighty expansive looking high-class building while some small branches dividing in a smaller area, people observing chakra in different quantity depending on the branch they are connected too.


    Naruto too moved and connected to a small branch but instead of taking chakra provided chakra to the tree making it slowly fall under his control. Otsutsuki clan''s main branch controls the output of the chakra and also had full control over the tree using three personal all around the clock observing and controlling it.


    Naruto providing chakra made control they possessed lose slowly, After gaining enough control over the tree Naruto using his Rinne Sharingan ability used God: Nativity of a World of Trees making the tree only respond only to him and started slowly expanding the branches throughout the world. Using one of the 3 moons which as the base Naruto cast Infinite Tsukuyomi over the world and activated God: Nativity of a World of Trees started binding people all the world into perfect Genjutsu. People having normal Byakugan and low chakra directly and Rinnegan got trapped in the Jutsu. Nauto saw that only 2 people won''t be trapped in his Jutsu. One of whom rushed and punched naruto. Naruto stood their calmly. The punch landed on the stomach which turned into black liquid and holds the person in place naruto quickly attacked piercing a chakra chain directly through the person''s skull while throwing another chain to the other being who was observing the battle form another dimension. Naruto changed his body and throw All killing Ash bones directly to the other person using Yomotsu Hirasaka. Using Hope to maximize productivity he hit his target and saw another being having Tenseigan.


    Naruto after killing both of them used the God tree to absorb all the chakra along with their life force in another 11 seals. Thus completing the mission and kill any all members who were related to the ¨­tsutsuki Clan.


    Soon the space in front of him tore.


    ???: What do you want?


    Naruto: I would like to carry on the power of three God Trees with Kurama as it''s the carrier.


    ???: I thought you weren''t allowed to carry living things to the next world.


    Naruto: Kurama is but Chakra which has gained consciousness I think we can''t consider him alive.


    ???: Wait let me ask my seniors


    After a second,


    ???: Okay you can have but he needs to agree to it to permanently become one with the three god trees, those 3 god trees represent 3 Universe energy thus there will be a limitation according to each world law on how much power you can take from Kurama. Kurama will serve as an energy source, not a chakra source. Chakra is special to this world similar to the bloodlines, you can''t gain by changing your DNA in the next world. Kurama will stay within your Soul restricted personal space in the world seed which you collected in the first world thus will always be connected to you even if you can''t draw any power from him.


    Naruto: I thank the supreme being for the explanation. I would like to go to the next world which was tasked to me by Lord Shinigami and wish to carry my eye powers with me.


    ???: Say that to your ticket now me. I have to sleep now, Bye.


    Space closed itself leaving a stunt naruto behind. Naruto went forth and used Summoning: impure reincarnation world on the notable shinobi''s which he had observed in the 4th Great ninja war including the 5 Kages and such. Using the Bodies of Otsutsuki clan members reincarnated 2600 people excluding the 300 which he already had on standby in his dimension with 600 clones controlling them.


    Naruto removed the Jutsu on the moon and traveled back to earth and summoned all the people of reincarnation which he deemed worthy in some regards.


    After summoning them Naruto using himself in EMS Complete Susano stood in front of everyone while his 1000 clones using Senjutsu stand by if in case any reincarnate try something.


    Naruto in Susano with amplified voice started explaining the situation: For all those who don''t know me, I''m Naruto Uzumaki the host of the Nine tail and the person who has summoned you all from dead. I understand many of you have a question about why you are here and about the situation around the world as the 4th shinobi war has just ended. I regret to inform you that other than Common civilians everyone was killed by the members of the Otsutsuki clan, the people who introduce the concept of chakra in our world, they aimed to collect all the chakra and life force of everyone on the planet making it lifeless in all forms not leaving anything alive whether they were Human plants or animals. I along with the help of nine tail was able to fight off and kill most of the members of Otsutsuki by raiding their home planet but they have already sent a team to kill and collect Chakra and life force from our world. I wasn''t able to save the people who had Chakra but only the normal civilians from taking their life force. For the sacrifices and loss which occur in my absence that we all have suffered from all parts of society, I''m ashamed and angry which lead me to summon you all here today. I wish that what happened in our world may never happen in others. Due to my powers as the host of Nine tail and as the avenger of life for innocent people I have been given the opportunity by the gods to travel from world to world to fulfill their task which would lead to peace and not repeat what happened in our world. I ask you all to come and join me in my adventures in the next worlds which are to come and do God''s work.


    Hearing Naruto speaks many were surprised and angry about the sacrifices while some were emotional, some started calculating the best scenario for themselves.


    Among the people, First Hokage after discussing with his long-time friend Madara and his brother and friends step up to speak: How do we know you speak the truth? We can''t trust empty worlds. From what I hear from my successor 3rd Hokage and my granddaughter you didn''t care about either the people nor about anyone else you work for your self, I have also seen you before you condemn me for trapping the beast Explain your answer, why should we fight for you? why should we believe in you? You speak of the people but from your past and activities How can trust you?


    An elder man among the group of 300 old summonings step up: I can, on the name of Uzumaki clan stand for the boy, I''m Ashina Uzumaki the formal leader of Uzumaki Clan and one of his teachers who have taught him.


    Another Person stepped up and said in a loud voice: I also can, In the name of Senju clan stand for the boy, I''m Butsuma Senju the formal leader of Senju clan and also one of his teachers.


    Next to him, another one came: I Tajima Uchiha, In the name of Uchiha clan also stand for the boy.


    One by one most profound members of the previous generation stood up in support of Naruto, explaining that Naruto for the ''Greater Good'' after realizing the danger trained hard with their guidance and fought for the sake of Humanity.


    Naruto standing calmly in his Susano seeing that Hashirama, Madara and many others who''s fathers, Master, or previous leader stood up for him are starting to trust him so he decided to pull in the final rope and extended the chakra arm of Kurama to everyone while activating his power of Kotoamatsukami making false reality for everyone. Seeing naruto take the incentive many members accepted the arm while some waited to see others take it first then took it. With Chakra overflowing, Kotoamatsukami came into play, A memory started playing of Itachi and Sasuke in the mind of everyone.


    Sasuke after supposedly killing Orochimaru searched for Itachi to find the complete answer of what Naruto has told him formed a team and started his search for Itachi. Soon after finding Itachi, Itachi denied everything which made Sasuke believe in naruto story more and more, Itachi suffering from diseases wanted to pass on his powers fast to Sasuke and pass on went forth to attack him. Sasuke unwillingly forth him making Orochimaru with the seal come out and be killed by Itachi. Feeling remorse and with the enticement of Tobi, while the 4th shinobi war was going on decided to attack the Leaf village to make the source of pain for Itachi disappear, after bringing Orochimaru back and failing to summon the 4 Hokages, Sasuke went on with his plan to attack the village. Some teachers from the academy and students come forward to defend the village while sending for reinforcement which was killed by Sasuke''s team. Just as Sasuke was able to kill Konohamaru, the space in front of him cracked and a chain came out of space binding Sasuke and his team including Orochimaru. Naruto came out of the crack and using his Rinnegan power healed and repaired the damage done in the village. while making everyone fall asleep within the vicinity thus erasing any evidence of him being present. Naruto then took Sasuke and his team away from the village and summoned Itachi who explained the situation to Sasuke who with his team then to join the forces of Alliance against Madara and Tobi.


    The first memory ended here, everyone had mixed feelings about the memories, many started to believe in Naruto''s world while others started thinking why would Naruto act as so. Soon another memory started.


    This time the memory was of a 3-year-old yellow-haired Child going to garbage in search of anything which is eatable but suddenly someone kicked him from behind making him collide into the garbage bin and falling on the ground in pain, the person who kicked him roar in laughter and screamed: Basterd I finally got you.


    The person was wearing the shinobi attire of Konoha village while having a headband of the same. The child on the ground was surrounded by the person and 2 other and kicked ruthlessly, the child screamed in pain begged for forgiveness and help but nearby people just ignored him while some even laughter and clapped at his misfortune, soon the child lost consciousness seeing this the crowd didn''t stop by kept on beating him throwing rocks among other things at him, at least feeling satisfied by the entertainment throw the child in the garbage bin he was search food in and dispersed. The child after gaining conciseness tried to raise his hand but due to no energy and injuries wasn''t able to, on a cold snowy night as the child saw pass by strangers clade in fancy winter clothes go by laughing joking and eating a variety of foods just pass by while he laid in the garbage wailing in pain silently with nothing by tears in his eyes.


    The memory ended there, everyone from all generations was stunned by this memory as they knew the child was Naruto himself, some were surprised while some were thinking how did naruto change from that to the person standing in front of them.


    Another memory started playing, this time the same yellow hair Child standing in front of an old man who was floating in the air, the old man went on to explain about the Otsutsuki clan and the worlds and his duty to protect the people for being the Host of nine tail.


    The child without hesitation agreeing to sacrifice his pathetic life and train hard to protect the people as per the old man''s request. The child went on to train with the guidance of nine tail and worked for the betterment of the society.


    The memory ended there. Everyone finally understood what happened with naruto, Giving no time another memory started playing this time naruto with just simple Rinnegan in the black-haired 6''1 wearing a Black T-shirt and dark blue pant fighting the Otsutsuki clan members on their home planet, wailing in pain being injured all over refusing to give up forth everyone killing everyone in his path fulfilling his duty. with the scene changing to that on earth were Kaguya and some members of the Otsutsuki clan starting to harvest chakra from the planet making White Zetsu. and Naruto with clothes full of holes rushing to fight them to protect the people, Kaguya using the life force of the shinobi forces trapped in the God tree as a final push to attack Naruto.


    Memories ended here. Naruto stood there patiently, waiting for people to analysis all the memories. Naruto spoke up: I won''t force anyone, you all are dead those who wish to help can come onward to this side, I will provide a means for them to learn about the other worlds and knowledge in them.


    All 300 people from the old summoning having complete trust in Naruto came onwards giving their consent. Soon many others also followed only leaving 40 or so from 2600, 40 or so stated various reasons such as Have enough of the world of the living, fulfilled their duty to the village and such.


    Naruto just smiled and didn''t force anyone. Letting them rest and unsummoned them. While turning his face to the 2860 people who have decided to follow him, and explained to them that their conciseness will be uploaded to the world seed. Soon afterward Naruto uploaded everyone while making a world with the world seed available with all subjects with future to ancient knowledge in it. He politely asked everyone to learn whatever they felt was their cup of tea.


    After being done with these 2860 people, he resummoned the 40 or so and with the complete control uploaded them onto the world seed in a different world, while using the research Hope and he has done on the soul when SAO death game was going on to modify the souls as such to erase their complete memories and Making them just part of Hope to use. Thus providing 40 or so souls to Hope to study about soul and control over it completely.


    Done with Naruto world, Naruto pulled out his ticket and repeated it. He found himself standing in front of the young man again who greeted him: Welcome again to hotel del luna Sir. I have already informed the manager she will come to show you your room soon.


    Soon young women followed by young men come forth.


    Young women: I was told to tell you that as per the world law of the next world you will one be able to use something called Byakugan only in the next world. The next world your going to is that by the name of Harry Potter, It''s a book of the sort. Here you remember the process right?


    Naruto nodded and went in the room


    Young guy: Have a nice time sir.


    Naruto followed by young women both entered the room, there were two beds, one of which was a man with the same look as him. Naruto went near him and gazed at it and changed his body to the original Naruto with Yellow hair and Light blue colored eyes His clothes changed to turning an orange shirt with black pants and sandals. Naruto looked at the young women again then at the young men smiled a bit then laid down on the bed closed his eyes and said: I wish to be born 3 years earlier than Harry Potter in one of the most powerful wizarding houses in the UK while having the inheritance of Atleast 3 ancient and Nobel House of Britain. begin my life at the age of 3.

 Chapter 15 - You should see me in a crown

    The main motive of Naruto to go to Harry Potter world was to fulfill the mission given by Shinigami. Which he believed to be very easy as people in this world tend to be boring and dull. Like even the dumb arrogant abused kid lead to the defeat of the powerful dark lord.


    Naruto after being sucked into space and wake up, his surrounding was dark, probably night time Naruto with help of Hope put forth his memories in order and saw his name now is Liam Parker, a branch family member of the Queen of the UK,13th inline for the crown, with both parents dead of what he was told was a car accident. Currently living with his grandparents. The name of his grandfather is Aiden the 3rd Albert while grandmother''s name is Fallon Albert. Both love and cherishes his greatly. While both are wizards they chose to live with the muggles because when Liam was a child he was classified as a squib by the family thus leading his grandparents to move into a muggle neighborhood for him to live a normal life.


    Naruto organized all his thought stood up from the bed and went to the window to see cars and people going by.


    Naruto seat on the floor and tried to feel chakra in his body but couldn''t find any, so decided to meditate a bit more to see if he can find some kind of energy or something. half an hour into meditation he felt something change huge energy coming onto him, the energy has a similar signature of Kurama, Naruto seeing the energy got up and started to formulate the energy in his hand but failed. After concentrating a bit he could move little things but couldn''t lift the entire things.


    Naruto teared up a little and went running into his grandparent''s room: Grandma grandma help me something is wrong with me.


    Hearing her sweetheart cry Fallon quickly got up followed by her husband Aiden: What happened sweetheart did you have a bad dream?


    Naruto/Liam: Grandma something happened to me I don''t know what but things around me started to move on their own


    Hearing what Liam said both grandparents eyes narrowed


    Fallon: Can you show me, sweetheart?


    Liam: Grandma has to promise not to get angry with me


    Fallon: Of course sweetheart grandma will never get angry at you.


    Liam: Ok grandma, just remember you promised


    Naruto/Liam moved back a little from his grandparent and spread his arms channeling all the energy he felt Kurama supply: Up


    Various things around the room started flowing in the air from sleepers to tableware many small items just as pepper and salt shaker, tv remote and such started revolving him while larger Items such as sofa tv, painting on the wall also moved toward him, He also started flying in the air a bit.


    As Liam hasn''t used magic much his body quickly felt exhausted which leads to him losing focus on channeling making all the stuff fall on the ground.


    Both his grandparents got stunted seeing Liam possess so much magic at such a small age and looked at each other at the same time. nodded heads to each other but suddenly got interpreted as Liam started crying again.


    Liam crying ran into his grandma saying he is very sorry and that it happened on its own.


    Fallon looked at her husband one last time then consoled Liam then put him in bed.


    After a while come back to the room which now has all the lights turned on with her husband waiting for her.


    Fallon: I know what you want to say but He is just a kid.


    Aiden: But he is his son. It''s in his blood, did you see how powerful he is at 3 years of age.


    Fallon: No matter what you said I won''t allow him to train before he is 9 years old when he reaches his first maturity.


    Aiden: Fine, I will listen to you on this but you better keep your side of the deal.


    Fallon: Come old man let''s make an unbreakable bond. You will neither teach him or tell anyone about him and brag till he reaches the age of 9 and I won''t interfere when you teach him at that time.


    Aiden: Come come, this old man is a man of his word.


    Liam''s following days behaved normally but started changing it slowly as the time went by. He got enrolled in school which he completed in 7 months than completed High school at the age of 5 and a half.


    Liam during his childhood started showing the potential of being a genius. His family was rich so with there help he brought various items and started creating a small laptop for himself which took him about two weeks, following the completion of the laptop, Hope was released on the internet quickly taking over everything online Using Hope he started investing and owning companies which will hit big soon. Harry Potter''s world was similar to that of SAO with the only difference of were there being less genius in the human part or many who weren''t able to achieve potential.


    Liam going easy so after completing high school and requested his grandparents that he wants to spend more time with them and doesn''t want to continue his education to college for now.


    With Liam cleaning School in one go, his grandparents too started seeing and treating him as a mature person. so they didn''t push for anything and returned to the UK with him. There Liam lived in the palace and learned the royal etiquette of both muggle and wizarding worlds.


    For the next three years, Liam went on to create nanotech for himself and travel around the globe with his grandparents.


    When he reached the age of 9 his grandfather started teaching Liam basics of portion, charm fearing that his magic core will be harmed, Liam was prohibited from doing magic on Intension. His grandfather also started teaching Liam Legilimency and Occlumency for his protection.


    Due to the presence of hope within his soul, Liam was a natural Occlumency protection barrier which only allowed people to see whatever Liam desired.


    Liam after returning to the place started going through the entire collection of 13 thousand books the crown had related to both muggle and the wizarding world which he found to be relevant.


    Liam using Hope lear through everything with 19 months, didn''t have wand yet not did he have the complete magic core formed, thus all Liam could do was learn everything is theory.


    Liam also practiced wandless magic but only a bit as he didn''t want to overpower his yet to form power core.


    With the help of Hope, Liam finalized that each person has a certain amount of magic depending on the appetite of their body, bloodline, and knowledge which was different in his case as he was connected to Kurama who acted as his energy source, Liam concluded that magic core acted as a medium to channel energy from dimension Kurama was in.


    With the help of nanotech, Liam already maximized his physical self attributes. Taking it easy Liam decided to learn ancient languages in which his grandfather establish a base for Ancient Ruine, alchemy and such wanted to teach him till the age of 11.


    Growing up he had complete back hair with black eyes and stopped talking to anyone other than his grandparents in sentences. He also always kept an expressionless face regardless of where he was. He was earlier kicked to the curb by the main branch after they found that he was squid so he left them alone too for now.


    On 21st January 1988, Liam turned 11 and formation of his magic core completed it was located very close to his heart with the size of an eye it was completely red. With the formation of the core, Liam was able to do magic more naturally, giving an easier pathway for the magic to circulate in his body. Using magic as a medium, Liam forced out all impurities out of his body making his muscles softer and skin fairer than it already was. Using nanotech, he also started changing his growth a bit making his body a bit lean while giving room to muscles to grow more with age.

 Chapter 16 - Shopping King Liam

    On 24th June 1988, an owl came to deliver the letter for his admission in Hogwarts with the list of things he will need to bring. The letter was such


    HOGWARTS SCHOOL of WITCHCRAFT and WIZARDRY


    Headmaster: Albus Dumbledore(Order of Merlin, First Class, Grand Sorc., Chf. Warlock, Supreme Mugwump, International Confed. of Wizards)


    Dear Mr/Ms. [Surname],


    We are pleased to inform you that you have been accepted at Hogwarts School of Witchcraft and Wizardry. Please find enclosed a list of all necessary books and equipment.


    The term begins on 1 September. We await your owl by no later than 31 July.


    Yours sincerely,


    Minerva McGonagall


    Deputy Headmistress


    Things to Bring


    UNIFORM


    First-year students will require:


    1. Three sets of plain work robes (black)


    2. One plain pointed hat (black) for day wear


    3. One pair of protective gloves (dragon hide or similar)


    4. One winter cloak (black, with silver fastenings)


    Please note that all pupil''s clothes should carry name tags.


    COURSE BOOKS


    All students should have a copy of each of the following:


    The Standard Book of Spells (Grade 1)by Miranda Goshawk


    A History of Magic by Bathilda Bagshot


    Magical Theory by Adalbert Waffling


    A Beginner''s Guide to Transfiguration by Emeric Switch


    One Thousand Magical Herbs and Fungi by Phyllida Spore


    Magical Drafts and Potions by Arsenius Jigger


    Fantastic Beasts and Where to Find Them by Newt Scamander


    The Dark Forces: A Guide to Self-Protection by Quentin Trimble


    OTHER EQUIPMENT


    1 wand


    1 cauldron (pewter, standard size 2)


    1 set glass or crystal vials


    1 telescope


    1 set brass scales


    Students may also bring if they desire, an owl OR a cat OR a toad.


    PARENTS ARE REMINDED THAT FIRST YEARS


    ARE NOT ALLOWED THEIR BROOMSTICK


    Seeing the letter Liam didn''t felt anything, he showed the letters to his grandparents who started acting like children and got all excited.


    Both of them discussed and decided to have Wand made for Liam from their friend in America while going to buy the rest of the stuff later.


    Liam in the meantime started his little project of collecting the blood of Harry Potter. With his deep knowledge of bloodlines, after collecting blood from someone who stole it from the school where harry studied and underwent a regular medical exam.


    Liam with his grandparents went to visit there old friend and have a wand made for himself, Liam was quite familiar with the theory of wandmaker and used Hope to theoretically create a wand which would best be suitable for him, Using 4 cores of Thunderbird tail feather, Thestral tail hair, Dragon heartstrings and lastly Veela hair while using of 4 woods: Acacia, Black walnut, Elder tree wood, and pine. Usually, wands only carried one wood and core but with the help of Hope, Liam concluded it having more than one is possible in each case and thus request his grandfather to procure these material explaining that they might be the material he would be compatible with. Using royal connections his grandfather easily collected everything.


    After arriving in America, His grandfather took him to his friends using Apparition followed by his grandmother. He had already gotten used to Apparition with his grandfather and also analyzed the method with Hope on how to do it and needed to practice.


    The name of the friends they went to visit was Rowen Bryce, an old wandmaker who was not very popular as he only did wand-making on order, unlike Ollivander''s shop who have already made the wand and check people for their compatibility.


    After, arriving Aiden knocked on the door, which was opened by a tall white hair relatively younger than his grandparent a.d.u.l.t.


    Rowen: Come on in fast, Margret and I were waiting for you since morning.


    Aiden went ahead and hugged Rowen and went in followed by Fallon and Liam.


    Fallon went ahead and hugged Rowen and then asked about Margret who was her classmate back when she was in school. By then a woman in her late 50-ish entered the room and rushed to hug Fallon.


    A happy atmosphere created in the room, when Liam spoke in a sweet voice: Greeting Sir Rowen, Madam Margret thanks for having us over.


    It was then when Rowen and Margret noticed Liam a beautiful black hair boy wearing a clean white shirt and black pants.


    Margret: Oh my god he is so cute, come here hug your big grandmother.


    Liam looked at Fallon who smiled and nodded at him.


    Liam went and hugged Margret who took Liam into the dining table and started feeding him various things.


    Liam with the same expressionless face eats some of everything which given, while Fallon and Marget talked.


    After done with the eating he excused himself and found his grandfather and Rowen seating on the sofa and talking to each other.


    Liam went near his Aiden: Grandfather about the wand.


    Aiden: Yes yes Rowen, I would like to request if you can kindly forge a wand for my grandson. He is very excited he even bugged me until I brought martial he thought was compatible with him.


    Rowen looked at Liam who stood expressionless in front of him for a while then smiled and said: Yes yes come on I will do that right now.


    Liam: Sir Rowen, if you don''t mind, can you kindly demonstrate the method of wand making I''m also highly interested in it and have read many theories about it.


    Rowen: Yes come on I have to forge one for a client anyway.


    Saying that all three went down into the bas.e.m.e.nt where various materials were spread throughout the room.


    Rowen: Picked up a single wood that Liam presumed to be Walnut and started molding it with the core of dragon heartstring. Engraving ruins into the wand, thus bending the two together.


    The whole process took about 40 mins after the process was done, Rowen picked up the wand and showed it to Liam and Aiden who was watching.


    Rowen: Come take out the material, I will start forging one for you right now.


    Liam after thinking a bit: Sir Rowen would be possible for you to make it tomorrow I would like to read a little bit about wand-making to acquire more knowledge to learn more tomorrow.


    Rowen nodding his head: Yes why not, you are just living your dad, No need to be so formal with me, just treat him as your other grandpa, Aiden and I have been friends for over 40 years now.


    Aiden: Hahahaha... time moves so fast when you''re in good company


    Liam: Grandpa Rowen would it be possible for me to look through your notes and books about wand-making?


    Rowen called his house-elf: This is Krechan ask him for anything you need. All the books are here, read as many you like.


    Then, Aiden and Rowen went back up.


    Liam waited for a moment then told Krechan to bring him some coffee.


    Liam then started reading through all the books and notes with Hope analyzing everything.


    After reading all the books, Liam went and saw his grandparents busy with Rowen and Margret told Krechan to an area where there is no human civilization. Apparition there Liam told Krechan to go back and only come when he called for him. After bowing, Krechan went away. Liam opened the Mokeskin pouch took out all the objects 4 cores and 4 kinds of wood.


    First, he starts channeling his magic through all the woods making them lift and air and then start revolving, Liam''s eyes turn white bringing out Byakugan using which Liam starts breaking the internal structure of all 4 kinds of wood. Woods starts to revolve and collide against each other, ripping each other to gain superiority inside the magic spare Liam created.


    Liam increased the magic supply via one hand and with other motioned the 4 cores with others, a sudden white light engulfs the magic bubble in which, Liam increases the pressure of magic in the bubble and start pushing the bubble into a smaller shape. Bit by bit bubble enclosed then suddenly a force came from the bubble destroying everything nearby, ripping through the clothes of Liam but stopped by nanotech from harming his body. Waves of waves came forth out of the bubble producing destructive waves on waves. Liam with the help of Byakugan watched everything while increasing pressure bit by bit. A sound of a beast came out of the bubble then it exploded. Liam avoiding the explosive, collected the mass of black liquid formed. the black liquid when it sensed Liam''s presence rushed and merged with him. Liam felt something trying to gain control over him but due to the presence of Hope failed, which retaliated and destroyed whatever consciousness the liquid has gained and gained complete control over the mass.


    Liam moved the body a bit, which got a bit heavy after the merger with the mass then pulled his arm out and instructed Hope to turn the mass into the wand.


    The black mass came out and changed into the shape of the wand. A 12-inch dark red wand, Liam moved it a bit then turned toward the sky while saying ''Lumos'' a very bright white light came out of the wand. Liam instructed to limit the power outage to a normal 11-year-old child wizard. Meanwhile, nanotech fixed all his clothes into normal conditions.


    Calling Krechan back, Liam went back home while fetching a plan to explain how he got the wand.

 Chapter 17 - The legacy

    Aiden: So you found some dark matter which got in your body and then changed into a wand?


    Rowen: What did the material look like?


    Liam: It was a black block of rock


    Rowen: Take it out show me.


    Aiden: Stand still I will check if there is anything wrong with your body


    Liam took out the wand and handed it to Rowen, the wand was now part of is soul under the control of Hope, so he didn''t worry about anything.


    Aiden: Everything looks normal, as usual, you''re healthy as one can be.


    Liam nodded and moved gazed toward Rowen who carefully examined the wand with both his hands from different angles who then tried to hold it in one hand and wave. But nothing happened to see this made Rowen lost a little interest in it.


    Aiden: Is everything okay?


    Rowen: Yes, this wand is now connected to him, it has strong core and wood too. Well, everything is Okay.


    Aiden: Good, now let''s go your grandma is waiting.


    Liam went with both of them to spend some days in America with them and returned to England on 9th August, after resting for 2 days, went to dragon ally along with his grandparents. They brought all the things needed. Liam didn''t purchase anything extra other than additional material for portion class almost 4 times then what was told to be brought along with other materials he wanted to try.


    Both his grandparents where wizards and rich thus didn''t have to go to the bank for money as normal people do. Liam too didn''t pay much attention to it but he then hears a voice: Your wish of having 3 wish of having a lineage of at least 3 ancient and Nobel has been modified a bit and task from this world''s god has been linked with it.


    Liam got startled hearing this and stopped walking.


    His grandparents who were walking with him saw him standing in place while thinking something.


    Aiden: Liam is everything okay? Did you forget something?


    Liam: Can we kindly go to the bank I want to see my parents vault?


    Both Aiden and Fallon got stunted hearing this as Liam since childhood has never asked anything about his parents.


    Fallon: We can but we don''t have the keys right now.


    Liam: I will take a blood inheritance test then.


    Hearing this the couple could only nod and follow as Liam seem to be driven to go to the vault.


    Liam comes in the bank ignoring the writing and all written in front goes up to the big counter followed by his grandparents.


    Liam: I would like to see the head of the branch.


    Goblin seating on the highest branch: I''m Ragnok one of the three chiefs of the entire Gringotts.


    After which he saw his grandparents and nodded humbly at them: Speak why do you seek me?


    Liam due to studying with his grandpa spoke in goblin tongue: I wish to take the inheritance test with you alone in the presence.


    Ragnok surprised to see someone so young speak in goblin: It will cost you 1000 gallons, are you prepared for that?


    Liam looked at him grandpa who nodded at him: Okay but you have to take an unbreakable vow to never tell a soul about this or you and your coming generations may never be able to touch anything of value whether it''s gold or silver.


    Ragnok again got surprised seeing the seriousness behind the words: Okay follow me.


    Ragnok and Liam left behind his grandparents and went into a smaller room filled with various books. Ragnok took out a paper bit bigger than A4 size: 3 drops of blook no more no less


    Liam nodded and cut his finger.


    Soon the blood got absorbed by the paper and some writing comes on it.


    Name: Liam the first


    Full name: Liam Charles Emrys Albert


    DOB: January 21, 1977


    Father: Harry the 3rd


    Mother: Victoria Emrys


    Title: Duke of Suss.e.x


    [Heritage]


    Albert (True Heir)


    Potter (True Heir)


    Peverell (Heir)


    Emrys (True Heir)


    Slytherin ( 2nd inline True Heir)


    Ravenclaw (Heir)


    Kenway (European Branch) (Heir)


    Auditore (English Branch) ( True Heir)


    ????(True Heir)


    ??( European Branch) (Heir)


    Kojima (American branch) (True Heir)


    [Creature Inheritance]


    Dragon


    Horned Serpent


    Veela


    Thestral


    Thunderbird


    [Vault]


    Complete control


    Albert


    Potter


    Peverell


    Emrys


    Ravenclaw


    Auditore


    Kojima


    Vault 11


    Vault 19


    Inheritance Right


    Slytherin


    Kenway


    Vault 520


    Vault 600


    Vault 788


    Liam and Ragnok both got stunted seeing so many of the branches. Liam was a bit confused as to what his mission was but then heard the voice again: Vault 11 - The vault of the Mikaelson family left to you the true heir, tasked with killing all the originals. Killing the Mikaelson''s which aren''t witches is your task. Killing them and removing their sired lines.


    Liam started thinking about the task and forgot where he was but then he smelt piss from somewhere and saw Ragnok standing and watching the inheritance paper without blinking has pissed himself.


    Liam cleaned throat bringing back Ragnok back to reality.


    Ragnok saw his condition and apologized.


    Liam: Sir Ragnok, I''m sorry but I will need you to take an unbreakable vow.


    Ragnok: I know, I can understand. I swear an oath in name of my ancestors and Merlin that if I ever reveal the details of the parchment, my seven generations and I will suffer the curse that no one in my family will be able to touch or see gold or silver in their life.


    Ragnok cut his finger spilled some of his blood and cast the spell.


    Liam: Lord why don''t you get change so that we can talk


    Ragnok nodded and went away came back within a minute wearing identical-looking clothes.


    Liam: I would like you to work as my manager If you have any conditions kindly state now.


    Ragnok: Seeing your inheritance is so large I will take 2% of your total wealth as commission.


    Liam: Agreed, Kindly formulate a contract, specifying all the terms. All state within the contract that if you somehow told someone about me or anything related to it will violate the contract only you and I should know about which vaults I hold for the public I will only remain the heir of Albert line as my grandparents are.


    Ragnok: Before we finalize the deal, I''m afraid you will have to take the inheritance test of the heir rings too. Sometimes even the true Heirs are rejected due to them being incapable to meet the requirement put forth by the ancestors.


    Liam nodded: Also get me information about Vault 12 and 19 and the creature inheritance I have.


    Ragnok: Okay Lord Liam. Vault of Kenway, Auditore, the restricted vault and Kojima aren''t available in this branch and would require you to visit the said locations own your on as your blood is the only key available, I will go and arrange for rest.


    Ragnok went away to prepare everything including the contract meanwhile Liam meet to greet his grandparents and informed them it will take some time so they should buy the rest of the stuff without him.


    Aiden agreeing went away with his wife and Liam went back into the office.


    Moments later Ragnok come into the office with some goblins who were carrying various boxes each in different colors.


    All of them went away after putting down the boxes.


    Ragnok took out the first ring of Albert House, which when put on lighten up a bit and died down. meaning they have accepted him, One by one Liam tried all the rings and got accepted.


    The last ring which he tried was of Mikaelson''s family, in which he saw a memory of women taking some of the white oak tree branches and black colored books and sealing them in the ground using the magic. after doing that She looked at Liam and then the memories vision ended. leaving Liam in a dazed only to be woken by Ragnok voice.


    Ragnok: Lord would like to keep the rings with you or leave them?


    Liam put on the heir right for the Albert family while putting away rest in his bag.


    Ragnok: Lord these are the agreements


    Liam calmly reads through everything, the agreement stated that full privacy will be granted to Liam, the bank will offer complete protection to his asset if something happens then the bank will repay it using Goblin weaponry. Liam will gain complete control over the vaults when he turns 17 regarding closing a branch and such for now he can take care of how much to be kept where. The contact was very straight forth between him and the goblin king along with three chiefs such as Ragnok with no involvement of the ministry.


    Liam signed the contract after checking there is no hidden clause by magic or something using Byakugan.


    Ragnok: Lord the creator inheritance is such that they are eggs left behind to be kept by one of your ancestors when you meet certain Compatability criteria as per your blood the inheritance is unlocked. You can either take them now with you or leave them here if you wish to do so. As for vault 11 and 19 they are both restricted vaults which can only be opened by blood records of those either are lost or have most likely never existed.


    Liam nodded: I wish to visit all the vaults on my own.


    Ragnok: Very will lord kindly follow me.


    Liam followed Ragnok who took him onto a cart. the cart first stopped in Potter vault


    Liam got out following Ragnok instructions used his blood to unlock the vault, Liam instructed Ragnok to set up a small fund out of the mass for harry to be taken care of during his school years and provide pocket money of 500 Gallon each semester during his school life. Then after cutting the amount needed to do so, transfer the rest of the money into Emrys vault which was his mother''s vault while talking any books or Journal he found. His mother was the last in the line of merlin. But he didn''t find any books or items related to him.


    He did similar things to major of the vaults, transferring money into Albert vault and taking any books journals he found. He collected books and journals from his inheritance vaults too while leaving the money untouched. In vault 19 he found various books on Alcamey and dark arts, it was unclear who''s vault it was other than that he also found 2 eggs of phoenix which he also took with him.


    In vault 11 he found various books and journals on the life story of a woman named Esther Mikaelson who talked about her childhood and later her getting married and such. The vault also has various books about Animagus and it''s tribal records of various chiefs and their experience regarding Animagus. Taking everything from the vault only leaving 2 rings in the vault on which saw some types of gravings


    Done with all the vaults, Liam went and collected the eggs he received in inheritance, there were 2 dragons eggs, 1 Horned serpent egg, the blood of Veela in a vial, 1 thunderbird eggs, and a small dead Thestal''s body with the note requesting whoever gets to be burry it somewhere full of life and light.


    Thanking Ragnok, Liam put away all the eggs and things after putting nanotech in everything for Hope to analysis. Requested if he could have a pouch connecting him with the vault. He also instructed Ragnok to evaluate all the properties such as shops, houses, and castles he owns and where they are after which he told Ragnok to start investing in a company named firebolt, Nimbus 2000 and it''s the lateral product.

 Chapter 18 - First year

    Liam soon went out of the bank and greeted his grandparents who were coming back with a big red eye white owl for Liam. Assuring that everything is good with the bank, Liam went back home with his grandparents. Informing them that he has succeeded in obtaining the Albert House Heir ring.


    After reaching Home, Liam took out all his all the eyes and started analyzing them using home Laptop version while Hope in his soul started scanning all the books and journals he has collected from the vault through Magic, while Liam worked on the laptop a book at a time flew in the air and turned page by page.


    Liam after 5 days completed analyzing all the eggs and decided to incorporated their DNA into his. Using the black mass of the wand he directly consumed the eggs (1 dragon, 1 phoenix and 1 horned serpent) and the blood of Veela. While researching further on Thestral. The black mass sucked all of them and consumed their ability while reconstructing them within Liam''s physical body. Liam had immense strength thanks to phoenix and dragon while gaining awareness of the upcoming danger with the ability of horned serpent and Thunderbird while also gained modified invisibility due to Horned serpent and Thestral DNA hybrid making it so that if he turns invisible then he would only be visible to people when 2 conditions are fulfilled


    Only those people can see him who has seen someone dying and fully accepted, understood and internalized the concept


    When a very strong Disillusionment Charms is placed on him.


    The DNA of all 4 (dragon, phoenix, Horned serpent, and Thestral) could flight making his body lighter and also possible to grow wings without wings at an easier magic consumption rate.


    Phoenix DNA also unlocked immortality withing the body making him incapable of dying with anything only be temporarily stopped. Mixing with DNA of the dragon and the nanotech his regeneration skill also upgraded making it virtually impossible to deeply hurt him as nanotech will give him a very quick recovery.


    He buried the body of baby Thestral on a hill that was filled with sunflowers.


    The books and Journals Liam found in the vaults added up to about 6 thousand or so, many written in ancient writing which would take him time to read ever with the help of Hope as the language is more ancient then he has learned.


    Completing everything after the merger of DNA he didn''t unlock the sequence of Veela blood as he didn''t want too much attention during his first year.


    Liam left one phoenix egg untouched as he wanted to use it as his carrier. The phoenix was born soon on 21st August after the egg was taken out from the bank.


    Liam showed the egg and later the phoenix to both his grandparents who were both very happy for him.


    Liam not wanting much attention on him, using the excuss of phoenix being too young left it at home after forming a blood contract with it.


    Using the rest of the days, Liam practiced all the basic spells which were in 1st and 2nd books as he already had practical knowledge from reading various books thus easily mastered them within a week.


    Soon the day of him going to Hogwarts came, he along with his family went to the stations founded an empty compartment putting all his stuff in went out and hugged his grandparents again and said goodbyes.


    Coming back to the compartment, Liam took the seat near the window and went to sleep after putting a blanket onto him. Soon his compartment rooms open and 3 girls came in Liam simply ignored them and kept on sleeping who also ignored him thinking that he is sleeping after some time, Hope awake him and inform him that the stop is near. Hearing this Liam removed the blanket ignoring the graze of 3 girls folded the blanket and went out of his compartment. His nanotech changed the shape of his clothes into the school clothes of a long robe.


    The train soon came to the stop, Liam was among one of the first who got off. The station was long with a half Gaint standing and screaming for first-years to come toward him soon. Liam along with another student too went into him.


    Soon similar to his memories, students traveled on boats to the Castle, which looks comparatively big then he had through. Soon they arrived and met Minerva McGonagall, the Head of Gryffindor and his future professor of transfiguration.


    Liam, as planned, picked Ravenclaw as his house. In school he chose to use his secondary name of Auditore instead of Albert or others as all of them would draw the attention of people which he wanted to ignore.


    Liam chose Ravenclaw due to 3 reasons 1. privacy of having a separate room. 2. The library of Ravenclaw and 3. because it''s easier for him to blend in.


    Liam school life went smoothly he got full marks in everything and established a good relationship with all the professors including Snape, and even gifted especially made cat food to Argus Filch for his cat Mrs. Norris. Liam didn''t speak to anyone throughout the term, only helped people who asked him or something and directly ignored everyone who tried to get close to him.


    Liam knowing everything regarding 1st year went on to use the library of Ravenclaw to the fullest and completed all analyzing all the books within it with the first 2 months.


    Due to his tendance of being alone and lost in his thought, people didn''t pay much attention to him which gave him all the opportunity needed to use Rooms of requirements to the fullest after a month of completely acting as a drone, everyone left him alone even the professor who thought he is simply lost in his studies. Thus lead to him beginning reading the books in the rooms of requirements, which covered areas he hasn''t studied like Healing which he completely ignored earlier as he thought he didn''t need it due to having regeneration ability of phoenix.


    Liam let all of his magic flew by slowly increasing it bit by bit. With the help of magic, Hope quickly scanned through tens and hundreds of books. Before this in fear of making his presence known, Liam only extended a normal amount of magic which could be found in average kids.


    With the growth of magic core, the Liam limit to expend his magic also increased. Throughout the first year, Liam used this method to read through all of the books available by the end of 1st year.


    With ending the year with perfect O+ grade in everything, Liam went back to England.


    After going back, he begged his grandfather to do his bidding and get him a trial in the Scotland Quidditch team.


    His grandfather first refused but after seeing him fly and with constant bagging gave in.. Using his title as Prince of Wales Contacted the coach of Scotland Quidditch team into giving Liam and chance too as he was looking for the seeker position.


    Liam with the sole intention of adding World Quidditch champion to himself used nepotism route to get the chance for taking part in auditions. Meanwhile, He sent commands to Hope at the palace to start self upgrading its software over and over again changing the code to making the processing faster and gaining ability to analyze more deeply, Liam did this due to last semester Hope to take a complete year to scan all the books which delayed his plans. Thus making him wanting to upgrade Hope.


    Along with Liam, 23 other old boys were giving tryouts too.


    Liam with his normal calmness sat and waited for his turn, taking an ordinary broom Liam auditioned. Again getting the perfect score in all the tests leading him to become number 1 seeker while a person named Charles taking no 2. He performed well as he used Byakugan to locate ball very easily and then used Hope to calculate the shortest easiest way to catch it.


    Throughout the summer break, Liam stayed with the team practicing, having a perfect score in all the test and out performing everyone in everything gained the permission to return to attend his 2nd year. As usual, Liam paid no attention to anything and ignored everyone following the things he did last year and slept through the train ride and then just eating and going to the room on the first day.

 Chapter 19 - 2nd year and the just another tournament

    1990 Quidditch world cup was going to be held a month before Liam starts his 3rd year so he wasn''t quite worried about it.


    In the second year too, he behaved the same while unlocking his Veela charms a bit to people believing that he had gained the charm over the break while making his grandparents believe he gained it during schooling.


    Liam continued to outperform others in everything and only presenting himself to be a bit powerful than others, he also cleared Dumbledore and snape suspicion by showing them a bit of truth about him when they used Legilimency on him, he showed them his identity and his grandfather telling him everyman should make himself thus using a branch family name instead of royal Albert one.


    Liam also in his 2nd year started getting together with the Half giant Rubeus Hagrid he provided him various portions in return Hagrid took him to see many different species of animal which lived. Liam already had DNA enhancement better than the animals but to ease his boredom went to play with them, his dragon and thunderbird aura made most of the beings follow his instructions while some simply chose to run away.


    After repeating the process for the first month, making sure everyone was ignoring him again. He started his second-year plan going back on the rooms of the requirement but this time using room of hidden things and not the library part but dark object one.


    Liam with the help of Hope identified the Hocruxe easily as it had an incomplete soul trapped in it. Leaving behind Hocruxe Limb Let out all a huge black mass ball out of his body which consumed engulfed everything in the room leaving behind the Hocruxe, vanishing cabin and some more lesser power dark object.


    Black mass broke and consumed everything, with Hope acting as a guard started analyzing everything at full power, Liam leaving Hope alone to complete its task at its fastest rate went out of the room of requirement and this time thought of area when one can practice spells.


    Using the practice spells to turn all his theoretical knowledge into physical aspect, tried everything all the spells he knew and have read about while limiting his magic level to that of Filius Flitwick, the previous dueling champion and head of his house which he saw while he was in his first year using Byakugan he created a power scale of normal people according to which he controls his magic output.


    He practiced all the spells other then Patronus Charm because he had some plan for that and didn''t need it right now.


    Like this his year went by throughout the years he had unlocked about 40% of his Veela charm which was modified due to being mixed with Thestral DNA making it charm seem like death, making one go numb for some time if they get charmed by his beauty.


    Nothing interesting happened, he participated in the trial for Quidditch for his house and performing a perfect score on all the games gained the seeker position. Following which with ease, won all games against other Houses by catching the ball just a few mins into the game whereas in one game making it a close game and then catching it after 45 mins. Making him popular throwout the school. As he too has completed all the hidden world didn''t remain much cold to the people and greeted back people who greeted him. He still didn''t reply to anyone in a sentence but only in words.


    Hope went offline for an entire year and a half after which it recovered and reported succession of the task, the reason why Liam was so into understanding the dark items was for the preparation of the originals. Compare to Original, Vodamort was nothing both in terms of strength and knowledge.


    Getting Hope back after completing his exams truly completed is the second year, not wasting any time Liam after coming home went to practice with the team not that he needed it but had to show his involvement.


    Quidditch World Cup of 1990 was to be held in the U.S.A, with the qualifying tag Scotland too went to participate, other members other then Liam were quite old almost 17 or 18 in age, While making his debut, Liam with ease caught the Golden Snitch within half an hour of the match leading his team to be one of the fastest team to win the qualification round with securing place in the tournament.


    The entire tournament was a knockout tournament, in second rounds they have to win 4 matches to reach semi-finals who also be an elimination round.


    2nd match went a bit longer, Liam didn''t want the team to depend on him too much thus waited for the match to go on while preventing opponent seeker from catching the Golden Snitch when the score reached 240-200 with his team winning after 8 hours, He went and caught the Golden Snitch again. Repeating the same thing again and again always winning the match with him catching the seeker, He was soon nicknamed the Goldern seeker by the press with his big photo and explaining his pureblood heritage and perfect result in Hogwarts, people donned praise upon praises onto him. In the semi-final match, Liam with the Hour of the start of the match caught the Golden Snitch once again creating History of having caught Golden Snitch in all the matches. After his semi-final win, even the Queen took an interest in him and passed a command that if Scotland truly wins the Championship, All the members will receive Knighthood.


    Filled with excitement, thrill, and arrogance people from all around the community came to see the finals.


    Liam found it over the top and now understood how people felt about football to speak the world: Football is more than just a game. Similarly, for these people, Quidditch is more the just a game he believed.


    The game started in the evening both teams caring there Nationals flag making their entrance, Liam also made his entrance while releasing 80% of his Veela hybrid charms leaving many people in crowd stunt and feeling numb in their bodies. Match went on for about 3 days, another team seeker was really good but Liam prevented him from gaining Golden Snitch score remain in close vicinity and reached 200 with Scotland in the lead, bored Liam used Hope to calculate all Golden Snitch possibilities and caught it ending the Match against Canada.


    All the players rushed and grabbed him, His grandparent too come and greeted him.


    The next day all the papers, whether small or big in the magic world had a big photo of Liam along with the rest of the team holding the cup distributed all around the world. His title as the goldern seeker was also established. He was crowned as a Duke thus making his title official while granting knighthood other members of the team, What the official anointment meant for him was that, his title Duke of Suss.e.x become real which while giving him political powers and also making him an a.d.u.l.t in the wizarding world as per the law while also making officially him 11th inline for the crown. His Dukehood was published in muggle papers, making him come once again in the limelight which he previously gained by completing all the education below at the age of 5 and a half.


    For his contributions in the team, He was asked to remain in the team for the next cup but he refused to state that he wants to focus on his studies sole for now.


    After being done with everything, Liam went back to his home and replied to Rangok who he since earlier has been in touch with him. He informed him about gaining official Dukehood, thus becoming an A.d.u.l.t and asked for a meeting with him to discuss Properties, Homes, and castles he owned.


    He also asked him, grandparents, if he can go to Rome as he wanted to check the vault left behind there. His grandparent as a reward for winning the championship agreed.


    Liam with his Grandpa used muggle medium of traveling both flew to Rome.

 Chapter 20 - The legacy of Deathfall

    After reaching Rome, leaving behind his grandfather who went on to his friends, went to Gringotts, arriving there is asked for the chief, Who a few moments later arrived, asking to continue the meeting in private.


    Chief Lardy nodded and asked Liam to follow him. Arriving in his office. Liam gave him a letter from Rangok to him.


    Chief read the letter and nodded and cut off one of his fingers dropping some blood used the unbreakable promise of not telling a soul about him or anything related to him or he won''t be able to see or touch any gold or silver in him,


    Liam nodding gave the restricted section information along with Auditore and Kenway vault and conducted the blood inheritance test again to prove his lineage.


    After the test Chief and Liam went first to Kenway vault to which Liam was just an Heir, Chief informed him that the last remaining Kenway is an old man who no one has seen in 40 years or so and as per laws Liam has to wait at least 60 years from the time of disappearance before claiming for complete Inheritance. Liam, in particular, was not interested in money left thus didn''t needed the complete inheritance. In the Kenway vault, Liam found books and journals of an adventure and treasure seeker Edward Kenway who discussed his underwater adventures, the underwater life, and various ancient spells that can be used underwater. Liam collected them all as he didn''t have much information regarding underwater except for what he had read about in the underwater Herbology and some animals which Hagrid showed him.


    Secondly, they went to the vault of Auditore, the vault was very ancient and required one to fight with a magically powered rock fighters army with weapons not magic to prove they are worthy. Auditore was a very ancient clan it was said they were present since before even the 450 AD, completing the test Liam went in the vault alone. The vault was filled with various kinds of ancient weapons both magical and of muggle world, there were piles and piles of books regarding weapon creation which included the making of dark objects too. Collecting them all Liam went his way back to Chief.


    Chief informed him that Auditore also has left behind 2 eggs which Liam decided to collected after going through all the vaults.


    Restricted Vault number 15 was one he acquired, the gate of the vault was very unique as it didn''t have any keyholes or anything just a plain surface. With the help of Chief Liam cut all his figures and pressed it against the door. The door in response not only absorbed the blood of Liam but also started absorbing his magic. Liam didn''t try to fight it and calmly stood there after a certain amount was absorbed the gate opened, the vault was more like a cave rather than a storage room like the others. Liam went alone into the vault with a 2 big ball of light dancing around him. As Liam walked into the cave in eventually came across a board stating "Living shall not venture, death is not the end".


    Liam being immoral due to phoenix ignored the sign activities his Byakugan to avoid any surprises, Liam comes upon array upon array laid throughout the cave which acted as a hidden weapon killing anyone, Liam ignoring everything went a bit deeper and came upon a big Gate with Ancient writing written on top of it.


    "Here lies the legacy of Deathfall"


    Pushing the Door open Liam saw one book lying in the middle of a smoke-filled room, using Byakugan Liam tried to see through the pathway but failed at it showed magic tides throughout the room. Liam taking out his wand with Hope on complete alert walked toward the book, midway he saw something incredible, from the fog like a devil raised Dementor but in the form of Patronus Charm. It was an unbelievable thing to see as Dementors are mostly repelled using Patronus Charm, he had neither ever heard about such a thing or seen it. The craziest thing was that there were at least 20 of these Patronus Charm in the room each with different engraving on them. Liam recovering from the shock started walking toward the book again soon after reaching the book, the Patronus Charmed Dementors surrounded him not doing anything but watching him. Liam tried to open the book but couldn''t move it, thus cutting him hand and spilled some blood over it. The book was completely Black giving just a cold ghostly feeling. the book observed the blook started turning into dark red and opened on its own.


    The page which it opened to was completely written in symbolic language, with the help of home Liam had already read through and analyzed many ancient languages thus using a different structure started translating the language.


    The book told the story of a man who was abandoned by his family, left out by the society and almost killed by his most trusted but still refused to give up, the man went on to do everything he can to fight the death which came to take him to the afterlife using dark magic and channeling powers from another humans life, he fought death who came to take him while also fighting life which had lead him go to death, thus creating an imbalance leading a disturbance in the world. Angered by the act of death gave the person an appearance similar to his which the man hated, while life cured the man with not remembering anything good for long no matter what he does thus turned him into the first Dementor in the world. Feeling empty and sad the man feeling lost started fueling energy from other humans feeding on their emotions memories to erase the pain in his heart but no matter how much he feeds he was always empty sad and lonely.


    In his mission to feed himself, the man went on to destroy the lives of hundreds of people, feeling the need to stop the monster a young witch of that time researched most of her life and created the Patronus Charm in a very weak but able to repel Dementor version, soon more people took part and modified the spell which later becomes one of the most powerful charms known to mankind. Impressed by the contribution and use of magic in creating something which can save innocent lives of many, Death gave the gift of having Dementor as her Patronus Charm corporeal which had the power of consuming happiness from real Dementor, while life gave her the way to change into Dementor as her Animagus which while not giving her Amortality or the need to feed on happiness gave her the ability of Dementors to fly, looking the memories of others and a powerful defense. Using the conversion as the bases the witch in her old age established the lineage of Deathfall, each generation one member of the family possessed, the power given by life and death.


    The book page ended on the note with the list of each family head name. Liam''s name was also freshly written in there in the form of blood he had dropped earlier. Turning the page, the book talked about how to perform Dementor corporeal charm and how to turn into Animagus. Copying everything Liam bowed to the corporeal''s present who also went back into the ground. Liam walked out of the cave, the door closed on his outside found chief waiting for him.


    Liam told the chief that his work done with the vault is done and bring him to the eggs.


    Chief leaving Liam waiting in his office, came back after some time bringing 2 boxes. Liam simply put both the eggs into his bag and thanked Chief, and asked for information about the properties he owned. Chief brought out various papers, Liam heritage gave him 5 houses 2 castles and various portions of land. Noting down everything about their locations and whereabouts Liam went back to meet him, grandpa, informing him about the completion of his work.

 Chapter 21 - Chaotic 3rd Year

    Returning to his palace, Liam opened both his egg boxes taking out 2 eggs, he didn''t know what these eggs are off. One was completely black while other was covered in black and other different shade of dark black color.


    Using hope, Liam analyzed that one of the eggs was of a Basilisk while another was of Hydra a mythical creature. Using the black mass of the hope Liam incorporated both the egg and their genus.


    With the hybrid DNA formed due to Dragon, basilisk, and Hydra his skin changed as to repel or deflect most of the spells cast on him while changing his eyes while giving control overpower such as instant death glare and Petrification by indirectly looking into it of basilisk and Aura eyes making people and animal fell fear just by looking at them of dragon and hydra. Hydra being an animal of nature also made him turn compatible with natural elements making it easier for him to draw spells made of nature.


    After completing everything with the DNA compression and 2 days before starting his 3rd year. Liam decided to visit Rangok for finalizing all the property works.


    Liam entered asked his grandfather who sent one of his men with Liam to the bank. arriving at the Liam alone went in and meet with Rank.


    Liam owned 87 Houses 17 castles and 240 properties which were located around the world while owning more than 80 or so around England. He also found various money borrowing slips of loans taken by other houses.


    Liam firstly listed down all the properties and their location so that he can go visit them later. He asked for the Goblin community to help in recovering the money which has been given as a loan but not paid with the promise of giving 15% of the total amount to the goblins. Rangok immediately agreed as for him it was just regular goblin work.


    Liam also asked Rangok to bring black family inheritance to him after giving him some gallons as a bribe. Rangok informed him that Sirius Black is the last heir after which whoever holds the closest qualification will be declared as the heir which being Draco Malfoy. Liam was quite interested in the inheritance of black due it being known as one of the largest wealthiest houses since ancient times in Britain thus started formulating the plan for it.


    Liam left out two families which had to pay money one being Malfoy and another being Weasley.


    The entire wizarding world of Europe went into disarray, Rangok with the help of the other two chiefs with the permission of the Goblin king lead a fierce attack on all the Houses to pay the sum.


    With Rangok doing his work, Liam went back home stayed with his grandparents for 2 days before leaving for school.


    This year''s ride was anything but peaceful. Many first and 2nd year students come to take his autograph, some came to ask for tips while others come to compliment him. Liam being Liam just responded in words to everyone.


    The first month like every year people acted like a quite alone book-loving person making people want to just leave him alone, He maintained a good relationship with everyone in the school regardless of houses or teachers. He was also given the position of team captain by Filius Flitwick who was his head of the house. Liam additional started working for Madam Poppy Pomfrey with the recommendations of Filium Flitwick.


    Gryffindor House''s head Minerva due to her fondness for Liam also gave him a time turner to attend more classes.


    It took about two months for everything to normal, two instead fresher always seeking him out to solve any problem, Liam quietly and calmly helped everyone in everything. With time the excitement died down within the freshers too thus finally leaving him alone.


    Liam''s goal in 3rd year was to complete his Animagus form and charm, using the rooms of requirement. Liam first started with the books left behind Esther Mikaelson on Animagus first, understanding the traditional tribal approach, then went on to read journals he had regarding Animagus before finally starting with the copy of the method from Deathfall legacy. He concluded that while a person can have only one Animagus, he/she can have different Patronus charm Corporeal depending on the magic availability, nature of the person, emotional state of the caster. Liam with the use of his ability was able to caste 2 kinds of Patronus charms, a Dementor and a fox with 9 tails similar to that of Kurama from Naruto world.


    Completing this task left Liam with nothing to do except Kenway''s underwater books and Auditore''s weaponry forging. Liam decided to take it easy and started getting more involved in the school. He knew that Dumbledore will start watching everything every closely next year when Harry potter enters the school. Liam started changing the Ravenclaw ruling system, Bullying with the house and its members were strictly prohibited, Liam used his Aura to suppressed everyone who wanted oppose him using his eye, many students ever went far as naming him "Prince of Raven" and "Dark raven" due to his pitch-black hair.


    Liam led a very peaceful life rest of the year with him being the captain, Ravenclaw won the Quidditch cup easily and with the rule, he had enforced within the house, Ravenclaw won the House Cup at the end of the year easily.


    Liam upon completing his 3 rd year went back home and asked his grandfather about various things regarding his Albert legacy and the crown.


    Aiden explained to Liam that, Albert''s role in the world is to act as a balancer between wizards and muggles. Albert''s in the wizarding world isn''t allowed to have any political power and can''t come between conflicts or problems which may arise in their world as long as it doesn''t affect the muggle''s, while they are allowed to take part in the learning and reside in the magic world they are more like a branch of the muggle world thus not under the preview of Ministry of magic. Similarly, in the royal family Albert branch won''t gain crown under any condition as it would merge both worlds thus while Albert''s can stay in the royal family and with the title they were more of a magical branch then royal making them an outcast from both side. This was a special branch created in the royal family after the debacle of Obscurus in New York.


    Aiden also explained that his parents truly didn''t die in a car accident but due to some magic being which he will completely disclose when Liam completes Hogwarts.


    Liam also asked if he could live alone for a while explaining that he would like to venture the world on his own for a while.


    Aiden simply said that they will talk about all this after he completes his education.


    Liam throughout the break practiced how to Apparition. With his understanding of the space-time law from Naruto world with the data collected from traveling with his grandfather, It only took Liam 3 weeks to change his scope from Apparition of the short distance to a long one. Making it possible for Liam to travel from one place within England to other, with having more than 2 months to go before the 4th year, Liam started trying new things trying to Apparition in his Animagus form, in the larger distance such as to other continents and lastly to Apparition with the wards around.


    For the first task, Liam found that in his animagus form he couldn''t completely Apparition but could fly at the speed of At least three hundred and fifty miles per hour.


    For the second, due to the presence of wards around the whole continents he had to seek a way around the continent first. thus he focused on the third task. Using Hope and doing multiple experiments he found that to avoid each ward one needs to use the exact sequence in which magic was used to put it to avoid the ward. Liam with the help of hope and Byakugan easily achieved it, thus coming back to the second condition needed which was hard enough physical body to survive the toll which Liam already had and lastly to remove his magic signature mark which would occur if he were to make such a large distance jump.


    Liam with the help of Hope started purification of his magic core making it more in-depth to create and chanal more of magic from personal dimensions. Achieving all three conditions Liam was ready for Apparition.

 Chapter 22 - 4th year

    After some tries at different collections, using Apparition, Liam comes onto the boundary of Azkaban prison and then transformed into his Animagus form of a Dementor.


    As Liam started flying toward the prison, he saw several Dementor just flying around when they saw Liam they just simply ignored him, Liam using his form went into the prison saw various people lying on the floor with condition unknown there were no guard or anyone just cell and people in them.


    Liam went around for a while when he heard women laughing crazily and shouting: Black, Black I hear potter will be joining the school this year I hope nothing happens to him hahaha


    Liam felt as if God was looking after him, Liam went toward the women who were screaming she had long hair which even covers a portion of her face, after matching with the wanted poster making sure it''s Bellatrix Black, Liam went in her cell, in which was a nearly dead man laid. Liam in his dementor form easily lifted her while she laughed like crazy and banged her head against the wall with only enough force to make her unconscious, he didn''t want to kill one of the very few "good people" the dark lord had.


    Turning his hand back into the Human form Liam took some blood from Bellatrix and her husband Rodolphus. Having collected both the blood of House of black and Lestrange, Liam nodded to himself and left the prison to be stopped by a large group of Dementor, One of the ragged Dementor come forth and bowed a bit by backing down. Liam having read the Deathfall presumed that the older one was that men who were the first to be cursed.


    Dementor: Lord, Can you kindly tell me your name?


    Liam: Deathfall


    The group of Dementor backed away and didn''t speak anymore.


    Liam too simple ignored them and flew away. After making sure no one was following him or anything Liam turned into human form and rushed back Home.


    The 4th year was truly interesting for Liam, all many heirs will be joining some much drama will be happening. Liam like always went to a cabinet and slept all through the way to school, the feast to the freshers began many people were excited about Harry potter studying at Hogwarts. Liam seat alone and eat his food in quiet, after being done with his food, he moved to over and told the prefect which was a 5th-year student to explain every rule to freshers clearly or He would have to answer if any is broken while using Aura eyes. He stood up nodded at his house head who looked at him as he stood up and went to his room and slept. As Liam has already achieved everything one can hope for within Hogwarts, life was quite boring for Liam he ranked top in everything and won all matches of Quidditch for Ravenclaw while maintaining a relationship with everyone.


    Hallowe''en was the only time where Liam himself almost destroyed his plan, on Hallowe''en Liam completely forgot the debacle of Hermione and the troll. He was simply passing by when he heard a roar rushing toward it Liam saw Harry, Ron, and Hermione fighting the troll, seeing this Liam almost wanted to bang his head on the wall. Ron seeing someone come screamed for help, Liam seeing there is no way out of this draw his wand and pointed it at the troll who just stood there frozen as if he has seen some kind of a monster, using the trolls fear Liam quickly transformed the ground near the troll feet into chains binding him upon chain and chains. Harry, Ron, and Hermione were simply stunted to see Liam stop the troll so easily, Liam moved and asked Hermione to go call for professors. But before anything could happen Teachers already rushed in with Gryfindor head in the lead. Troll recovering from his fear tried to free himself so he could run but chains upon chains kept on coming onto him. Liam explained the full story of his part to the professors who praised him and gave his house 20 points while scolding the other three. The golden trio also thanked him to which he just nodded his head.


    Soon Liam enacted his plan of acquiring the first deadly hollow which Dembeldor sent to harry for Christmas, he didn''t interpret anything as the present went to harry and who was very thrilled to receive it. He simply watched everything in his invisible form. Liam using hope to copy all the details on the clock like array formation ruins everything and then took a simple invisibility clock and changed it completely into one harry received while making it much durable than using Hope within the room of requirement.


    After being done with it, Liam after some days changed the clock Harry received with the one he made.


    Thus done with his first-year task.


    Liam for the rest of the semester just laid low, old scoring other and winning the quidditch cup regardless of harry taking part in it. Hermione tried talking to him to which Liam only talked replied in words and only spoke in sentences when she doubted something adding her to the list of people who have fallen for his charm, and I mean literal charms.


    Soon the year ended and Liam''s suffering ended.


    Liam coming back home modified his DNA again to fill BLack and Lestrange family code.


    Liam with permission from his grandparents again went to the bank to meet Rangok, informing Rangok of his new inheritance while bribing him to bring the heir rings for him to claim ownership. As everything that happened between Liam and Rangok didn''t fall under the preview of ministry with him being an a.d.u.l.t and an Albert, Rangok under bribery agreed to bring the ring if Liam can prove inheritance on Black inheritance test first.


    Liam nodding in agreement while also giving a crazy smile.


    Liam fulfilled all the conditions and claimed ownership over the two vaults, emptying most of the Lestrange vault which was filled to the brink while leaving Horcruxe and the fake sword of Gryffindor and some gold. While transferring all the money and good items into him vault while taking books and dark objects with him. He did the same with the black vault only living behind two hundred thousand gallons for Sirius, He also moved all the properties under his name while leaving only the house of black to Sirius along with 2 more, not leaving anything from the Lestrange.


    Liam in his dealing with the Goblin made ensured to include the terms that if any part of the contract is broken by the third party than the obligation to inform or correct it would fall onto the Goblin community for which Liam can be charged which will be discussed as per the actions taken by goblin at that time.


    After completing everything, Liam went back home started with reading Kenways adventures and books while practicing spells. As he had too much time on his hand. Liam decided to take it slow. He traveled all over Europe to all three famous dragon reserves collecting and compiling all the kind of dragon''s ability into his body.


    Enjoying his time with his grandparents listening to their stories and adventures Liams 5th year came.

 Chapter 23 - 5/6th year

    Before the beginning of his 5th year, Liam accompanied by his grandfather participated in the Dunstable Duelling Championship which was a complete joke as even all the participants didn''t have 1/100 of his magic, Liam not pretending to be weak anymore as he didn''t have anyone watching him such as Dumbledor went on to win the matches straight forth by overpowering his opponent. And won the tournament, once again coming into the limelight soon afterward also took part in a Transfiguration and chess competition which happened and won them, soon after which his 5th year begins.


    Other than the beginning of 5th year, Liam''s life was completely blessed for the rest of the year, with Liam being in 5th year everyone withdraws from perfect position nomination, the house head Filius was also very happy to give the seat to Liam.


    With made Perfect, Liam turned very busy he took care of his entire house, he ruled with 2 things, first was the power of Aura he had while another being Knowledge. No one opposed anything he said. After Liam gained the crown all the other houses perfect also told their members to leave the Ravenclaw alone as they have seen the power of Liam and knew better than try to mess with. Twins also avoided Liam like a plage as they too have seen the consequences.


    It happened when twins wherein their 2nd year, one day Liam after completing breakfast was when suddenly a hex come on to him which Liam twisted his body and avoided after which he saw Twins running away. Liam waved his hand through which a spell came forth hitting both of them. From that day forth twins life became hellish, every time they tried doing something wrong intentionally or not, they loudly farted bringing the attention of everyone nearby. After a month of struggle and research finding no way to remove the spell both came forth and apologized to Liam who was having breakfast alone like usual. Liam looked at both of them using Aura''s eyes and then said he had forgiven them and removed the spell.


    While participating in all the competitions happening in the school other than Polo. Liam with the consent and recommendation went forth to put in the request to the headmaster for being in consideration in the Transfiguration trophy and chess trophy along with Dueling trophy all three of which he won the competitions within the school as well as Outside within Britain.


    Ravenclaw under his leadership went on to score more points than any house in the history of Hogwarts winning the Yearly House cup.


    By the end of 5th year, Liam won everything and made History as it had never happened before. During the break, he simply started Auditories books on weaponry and it''s creation after completing Kenway''s books and journals.


    6th year remained for the large part same for Liam being a perfect and Quidditch captain remained busy, He also announced of him leaving the Quidditch team after the season to allow younger players and to focus more on his studies. With him as prefect, the house behaved perfectly like last year, during this time Liam decided to release the last of 20% Veela hybrid charm he had suppressed making him more popular than he already was. Liam as per plan during the entire school year didn''t interfere with Harry Potter and his gang back when he saved them, he already used the opportunity to plant some of him nanotech within them which embedded themself into their blood and recorded everything regarding what they are doing? where they are?. He did the same to everyone who was key players like Nevile Longbottom and such.


    He also wanted to plant some on Dumbledor but the old bastard never invited him like he usually does to all the self insert character in fan friction.


    During his 6th year, he started getting close with House-elves in the kitchen who made food for everyone inside the physical structure of Hogwarts only thus not included Hagrid who lived outside.


    Soon 6th year come to an end with his house once again winning the cup.


    During the holiday he received an invitation from Scotland and various other territories to come and participate in the Quidditch world championship while representing their team which Liam rejected stating that he will be participating in the Duelling World Championship which too was happening in England along with Quidditch world championship.


    On 10th August 1994, Liam along with his grandparents went to participate in the championship. In the first battle, using his Aura he scared away his opponent who simply surrendered as soon as they stood before each other. The second match marked the mockery of which was made out of the Nobel house of Guat, Liam''s opponent after taking the stand to fight become so afraid that he started throwing random spells while running backward and peeing in his pants. Liam decided that it was enough fun, he went forth with the real matches where he sometimes simply overpowered the opponent while in some he used cleaver tactics. Winning rounds upon rounds within 5 moves. After winning 10 matches he qualified for the semi-finals where he would face Cedric Diggory who have been chasing after him since he entered the school. Liam smiled seeing his name, Informing his grandparents about the next day of competition and his opponent. Happy with their grandchild and his achievements complimented Liam.


    After 3 days, the semi-final round begins, Liam ignoring everything simply went on the attack ripping apart Cedric defense in one move while winning the match in another. In the final round, he faced a big bout Smirnov who was from Russia the fight was boring first Smirnov tried to use an attack which Liam simply deflected while on the second he went on complete preservation like Liam was trying to kill him. Liam on the fourth attack broke through his defense and on the 5th attack Disarmed him thus winning the championship.


    Gaining another title for himself, during the interview He credited his success to his House head Filius who too was a dueling champion. He again came into limelight his previous achievement of winning the Quidditch championship and his name the Golden seeker were revived. Many people from school wrote to wish him.


    After winning the championship and everything, his grandparents asked him what he wanted as a present to which Liam simply asked them if he can place some ruins on them so he always knows that they are safe, while under the disguse he planted nanotech in both of them, connecting them directly to world seed thus if they ever were in a problematic position Hope could always protect their minds.

 Chapter 24 - The escape

    Before the beginning of the 7th year, Liam wrote a letter to Rangok asking him about the status of the money loan bill issue as he wanted to solve the issue an acc.u.mulate all the money before the war starts.


    Liam also asked his grandfather to use his political connection to make it so that he can take the N.E.W.T exams earlier than other students. He also informed his grandfather regarding the upcoming Triwizard Tournament stating that he heard it from someone over Durmstrang which his grandfather disliked for their idea of Wizard superiority and muggle hatred, and sought permission to take part in it.


    Knowing that Liam is a world-class duelist and a powerful wizard, his grandfather permitted him while his grandmother denied him no matter what he did. Thus, not wanting to lie any more Liam didn''t want to lie to his grandparents, used his full power and enclosed the complete area with magic, a magic bubble surrounded the three of them within which everything was under his command. His grandfather was a little scared because they knew a bit truth about Liam and his enormous magical power they have thought that the power was going haywire due to not giving permission and both of them pulled out the wand to protect their grandson. Liam waved his hand and both of their wands left them and went into his hand, Liam calmly took the wands and started talking to his grandparents telling them about his life from the beginning as Kai and his mission in the world in each world.


    Both of them didn''t believe him and thought he was lying to them thus to prove everything Liam called out to Hope which was present in the laptop form, which told them and showed them everything which is happening in the world at the same time as Hope was attached to everything which had internet or some online connection. Hope also showed them the world inside the World seed with the help of nerve gear, which Liam finally explained to them why he gave them and explained that this is the last barrier of defense which he left onto both of them as the present for winning the duel championship.


    Seeing everything in the world tree and listening to hope, his grandfather believed him a bit. After explaining everything regarding his life and such except the part of his mission in this world the three deadly hollows his knowledge of the future and existence of Gods, he left his grandparents alone with hope as that they can confirm their doubts and such.


    After 2 days his grandparents finally come to reality and terms with everything and believed him, thus firstly they gave him permission to participate in the Triwizard Tournament and secondly permission to live alive alone after he is done with Hogwarts, they also decided to tell him the truth about his parents dead. They told him it was just around the time he was born when a vampire hunter who was also a vampire by the name of Michael came who was in search of other vampires and wanted to recruit his parents to find them, and when are parents refused due to not want to be involved with vampire business he killed them. Liam listening to this felt it be a huge coincidence of Michael killing his parents and his being a true heir of the Mikaelson family. Liam started laughing like crazy making his grandparents worry about him. He explained to his grandparents about his Inheritance of Mikaelson line which confused them too.


    Liam left his grandparents alone with their thoughts and hope in which his grandparents have started there adventure by visiting different worlds which people have created in the world seed.


    The seventh-year bought Liam back into the limelight, he was previously before the end of the 6th year selected as the Head boy, and now in holidays winning the world dueling championship bringing everyone to talk about him which reduced a lot due to death eaters attack on Quittitch world championship.


    With being the head boy, Liam got the special cabin made for Head boy and Girl, Liam, as usual, pulled the blanket and went to sleep after politely telling the head girl to hand everything perfectly or else he will handle her in the presence of all the prefect who followed the head girls word to the letter.


    Liam woke up and went to fight the boredom for one final year before he could escape.


    The year went peacefully for Liam, he with his perfect score in all the elective and core courses offered at Hogwarts was given special permission with his grandfather''s connection to writing his N.E.W.T examination early. Liam decided to wait for the first round of Triwizard Tournament to take the exam and complete everything, for now, Liam started noticing people with the school he could take to the dance with him, he decided to take away Harmine granger from victor Krum who would be all-mighty now after winning the Championship.


    Finally, the day came Dumbledore''s announcement of the start of Triwizard competition and welcomed the foreign visiting character who would also be participating, Liam seat quietly without paying attention to anyone and simply waited for the food to start, the women from Beauxbatons after all the announcement were done seat with Ravenclaw as food began, Some of the girls try to talk to Liam who didn''t pay any attention to them, which inflated one of the girls who took out her wand and was about to fire at him when 5 people from Ravenclaw surrounded her. Liam still didn''t pay any attention to anything, slowly stood up and looked at his House head who along with the rest of the professors were looking at him, He nodded his head a bit toward Filius who also nodded and went to his room.


    Beauxbatons mistress too asked her students to back down. Everyone was used to Liam''s way of ignoring everything so didn''t make such a big deal about it.


    Liam just told the prefect of his house who was a 6th-year student to put his name into the Goblet of Fire and sent a letter to his grandparents regarding the start of the game and him participating and to inform them he is ready to take the examination. Soon the announcement of champions was made him taking Cedric place and rest of the champion remaining the same.


    Soon the first day of the completion began, his grandfather along with 2 of his people came to watch the match, Liam went with him and after some talking went to participate in the first task of fighting the dragon, Liam picked Hungarian Horntail intentionally, going last Liam with both hands walking into the battlefield where his eyes met with that of the dragon who furiously broke him chain which was binding him and ran up to Liam, just when everyone thought it would attack Liam the dragon bowed to Liam by placing his head into his legs, Liam simply asked for the dragon to pick the dragon and to stand to the side surprising everyone, Dragon rushed to the egg and went into the corned without making a sound. Liam took out his wand and waved it changing the entire battlefield, the broken rocks on the ground started to fly and merge and change into the shape of a rock dragon which got bigger and bigger into size, Liam jumped up, standing on the head of the dragon went and retrieved the egg the dragon was holding and flew on his rock dragon to Barty Crouch Snr and asked in a small cold voice if he passed. Everyone from the Judges to the audience was stunt silly, only his grandfather gave him a thumbs up. With almost a perfect score Liam advanced into the next round, after talking with his grandfather for a bit went back to an excited and crazed Ravenclaw everyone congratulated him and wished him. Liam thanked everyone and went on to live life like usual, One day after breakfast while he was going back to the room, he met with Mad-eyes moody who told him that he is worried about lack of guidance and want to help him, Liam smiled and thanked him but without listening to him went away leaving a stunt moody, next day after breakfast he was again walking away when he heard Harry and Hermione talking about how Harry is unable to find any clues regarding egg or the next round, Liam only then remembered about the clue that Cedric being the one who gave Harry of the prefects bathroom. Liam smiled and went toward both of them.


    Liam: Harry I just heard you talking about the second competition. Do you need my help?


    Harry with suspicion: Why do you want to help me?


    Hermione in her full-on fangirl mode turned to harry: Harry he is just trying to help you.


    Then faced Liam and said: Sorry about this, these past few days have been hard for him.


    Liam gave a sweet smile to Hermione: Don''t worry about him


    Liam turned to harry: I''m trying to help you as the head of your house, nothing more nothing less.


    Harry confused: Head of my house?? How?


    Liam: I''m the current head of Potter house.


    Harry and Hermione both shocked: How? Your last name is Kenway or Albert or something isn''t it?


    Liam: Yes my Last name is Albert but my inheritance includes being the Head of Potter and various houses including being the Head of your godfather''s house Sirius black. Well anyway go to the Prefects bathroom and open the egg underneath the water.


    Liam walked away leaving both of them standing stunt there.


    Harry after a few mins of recovering: He said he is the head of my and Sirius''s house didn''t he.


    Hermione mumbling in a slow voice: Yes that''s what he said.


    Harry: I need to inform Sirius about this.


    Liam without care and went on with his life soon the date of the dance was announced.


    Liam after completing his breakfast stood up but unlike usual didn''t look at the head of his house he calmly walked over to the Gryffindor table and walked up to Hermione.


    Liam: Hello Hermione.


    Hermione was sitting with Neville and having her breakfast while talking to him but saw him and the rest of the people on the table stop and stare at something when she heard a calm but hunky low voice, she moved and saw her ideal standing there smiling at her.


    Hermione in a broken and mumbling voice: He...hello


    Liam: I would like to ask if you already have a date for the dance?


    Hermione: No... No, I don''t have one yet.


    Liam smiled more brightly at her: Good


    After a few seconds of silence: Would you like to be my date for the dance?


    Hermione stunted for a few seconds recovered and replied in a low mumbling voice: Yes I would like that.


    Liam smiled once more: Okay thanks for agreeing. Bye, for now, I have a class.


    Liam looked at the head of his house and nodded to him as usual and walked away. Leaving everyone to stare at Hermione who''s the entire face turned red after he walked away and after that, she saw everyone staring at her so she with red face ran away from the Great Hall.

 Chapter 25 - Return of the Dark lord

    Liam took Hermione to the dance with him, attracting many eyes and dismissing rumors of Hermione having a love triangle with Harry and Krum. No one dared to make any rumor about Liam. Soon after the dance, Liam asked Hermione if she is interested in going for a night walk with him.


    Liam after Asuna has lost interest in love or anything related to him but after almost 40 years He finally understood what Asuna met by saying some things are just meant to be remembered as memories. Liam finally decided to move on this after much observation found Asuna and Hermione alike, both wanted to prove to themselves that they are just as strong as everyone while being someone everyone can depend on.


    Liam and Hermione talked about a lot of things, Hermione also told him about Harry and his situation while asking why he never came forth and helped him. Liam explained Hermione about his name of Albert and it''s limitation and role and promised that he will be there when the final battle begins as he can''t interfere directly into the wizarding world. Hermione being intelligent understood his words and understood the situation he was in. The night went on they talked about a lot of things, Hermione asked him many things she didn''t understand and about his life and told about her life from the muggle world into the magical one. Soon while talking they returned to the castle, and finally, in front of the Gryffindor room, Liam took a step forward and pulled Hermione a little closer to him while bringing his head down a bit as he was taller than Hermione. He lightly kissed her which Hermione too responded, Liam, pulled her a little bit closer and kissed her a bit more tightly and moved back, He saw Hermione in a daze he smiled and kissed her on the forehead telling her to go inside. Hermione''s face turned red and she ran inside the Gryfindor room.


    Soon the next day begins, and the task begins Liam too arrived with his phoenix. He came forth and greeted his grandfather and grandmother who were very delighted to see him, Liam moved his gaze and saw the rest of the champions arrive. Soon the competition started, which was such that they have to recover their partner from the Yule ball.


    Liam is the first place in the first round went first, Liam in his natural state jumped into the lake, having hybrid Hydra and Horned serpent DNA both primal creatures of water. He easily moved within the lakh, he instructed the merpeople to stop all the three champion no matter what happen even if they have to sacrifice their life, soon the three champions too jumped into the lake, knowing Krum will change into a shark he had water sharks to broke him and render him in case merpeople are not enough. He observed the situation using nanotech he has implanted into each champion when they met in the chamber after being picked by the Goblet of fire.


    He after an hour was almost over and he knew all the champions have already left the lake he firstly made a water dragon which consumed all 4 hostages then him, he came off the lake from within a roaring water dragon which throws all three hostages into the three platforms to each champion which were supposed to rescue them Ron to Harry, Gabrielle Delacour to her sister and Cho to Krum. Liam walked about of the dragon''s mouth while holding Hermione. The water dragon soon disappeared.


    His grandparents rushed over to make sure he is okay. Liam smiled and talked with them. Soon Hermione recovered from being in the water and saw Hermione talking to his grandparents, Liam seeing Hermione recover asked her if she is okay and then introduced her to his grandparents. Who was surprised and delighted to see Liam finally introducing a girl to them and finally taking interest in someone? Hermione was surprised and talked with both of his grandparents in a very nervous manner.


    Soon results were announced with the previous ranking order remaining the same, with Liam at first position. His grandparents asked Hermione various things and told her various thing not letting her go finally Liam stood up and interrupted them, telling them Hermione must be tired from the task and requested to let her go. Laughing of how their always indifferent grandson was trying to protect the girls they let her go but started teasing Liam.


    Soon the date of the third task was coming, Now Liam faced a problem about how to win the completion if he let Harry as original go get the cup, he will lose the championship but if he took the cup how will his dear Dark Lord revive and kill Dumbledor so he can take the last hollow without looking like bad guy, he loved his both his grandparents dearly more than he loved the Lu couple, he didn''t wanted to do something which will smear bad name on Albert legacy. after thinking a while he forged the plan titled "Play dead".


    Soon the competition started, Liam went in first He simply with the wand in his hand walked into the maze, soon the maze close, Liam put away the wand and changed into his Animagus Dementor form and flew to the sky, He watched as Krum entered the maze soon followed by Fleur, as Krum attacked Fleur under the effect of the magic Moody did onto him. Fleur got injured soon after which harry entered, both Harry and Fleur working together overpowered Krum who ran away, Liam changed back into human form and went to both Harry and Fleur, he using magic started healing Fleur while asking to harry to go and insure Krum is not coming, convinced by Liam and his power Harry decided to go after Krum to insure no more surprise happen. Liam with his practice in the Hogwarts wing fixed Fleur. After Fleur got consumed by the tree and went out of the maze he felt Krum too moving out, Liam went on to create a huge scar on his body making it so that he is just about to die arrived in front of the cup and waited for harry who with the forest going crazy came running toward him. Liam told him to grab his hand, with the hand of harry Liam grabbed the trophy, moving through the portal key, Liam and Harry arrived in front of the graveyard. Liam pretending to be frail fell to the ground, while Harry was surprised to see the surrounding, soon the plot happened, Peter, Harry, and Voldemort all presumed me dead from my wound. Soon as plot Peter took harry''s blood, an old bone of Tom Riddle his right hand and revived the Little dark lord. Who then using his little rats Hand to call for his death Eaters, Liam waited for Voldemort to drop to the ground and challenged his a duel. Harry left with no choice took out his wand to fight and in position to fight, But Liam appeared in front of him taking his hand and quickly grabbing the portal key and disappearing along with him. Leaving the brand of little dark lord and his death eaters stunt as all they saw was a dark shadow consume harry and disappearing.


    Liam along with Harry appeared in front of everyone, Harry was out of breath while Liam had a deep injuries over his body fallen to the ground, Seeing this everyone rushed toward them, Liam''s grandparents along with their guard rushed to him too while his phoenix came onto his body and started crying using which Liam acted as if his injuries are being healed. Dumbledore quickly asked Harry what happened who just repeated the same thing over and over again "He is back, he is back"


    Soon the phoenix healed all his wounds, his grandparents decided to take him away with them to the home, Soon he along with his grandparents arrived at the palace, His grandparents put him in a bed while ordering his men to go and get the medic. Liam seeing he is alone with his grandparents seat up, All his wounds disappeared surprising both his grandparents, He told them after entering in the maze he noticed something was wrong so went back to find Krum attacking Harry and Fleur, he saved them and healed Fleur while harry went to look for Krum. He after healing Fleur too went forth with the competition, he soon found Krum who he found to be under the effect of a spell and behaving crazily so he decided to play it safe and observe the situation so he made a fake wound on himself pretending to be dead, after which he saw Voldemort and Peter and then the Voldemort coming back to life. Using a moment when the dark lord and his minions were distracted he used the opportunity to escape. He went on to explain that as per Albert''s name they are not allowed to interfere with wizard world affairs thus wanted everyone to think and presume to be out of commission so that their family won''t have to fight till the time is favorable.


    Aiden listening to his grandson sometimes nodded got surprised and impressed. After listening to everything he understood the situation. He looked at his wife who also looked surprised and delighted to see their grandson safe and happy.


    Liam after giving both of them a moment to digest everything started talking again explaining that this time for them is to sit back and watch as things happen in the wizarding world while declaring him in a coma to the world. He also explained that while the war is going on he is planning on going to America and completing his education in the muggle world and that they both should also come with him, seeing the situation and the start of another war, his grandparent believing his words about the revival of the dark lord announced to the world that Liam is in a coma and that they will be moving to America to provide better medical care to Liam. They also sent a letter to Hermione pretending it to be written before the third round in which Liam wrote about liking her and also about him opening an account for her in Griggort which has 200 thousand gallons for her to use as she wishes to help harry in his quest.


    After a few days of the incident, two news was published in the daily prophet, one being from Cornelius Fudge declaring Dumbledor and Harry as extremists who want to gain power in the ministry thus are making lies about the return of Voldemort and such. The second was an article of Liam about the incident at the Triwizard Tournament which he won while also talking about his family his achievements his perfect school records and finally about his results of the early N.E.W.T''s he took before the first test with the consent of all his professor and their recommendation at the ministry. The result was just that he got an outstanding grade in all 12 subjects which he took the N.E.W.T''s off and were offered at the ministry, creating another record within the Wizarding world.


    Soon Liam along with his grandparents left for America. Liam''s grandparents invited Hermione to met Liam one last time before he is gone. Hermione along with Harry came to meet him, after guiding them to Liam''s room they left them alone, Liam pretended to be in a coma with machines and such covering him from the muggle world. Harry went first he thanked him for saving him and wished for quick recovery after which he left Hermione alone with him. Hermione started crying while telling him she likes him too, she also told him she will wait for him to recover and come for her, and finally thanked him for the money believing it will help them a lot and take care of himself while he is in America.

 Chapter 26 - Your opinion

    Dear All,


    I just completed writing One piece and need some opinion regarding the direction the novel will be taking in the future.


    The order which we will be going from after one piece? For now, what I have decided is Bleach - My Hero Academia - Hunter X Hunter then MCU. Some people have also requested Overlord but Sorry after thinking a lot due to my lack of knowledge regarding this world I have decided no to take up Overlord.


    Would you mind if I nerf the MC completely after One piece? I promise it would be more interesting this way and give me more scope to write about and also start the storyline of his Godhood.


    MCU is the next world I have decided the MC will have a romantic interest. For this, I have decided MC will have 2 companions instead of one. One of whom will be Susan Storm, Kindly recommend another one.


    In MCU, Would you like the MC to be born as


    a. Thor''s twin brother


    b. Tony stark little brother


    c. Orphan in NYU


    Regards,


    Kazru

 Chapter 27 - Can we just Kiss Forever?

    Liam and his grandparents arrived in America, they decided to part ways. Liam had already talked to them about going into the world on his own. Liam firstly took admission at Harvard who was after seeing his record and his being a member of the royal family was more than happy to give. In America, Liam owned 3 castles 28 houses and about 39 properties so Liam wasn''t particularly worried about living anyway and he also is one of the richest in both Wizarding and Muggle world wasn''t worried.


    Liam took it slow while completing management and a legal degree from Harvard in one year sought to continue studies at MIT talking various engineering and Master of Science degrees within three years, with the help of Hope and little bit magic, Liam prevented anyone from leaking anything thus didn''t bring any light onto himself. He like the SAO world started with a small company that dealt exclusively in energy such as petroleum and such while using Hope to form many branch companies into all fields. Knowing Rons feeling for Hermione and Hermione''s internal struggle of loving Ron, Liam didn''t have many expectations from her but Hermione proved him wrong, Ron, after tasting some victory in his sixth year and knowing Hermione feeling for Liam, didn''t pursue her, Hermione too with her promise didn''t saw in that light thus remained friends only, the three years went as the plot which Dumbledore first being removed from his post after the "Dumbledore''s Army" exposer then Black dying and people truly seeing Voldemort and finally being Harry and Dumbledor followed by Dumbledor and harry discovering about Horcruxes from Slughorn and then finally the Dumbledore and Harry going in search of the Horcruxes. Liam knowing the story knew the time of Dumbledore has come. And the chance of taking ownership over the elder wand will come soon.


    In the past 2 and a half years, Liam has not wasted his time in the muggle world only he knew almost everything regarding all the subjects and his company was managed by Hope, Liam not wasting any time of these 3 years used his companies influence along with a little bit of magic put all the cities, townes under surveillance, using muggles who put up cameras for him everywhere, he then found an interesting men a man who turned a bit mental from a torture done to him by a witch, all Liam did was whispered an Idea into his ear of the man and left him alone for now. The name of the man was Harold Finch who worked with his friend in their own company IFT with Harold being the brain and Nathan Ingram his classmate from MIT being the face.


    Liam after watching the death of Dumbeldore decided to go and get that ownership out of Draco Malfoy''s hand.


    Liam dressed in complete black and put on the mask the same as Tobi, Apparition to Malfoy manor. He activated his Byakugan making sure Draco is their went in the House, simply bounded everyone with the manor with chains including Draco and his mother.


    Liam calmly with both his Byakugan active making his eyes completely white with veins coming out of them walked into the manor not wanting to waste any time. Liam directly went to Draco and said: I will give you one opportunity if you could defeat me I will leave if not, I will kill your mother.


    Draco filled with fear for his and his mother''s life took the dueling stand. Liam not giving any opportunity and not wanting to waste time disarmed him. After which he simply disappeared and appeared in front of the newly constructed Dumbledor tomb. Using his dementor form went inside and took the wand out of the old dead men''s hand. Thus finally collecting the 2nd deadly Hollow, after doing so Liam disappeared again and went back to America. Leaving no traces of him ever being there with the help of Hope.


    With only a few months left before the battle of Hogwarts, Liam finally got the answer between Ron and Harmonie when Ron angry with Harry left the trio after which Ron destroying the Horcruxes with the Gryffindor''s sword showing an image of Liam and Harmonie kissing and later Ron confessing to both that the real reason he was angry was due to him in love with Harmonie and hating Liam for having her. Harry saw this as stuck between a rock and a hard place as one party is his best friend while another is his savior who decided to not take part in between them. Meanwhile with a conflicted mind of Ron''s confession of liking her, Harmonie also slowly realizes her feelings for Ron and her loneliness due to Liam not being there for her in a moment of hesitation kissed Ron but later refused Ron stating that she was confused for a moment with Ron stating that if she likes him then she should be with him to which Harmonie stating to talk about after the war is over. Liam smiled seeing this and taking a deep sign decided to visit his grandparents telling them about Harmonie and his situation with her while leaving the part of him being a creep who placed nanotech with which he can spy on her 24/7. His grandparents told him that he should simply let her have her choice not to force anything as forced love is worse than not being loved sometimes. Listening to his grandparents, Liam left the thought alone. He informed his grandparents about the upcoming battle and his plan to take part in it and requested them to stay here. Knowing their grandson''s power and maturity, his grandparents wished him and promised to not interfere.


    With this promise and heartbroken, Liam decided to start his plan for the originals, at first he was planning on letting Hope Michaelson being born but later decided that Killing them as early as he can and leave this world as soon as he can. He would just simply go into any random world after this one.


    Liam with the arrival of the trio at the Hogsmeade made his way toward Hogwarts, Slowly making his way toward the rooms of requirement where he knew the students were hiding in his invisible form. He observed as the plot happened of Luna showing Harry the path to find Ravenclaw''s crown and Liam didn''t go after them but watched Ron and Harmonie interact with each other, he realized that the true thing he was hurt about was that he missed Asuna nothing else. Sighting at his insight, Liam saw Snape order Students to gather within the Great Hall.


    Liam decided it was time to join in on the fun. He saw the member of the order of Phoenix gathering outside the Great Hall, He appeared in front of the Gate surprising everyone in the order, some even draw out their wands.


    Liam facing the gate put his hand on it said in a low cold voice: Are you ready to dance?


    The Huge gate of Great Hall blew up in pieces.


    Harry who was about to walk in the front along with everyone all the professors and students were stunted. Liam wearing a Black suit calmly walked in and looked at snape and calmly said: I said: "Are you ready to dance?"

 Chapter 28 - The Babayaga

    Snape like the rest was a stunt.


    The ground moved on its own throwing the students and professor like to side, 2 chains came out of the ground and went straight into the 2 associates which Voldemort has assigned as DADA and muggle studies professor, Killing them by thighing around their necks.


    Meanwhile, snape recovered and tried to attack Liam but failed to even move, he looked down and saw his hands and legs tied by chains which were moving everywhere covering his entire body.


    Harry and rest also soon recovered from being thrown to the side and saw Snape captured.


    Liam walked to snape and whispered into his ears that he knew about his plan with Dumbledor and that he would support him and gave him a fake elder wand which was powerful enough for Voldemort to believe it''s real, the fake was made out of the black mass of Hope, thus giving Liam complete control.


    After doing something Liam let go of snape who using his death eater state escape.


    Liam calmly walked to the front and created a chair out of the ground in front of everyone.


    Harry came running to Liam screaming about why he let Snape go.


    Liam calmly listened to him, when Minerva came and interpreted Harry telling him to give Liam and opportunity to speak. The rest of the members of the order of the phoenix too came forth surrounding Harry.


    Suddenly a loud magnified voice of Voldemort ran thought the entire school: I will give everyone in the school the opportunity till dawn, Hand over harry potter or die.


    Before anyone could reply Liam too in magnified voice replied: Come tomorrow morning, We are ready to hand over him over to you then.


    Voldemort while laughing: It seems we finally have someone intelligent. Very well tomorrow morning them.


    Liam looked at everyone in the front and said: Well that gave us some time, we should arrange personals first we can talk later.


    Liam then nodded and looked at Minerva and Filius: Professors I would like to ask if you could kindly take Slytherin students back to their house rooms.


    Filius understanding the situation nodded fully believing his student similarly Minerva too nodded.


    Liam moved looked at the order of the Phoenix members then turned to Madam Poppy Pomfrey and Argus Filch said: I would like to ask if you could kindly escort all the students who either don''t want to participate or are too young to participate through Hog''s head Inn outside Hogwarts.


    Argus Filch and Poppy Pomfrey both inadequate personal who couldn''t fight thus understanding Liam''s words went into action and quickly asked everyone who wants to stay and who wants to leave.


    Liam then looked at Harry and other members of the order and said: Well we can either sit here and discuss why I let snape go or you can go and destroy the Hocrexe which I believe is in the room of requirement''s room of hidden things itself.


    Harry understanding the seriousness of the situation nodded but before he could speak Ron shouted: Who made you the boss? Seating their ordering everyone. Why don''t you go and destroy the Hocrexe while I seat here huh why don''t we do that?


    Liam looked at Ron tilted his head a bit and then looked at Hermione for a moment then smiled: I see I understand the situation. If you want I can leave right now, no no I can even do better than that I can leave and stay in America for the rest of my life where I will still be a Prince in both muggle and Wizarding world without a care for Voldemort or you and Miss Granger over there.


    Liam stood up and simply ignoring everyone and went out of the Hall. Harry seeing a powerful ally leave felt that Ron has shot himself in the foot ran after Liam to stop him but Liam and long disappeared. Without wasting time in arguing with Ron about Liam called for Luna and Hermione to come with him. Hermione was stunt after seeing Liam smile thinking that he knows about the kiss and her feeling felt conflicted when suddenly Harry called for her... putting thoughts for Liam and Ron aside Hermione rushed with harry to the rooms of requirements. While going their Hermione realized they don''t have any means of destroying the Horcrux, Hermione decided to discuss with Harry who suddenly remembered the beast who''s teeth they used to destroy the first Horcrux. Soon both Harry and Hermione along with Luna ran to the chamber and recovered the fang of Basilisk. They found Liam standing in front beast playing with its fangs.


    Liam moved his eyes toward them and smiled to see them finally here. Harry came forth and asked Liam what he is doing here. Liam explained by taking Rowena Ravenclaw''s Diadem crown out that he too has been a long time searching for all the Horcruxes and why he left earlier because he didn''t want to argue with Ron, then went on to explain that Harry too is an accidental Horcrux who need to die from Voldemort''s hand which is why he had earlier agreed to hand over Harry. He also explained Dumbledore''s final gift stating that as per his research the stone is inside the golden ball which Harry needs to use to dead and came back alive ending the Horcrux, Harry confused explained that all Dumbledore has left him was the Golden Snitch which he caught in his first match. Liam asked Harry if he could have the ball which Harry, after something agrees, Liam taking the Snitch, was now in possession of all three deadly hollows see the undermarking on the ball asked Harry to kiss it, Harry found it weird but looking at how serious Liam was kissed the ball while Liam head it. The ball started to open and the Ressurection stone came out. Liam explained to Harry that he was always supposed to die according to Dumbledore''s plan which is why he was chosen and called a hero for his sacrifices. Understanding Liam''s words Harry too accepted his death. Liam asked Harry to rotate the stone three times and give it to him. Harry did just that as he knew he was going to die anyway, He closed his eyes and rotated the stone three times when he opened his eyes he saw his mom dad Sirius standing there he smiled at them and asked Was death painful to which Sirius laughed and replied no it was quick and painless soon the surrounding changed he saw Liam, Hermione, and Luna standing around him. Harry nodded his head at Liam understanding.


    Liam taking the Helga Hufflepuff''s Cup from Hermione put it next to Diadem taking a fang in both his hands stabbed both the Horcrux. Soon the dark mask came and attacked Liam who raised his hand and pushed back everything with magic.


    Voldemort feeling the pain of having 2 of his Horcrux destroyed at the same time turned mad and order his legion to attack Hogwarts.


    Voldemort and his legion soon arrived in front of Hogwarts which was coved in a defensive spell all over. Voldemort motioned his death eaters to begin the attack but a voice interrupted him: Lord Voldemort, I have come with Harry Potter in my possession.


    Voldemort surprised and help went forth to find Liam bringing a bound Harry. Liam seeing Voldemort quickly kneed thanking him for the opportunity to prove himself, Voldemort in his arrogance dismissed him while starting to play with Harry. Using curses to torture him, Liam just kept his head down while kneeling and waited for the show to end. Finally, after some sadistic pleasure, Voldemort killed Harry ending the show. Liam understanding that the show over rose up, standing straight and started laughing as Voldemort felt the pain of losing one more Horcrux, Liam waving his hand took the wand away from Voldemort who was wailing in pain while rest of the death eaters rushed up to defend the dark lord. Liam waved his hand using his magic power to the fullest and locking the space preventing anyone from escaping whether they were magical cretures or Humans. Liam then put both hands on the ground using his complete powers pulled spikes out of the ground which piercing all the death eaters and creatures in various parts of there body making their body hang mid-air thus killing them slowly while immobilizing them as they slowly and painfully lose their blood. Leaving only Voldemort, and Snape.


    Voldemort seeing this got stunt all his army completely discriminated completely. Liam finally moved to Voldemort using his hand to lift him high in the Air while using his other hand to forcefully bring out Nagini and then suppressing her onto the ground and stabbed her with a fang of Basilisk in the head. Voldemort screamed and shouted after which his body started to break into pieces and finally he turned to sand.


    Liam changed the ground near him into a chair and seat their and waiting for Harry to wake up while watching as Death eaters and creatures die slowly while Dementor''s above stood there and did nothing same with snape who watched everything happen in horror.


    Soon Harry woke up, seeing which Liam too stood up. Liam took Harry back in complete silence, Harry didn''t ask anything too.


    In Hogwarts, all the professor''s seeing Liam, Harry, and snape return alive were delighted and rushed to them, Liam explained that Voldemort and his army is also dead and that all the Horcrux are destroyed too. Liam just said this not explaining how, when, why or anything to anyone. Liam nodded to Filius who also nodded at him.


    Liam went up to Hermione and told her he wants her to be happy and seeing that she has feelings for Ron he doesn''t want to trap her into a forceful relationship, he kissed her over the forehead and said Goodbye. He looked at Harry who also looked at him, nodding at each other, Liam started walking away, after some distance stopped and Looked Back one last time at the Hogwarts Castle, Liam turned his voice into magnifying and spoke in a rough cold voice: When you harm a Human anywhere with intension, always remember the boogeyman will come for you.


    After which he turned into Dementor and roar, all the other Dementors rushed up and roared too, changing back to Human form he looked at Harry giving him a little smile and then turned around and disappeared, Dementors too disappeared. Leaving a whole crowd of stunt people.

 Chapter 29 - Death

    Liam arrived at his castle in America and went straight into storage where he took out the Invisibility cloak and went out of the house.


    He stood in front of a rock in made on the ground placing the clock on it then the stone and the wand as an offering to Death. Soon, An old man with black Hair holding a can come out of nowhere. The old man didn''t completely ignore Liam and went up to the three deadly hollows picking them up, the three Hollows after he picked them up disappeared. The old man finally moved his eyes to Liam and asked in a meek voice what do you desire to tell me?


    Liam knowing that taking anything from death places a huge burden on everyone bowed his head and asked for just a simple blessing


    Death appreciating Liam''s attitude and ungreediness took out one of the deadly Hollow the invisibility clock and gifted it to Liam wishing that it helps him in his adventure in this and the world which is about to come.


    Liam knew he got more than he could ask for bowed his head to death again and thanked him...


    Death wished him best for completing the task of originals went away.


    Soon the news of Voldemort death and Liam Albert defeating him spread throughout the world, His title the boogeyman also spread along with stories, some said he was a Dementor, some said he was a Dragon while other said He was light passing through everything destroying everything. Thus the legend of Albert House was established, the House of the Boogeyman. His grandparents laughed a lot and made fun of him calling him BooBoo among many things they were sad to see things not working out with Granger but seeing that Liam has moved on didn''t bring up the topic.


    Liam in 1998 before the battle has already reached the age of 21 and with him being immortal decided to remain 21 years old. Liam after completing his adventures in harry potter world. Set his eyes on the Muggle and the vampire one. Liam with the prime age and having success and time decided to play around, acting as a billionaire playboy slept with many models actress and singer, he traveled many countries slept with women from their while leaving all the business and everything to Hope to manage.


    During these 5 years, Liam visited more than 24 countries, sleeping with more than 200 women also searching for orphans, He found many children who either magic in them but compressed due to them having no relatives thus making other wizards seal their core or Human children in whom he though has the potential to develop and become a hunter for him. He also searched for Vampires too, captured them and experimented on them making full use of them to learn how vampire compels people or what kind of limitations does their speed strength agility pain tolerance among many things. He also found werewolf tribes and researched them about their venom which is like a natural enemy of Vampires.


    The Idea he has whispered to the man lead him to create a machine that can predict possible outcomes of the future based on the actions and nature of a person. The man with trust handed the machine to the government which spread it throughout the world. Unknown to both, the man or the government, Hope worked side by side with the man changed the code of the machine just a bit making it part of Hope with Hope in complete control.


    After 5 years, In 2003 he had more than 80 orphans working for him ranging from the age of 8-15. In his years of research, he found the hybrid venom he had of Baliskin, Hydra and Horned serpent was already more potent than werewolf which he anyway incorporated into his DNA, H also found that strength of a normal 200-year-old Vampire was nothing compared to his own, Only those vampires which are more than at least 600 years old were a bit match for him if he only use strength, not magic, it was same for agility but in terms of speed, Liam was far superior as he could Apparition anywhere within moments regardless of any condition. Compulsion was a tricky thing it implanted fake memories onto a person, Liam could also do so using magic but not at such level which would make them comply with everything. Liam researched and researched on it before finally concluding that he needs the blood of an original to understand the concept of compulsion completely.


    With a little bit of training, he had about 35 or so Witches and wizards ready at the level of normal supporting wizards found, while having a team of 40 or so Hunters which he trained himself using different methods.


    With almost 6 years remaining from the plot of Vampire dairies starting and Damon Salvatore coming into town before the death of Elina Gilbert and Stephan saving her while letting her parents die. He decided to start the plan, he first sent a team of 7 to mystic falls with the pretense of opening a hotel and bar within the town using the name of his company, he also instructed his team to bring back a small piece of the town signboard which was made of a White oak tree. His team passed all the test that the council put forth whether it was of vervain drinking or they checking for vampire using Gilbert compass, after doing the deal with the council on their way back to from the town the team completed their mission and brought back the piece of a White oak tree.


    Liam used the black mass to put forth the character sticks of the white oak tree inside his blood thus making his blood when consumed by an original or vampire lethal to them, using nanotech inside his blood he can always trigger the genus of white oak inside is blood.


    Liam then sent some people and started the construction of a resort-type hotel with bar for the local using Hope and slashing prices he made most of the bars within a town close and offered jobs to them, thus avoiding the anger of the people in town. Liam also continued to train the people under him while instructing Hope to find the bodies of White oak ash dragger originals which Niklaus has hidden from his brother Elijah, Hope easily found the bodies which Liam quietly went and took blood from them while injecting some of his own into them, and again started his experiments of Compilation. After completing his research, Liam too modified his magic and become able to complete regardless of a person having vervain in them or not.


    With 3 years to go, Liam who has consumed and mixed countless dark weapons in his body via dark matter started using the dark Matter to form a dark weapon which is enough to incapacitate an original not killing them, making them suffer, He did this for one and one reason alone Michael the person who killed his parents.


    Liam with everything in place changed his body into that of a 14-year-old himself, he then enrolled in Mystic falls high with the plan of staying close to the doppelganger Elena Gilbert knowing Klaus will come for her and bring Elijah along with him.


    Liam pretended to be the son of one of his men who managed the resort along with fake results of his life which Hope created. He knew where all the people in the games were using the machine the muggle human Harold have created for him, but he wanted to wait as he was interested in Hybrid and its power.


    Liam became friends with both Elena and bonnie, Liam acted casual didn''t get in a relationship with anyone he was the friend you could go and talk to about anything, having a good relationship everyone He also started playing football for fun but not very good as he didn''t want the story to change too much. In also implanted his nanotech into everyone relevant.


    Soon three years went by he remained friends with everyone without becoming too involved in their life, one day Elena''s parents died. Starting the storyline Liam has been waiting for.

 Chapter 30 - The Originals

    Liam went into full emotional support mode with Bonnie for Elena while waiting for the next semester to begin in which Stephan will join in.


    Soon Stephan enrolled in school after which Damon too came into town, and the story began.


    Liam patiently watched all the drama happen and how about Elena becoming close with Stephan then learning she is adopted and stuff which soon ended with Katherine Pierce coming into town acting like a big shot and killing John Gilbert.


    Soon like the plot, Klaus got news regarding the moonstone and the doppelganger also come into town, followed by Elijah and then the witches.


    Liam has already taken the Vampir hunter and inserted various black matter weapon''s into him when he moved into the town. He let Michael suffer alone hungry making him feel like he is in hell.


    He saw as Greta along with other witches came into town bringing the body of real Klaus. He waited for the spell to be performed and bonnie coming in all her power while trying to kill Klaus when Elijah came and ripped through Klaus''s ribs grabbing his heart. Seeing that the time is now, Liam who was watching everything while standing there invisible came into being surprising bonnie who was standing at a distance.


    Liam looked as Klaus told Elijah that his siblings are not at the bottom of the ocean but with him, and Elijah picking Klaus to run away, seeing this Liam raised his hand.


    Bonnie who was watching for the distance and screaming at Liam to run away, saw this and got surprised as she saw both Elijah and Klaus hanging in the air unable to move, Liam waved another hand of his throwing Damon and the rest who rushed to Elena away. Liam grazed Elena''s cheek a little then looked at Bonnie who was standing their stunt informing her Elena is going to be okay.


    Klaus and Elijah both hang in the air struggling to move. Liam went in front of them and bowed.


    Liam: Allow me to introduce myself, I''m Liam Mikaelson, the last alive Mikaelson. You don''t need to worry I already have the rest of your siblings.


    Liam took out a dagger made out of black matter and embedded into Elijah making him dragging him into sleep like the rest of the sibling while he also touched Klaus and embedded nanotech into him. Let him go. Klaus saw this as a moment of freedom decided to focus on his transformation first and then let come for his brother.


    Liam in the meantime with the help of nanotech changed into his own 21 self, He looked at Bonnie who was holding Elena and said He is known as the boogeyman in witch culture if she even wants to find him and then disappeared.


    Liam has already ordered his men to move the bodies of all the Mikaelson''s when Klaus come into town, He took the body of Elijah and placed him into a similar coffin. He took out the black mass dragger out of Elijah''s body walking him up, he remembered Elijah had the most pages of Esther''s grimoires. He showed Elijah the body of all his siblings hiding his parents, He threatened Elijah that he will deliver all the bodies to Mikael if Elijah didn''t bring all Esther''s grimoires pages to him.


    The biggest problem with the originals and their families was that they were unable to stay dead, always coming back alive and trying to kill each other. Using the idea of Voldemort, Liam first chose 7 draggers and made them into Horcrux of the 5 people he had with him Finn, Kol, Rebekah, Mikael, and finally Esther. After making sure that their soul is trapped without any possibility of leaving Liam activated his white oak tree genus burning the bodies of all the originals present except Klaus who was ramping around in his Wolf form, After burning all of their bodies Liam created Fiendfyre destroying all the Horcrux and their soul within them leaving no chance for revival. Liam using black mass dissolved all the leftover material such as ashes and broken pieces of the draggers. Just to make sure noting collected to them isn''t leftover


    After 3 days, Klaus woke up after completing his transformation to a wolf, he remembered seeing a boy who introduced himself as the last Mikaelson and that he had taken Elijah while saying he has rest of the siblings. Klaus with caution fled after getting clothes he wasn''t worried about what will happen to his siblings believing that they are immortals, he was worried that the boy will release them all which will make things for him to against all the siblings together at once. He rushed to the storage house where he has hidden the coffins, Liam watched everything from the nanotech he has left on Klaus, he seats there in the storage patiently. Soon Klaus came rushing in and looked at all the coffins missing and that boy sitting on what looked like a throne-like stone seat.


    Klaus seeing the boy directly went for the kill, but he couldn''t move at all, Liam smiled and said: I will give you too choices one bring me all your mother''s grimoires which you and your siblings collected throughout the years or second I will wake up one of your siblings and torture them along with you of course or better I will send a message to Mikael about your siblings and their sleep so he will just have to walk here and stab your siblings then He and I can come for you. Your choice.


    Liam then waved his hand breaking Klaus''s head. He told one of his men to go and send Klaus back to mystic falls.


    Liam waited for about 2 months as he watched Liam first run and try to hide but Liam always after 3 days send him pictures of some Coffin along with the fake picture of Mikael making him understand he can''t run or hide. Klaus then knowing he has to do Liam''s bidding, for now, started gathering all the pages from his mother''s Grimoires he soon met with Elijah who also was searching for the mother''s grimoires, both formulated a plan to attack Liam after recovering the bodies of their siblings from Liam.


    Liam patiently waited for 3 months after which he saw Klaus and Elijah returning to mystic falls separately to make him believe they are not working together, Elijah came first with the pages he had and gave them to Liam. Liam took them and smiled telling him to wait as he will inform his people to bring all the bodies here. Liam took out his phone while pretending to be calling someone, cast a silence spell to make it seem real.


    Soon Klaus too came in with the pages, Liam taking them informed the siblings are already on their way. Klaus watched Elijah who singled to attack. Klaus rushed and ripped the heart of Liam out of his body. Liam pretended to be dead and fell to the ground. Klaus picked Liam''s phone but as he bow down to take the phone out of Liam''s pocket which was lying on the ground felt his inside on fire. Liam calmly out up from the ground and put a black matter dragger onto Elijah while placing another dragger into Klaus which he found to be a modified golden-white oak ash one which Kol was working on but was unable to complete. Liam taking some blood out of Klaus started the process of trapping their soul and turning them into Horcrux while burning the bodies off both Mikaelson''s and then absorbed their ash. He then felt the vampires around America turn to ash as their Sireline head is dead. Using Fiendfyre he destroyed both the Horcrux again. Thus ending and destroying the originals only leaving Freya from the family who as per his task he didn''t have to kill.


    Liam took all the pages of Esther''s grimoires after reading them consumed them with his black matter thus ending any possibility of anyone using them ever. Making it impossible for a kind of resurrection Spell to be constructed by Davina or any other witch.


    Soon the space in front tore and a voice came out


    ??? - The task is fulfilled what do you want?


    Liam - Lord would it be possible for me to take the black matter in my body to the next world with myself?


    ??? - The matter used in making the black mass is from this world so I can permit you to take the material, you will have to use your other wish to take the black mass with you.


    Liam - Thank you Lord for providing me with guidance.


    Liam felt that the ticket to the next world appear in his pocket taking it out Liam nodded.


    Liam decided to visit his grandparents and ask them to join him via world seed, they can stay alive with the world seed without any worry.


    His grandparents were reluctant to leave all their friends and such so all Liam could do was use his nanotech on them making them Immortal like him by changing their DNA structure to that of a phoenix. Liam also made a mega Hope station in his grandparent''s home while also giving them various Castle and such where they can retire and remain secure. He also used his witches and Wizards to spread the end of the original family and the vampire species as in whole crediting it to the Boogeyman which was his persona throughout the world. He made a system in which those 35+ witches will serve as the branch of the Albert family and maintain the balance between muggles and the magical world.


    He established the 40 or so Humans to establish their line while serving as chains for his family within the muggle world.


    He also went to each house and castle he owned and used his magic to make them as secure as possible if his grandparents even use them.


    He also started compiling books on every subject within the system but stopped when Hope informed him that his parents in the Sword art online world were near death.


    Liam informed his grandparents of his departure and telling them he is always connected to them though Hope via which they can always connect to him.


    Liam took out his ticket and the space in front of him tore sucking him in. Liam found himself standing in front of the young men again who greeted him in the same manner: Greeting son I have informed the manager of your arrival. Welcome to Hotel del Luna.


    Liam turned and saw the young women coming toward him: Fellow me you know the process.


    Liam: I was hoping to return to my first world my parents in that world are dying.


    Young women: Hm... okay come, let''s go.


    Liam and young women went into the same room, Liam looked at both are bodies which looked very handsome.


    Young women: the Same process sleep and tell them about wanting to go back to the first or whatever world you want to go to.


    Liam laid on the bed but before he could wish or anything his soul flew out of his body and went into Lu An''s body.


    Liam/Lu An stood up in his previous body and looked at the women.


    Young women: Okay now you can go out of the hotel and fulfill whichever task you wanted to do in this world, after doing it come back to the Hotel.


    Liam/Lu An stood up and went away.

 Chapter 31 - The Emporer

    Liam moved out of the Hotel, instructed Hope to arrange for transportation while also asking for the nanotech inside his body to be updated.


    A BMW without anyone in it soon came in front of the hotel which Liam boarded. Liam drank some water present and moved his arms and legs a bit as he felt them bit stiffed. Soon the nanotech was updated and moved through his body reviewing all the portions of his body to make sure they were in perfect condition. Soon Lu An arrived at his old house. A party was going on many people coming into the household. Liam was informed that Little treasure''s daughter was getting married. Liam smiled coldly and went in his nanotech changed his cloths making it into a black suit.


    Lu An walked into the house ignoring everything. But one of the guards rushed up and stopped him asking for an invite. Lu An looked coldly at the guard releasing a bit of him bloodthirst. Soon some of the guests at the party saw the seen and started talking insulting Lu An. Lu An picked the guard by the neck and throw him through the door of the entrance of the House. Bringing more attention from others.


    Lu An calmly walked in ignoring everything, someone from the ground came running and kneed in front of Liam,


    Klaus: Klaus greets the lord and asks for forgiveness to not be there to welcome you.


    Lu An simply ignored him while some more people came from the crowd and kneed.


    Liam without looking at them in a cold voice asked: where are my parents?


    Klaus while bowing: Lord they are in their room resting.


    Liam started moving toward the room.


    Everyone from the crowd was confused to see powerful people such as Klaus, Ryo and others kneeling on the ground in front of an unknown person who didn''t even look at them.


    Someone from the crowd finally recognized Lu An and screamed in a broken voice: I know who that is.... he is.... he is the Emporer.


    Many people were confused as they heard this while some connected people who knew of the history of the business or underworld broke out of sweat as they hear Lu An''s identity, The Emporer was the title held by a monster which once ruled the world, His rule was absolute, no one could oppose him. The story was such that the Emporer to take care of his sick wife donated his empire changing billions of life and ultimately retired after his wife died, the story goes go to say the rule of the Emporer was always there, he left 9 families which ruled the world on his behalf now. One of those family head was Klaus said to be one of the most trusted people of the Emporer.


    Lu An arrived in his parent''s room where his father seated on a chair in front of his mother who laid on the bed.


    Lu An slowly walked toward them and put his hand on his father''s shoulder who turned around and saw his long lost son standing there with the same face he saw him last time. Liam seat next to his father and held her mother''s hand.


    Liam looked at his mother knowing she didn''t have much time spoke to his father in a low voice: Do you want to continue living with her?


    Shooked to hear his son say something like this Lu TingXieo nodded then he head his son: I can make this happen you too will be part of me then Go sleep next to her.


    Lu TingXieo believing his son slept next to his wife holding her hand. Lu An put his hand on both of them planting nanotech who constructed a nerve gear condition and started uploading their brain. His mother woke up feeling a handover her head. Lu An spoke in a low voice: Go to sleep this is the least I can do for both of you for giving birth to me. Thank you I will meet you soon.


    Fully uploading their consciousness into world seed, making them part of the system giving them rebirth completely.


    Lu An after fulfilling his purpose, left the room and started moving out of the House when he heard Little treasure speak Brother you come to my daughter''s wedding and didn''t even bring any gift and made so much conflict and disturbance what are you trying to do?


    Lu An stopped and looked back at Little treasure and spoke in a cold voice: Good luck with the wedding and the company I hope some big bad wolf doesn''t set his eyes on it for insulting his dead wife.


    After giving his a cold smile, he looked at Klaus and others who bowed their head he nodded and went out.


    He seats back into his car which moved on it''s on logged onto Never gear and accessed the world seed and found his parents who were living in a house made of bamboos and were young again, He looked at them enjoying each other company and happy. Lu An face broke out a small smile then he logged off, went back to the Hotel Del Luna as he was told by the young women.


    Lu An opened the door and saw that the Hotel is overflowing with water. The young man who always greeted him at that door came and informed him that they are facing some situation that will be solved soon and that the manager has left instructions for him to stay in his room she will soon come and talk to her.


    Lu An chucked and then started moving toward his room. He opened the door, the room was completely unaffected from the water. Lu An went and a seat on the sofa waiting for the manager. He started remembering the story of Hotel Del Luna he has seen in the series something similar happens in it too.


    Soon the manager with an older woman and a young man came.


    Lu An with the same expressionless face observed as far he could remember this young man is supposed to be the person the manger will fall in love with and then have to leave for the afterlife. Lu An didn''t say anything. The older woman started talking: You have impressed a lot of people with the clean and sportless work, so much that 3 worlds lesser god has put in a task for you for their world.


    Saying that the old woman gave Lu An a sheet of paper with information about the tasks and the worlds in it.


    Earth world: A lesser god named Ankhseram has inflicted a cure on a human via which he disturbed the balance of life and death and grown powerful.


    Task: You are tasked with waiting till The human under the cure is coming into being either kill/seal the god Ankhseram thus removing his influence in the world of the living and dead.


    Reward: One kind of Magic from this world which you would be allowed to use in the next or previous world you go to.


    World: A lesser god by the name of Anima wanted to rule the world as his own created a rift between the boundaries of Lower Heaven and that planet in the hope to bring his body along with him but due to Heaven''s High god''s law the body of the lesser god didn''t manage to go through the tear completely only managed to send his spirit which caused chose within the world and brought about Devil Fruit into existence created due to heavenly energy leaking through the tear of space.


    Task: Kill the spirit of the lesser god. Find the tear in space and throwback the body of lesser god back into heaven thus removing Heaven''s energy from the world. Also, collect 3 ancient artifacts made by the people of that world using Heavenly technology.


    Rewards: Can choose at the time of completion of the task.


    Earth MCU Universe: 4 lesser gods for their entertainment created 6 stones of power and left them in the universe, thus changing the course of many civilizations and worlds.


    Task: Collect all 6 stones. Offer them to the cosmic entity who will seal them thus stopping the imbalance. Be cautious if other cosmic entities find out about your mission they might hunt you down.


    Rewards: Can choose at the time of completion of the task.


    The older woman started talking again: I was told to also explain that you will be able to use only some of your eyes power in each world with the last one being an exception where you can use them fully. I was also told to explain to you that due to your wish to carry forth the dark matter with you have used both the wishes of that world one granting you right to carry on the material which dark matter is made of out of that world and second granting the mixture of those materials which form dark matter form in you body. In each world, you go to you will find the dark matter as a coin in your pocket when you reach the age of 4 similar to that of a ticket coming into your pocket. Additionally, the dark matter can only be used to consume and deconstruct thing which is not truly alive as in you can acc.u.mulate an egg into the dark matter but not the animal if it comes out of the egg. Do you have any questions?


    Lu An: Is there any time limit on each quest?


    Old woman: No, each world is hard and filled with danger I would personally recommend you only go when you are sure you can do it.


    Lu An nodding his head: I would like to go as per the list and go to Earth world first. can you kindly tell me the limitation I will be facing regarding my eyes?


    The old woman then picked up the paper with tasks on it and said: You will only be allowed to your eyes till Eternal Mangekyou Sharingan level. The world you''re going to is based on Fairy Tail. All the best to you.


    Lu An: Okay I''m ready. Will I get the magic of my choice or a random one?


    Older woman: As you were told when you started you can choose when where how in this regards so I don''t know.


    Lu An then sleeps on the same bed his body was in when he first left the world and said: I would like to be born 4 years before Natsu is born, somewhere in the Magnolia Town itself with the Magic Arc of embodiment and become conscious when I''m 5 years old.


    The space in front of him tore and sucked him in leaving his body behind.

 Chapter 32 - Fairy Tail

    Lu An woke up in the body of a boy in the middle of the night, he called for hope and told it to arrange all the memories of the boy. He saw that his name now is Logan Hunter, his parents were both wizards who had died while on a mission leaving him with their friends the bread earner of this family whose name was Lucius who took care of him along with his wife and 1 boy. The family was poor and the wife would always fight her husband for taking in Logan while the boy would bully him endlessly with his friends. He saw Logan didn''t have any friends, his dream was to become a strong magic knight for the council to bring people who killed his parents to Justice.


    Lu An or now Logan stood up from the floor he was sleeping in, today was the 5th birthday of his life, Lu An went to the window and looked at the sky coldly his eyes started to change first came a red eye which didn''t stop can keep on changing to finally stop with an uncountable number of flower-patterned filled red Eternal Mangekyou Sharingan. Lu An/Logan searched for his clothes and found a black coin in his somewhat torn pants pocket.


    He smiled seeing the coin, he flipped the coin which flew into the air and then went inside his body. The black mass controlled by Hope spread throughout his body quickly Healing any wounds he had while also removing any scars, his muscles also started to change, the black mass removed any substance in his body which was harmful to his body. Logan/ Lu An slowly felt something enter his body, he seat on the ground and went into a meditative pose. Try to connect with the energy soon he felt a connection with Kurama and his natural life energy connected to him he felt his whole body go under a baptism of magic blessing all parts of his body.


    After reformulating his body, Lu An/Logan moved toward the door where he could see the husband and wife shorting at each other while discussing bills.


    Logan''s eyes changed into EMS he went right through the door and tried to use his magic Arc of embodiment and made what he remember though to be money from this world. He created a pouch filled with money and throw it on the women and said in a cold voice: Here take this stop shouting now.


    He then looked at the man who was standing their stunt: Thank you for taking care of me, If you even need anything in the future look at the sky and ask for the boogeyman.


    Saying that Logan disappeared.


    Logan moved out of the house and went out of the town, he started experimenting various things with his magic, with imagination as the limit Logan experimented in creating various weapons and machines, He recreated the Hope Super AI which he created in Naruto world. and started making various metal sheets of material which he used and created satellites of different kinds and use, one of which was made as a beam of an array which can short an impulse of magical short from space strong and big enough to destroy anything or being he wished which he infused the black mass with to act as a constant source of connecting between him and the satellite.


    Logan went around the entire continent fighting various creatures and wizards he found, Logan practiced all uses of his magic and learned limitations such as he couldn''t create living beings or anything which will have a soul he could create things from other worlds and use them to their fullest while also adding special effects onto them. Logan created nanotech using the magic made out of Vibranium, one of the strongest material known in all the worlds. He also made the key to the gates of Babylon in the hope of accessing the weaponry but wasn''t able to completely access it he could take out materials such as books and blueprints which were storied in it but not weapons. He uses his imagination and magic was able to create one after a lot of affords was able to create Enkidu the chain of the gods and using his personal space was able to attack via different angels using the chains.


    The training lasted 4 years with him placing almost 28 satellites in the orbit monitoring everything along with weapons ready to fire anytime he wants.


    Logan decided to join in the Guild which would be at the center of it all. He wore the mask Obito used when going for the final battle for 8 tail and went back to Magnolia Town. He created the weapon of Uchiha Madara Gunbai while adding the ability to reflect and absorb the attack of any kind made against him.


    With everything ready he entered the town and made his way toward the Guild.


    He opened the door of the guild and saw a bunch of people fighting and shouting at each other while some drinking together.


    Logan quietly made way toward the bar where he saw the guild master seating and drinking alone.


    Logan went up and took the seat next to him and made a bottle of wine and gave it to the master.


    Makarov Dreyar was sitting alone while thinking of how to deal with the magic council who was on his back went suddenly passed him a bottle which he unconsciously took and started drinking lost in his thought, the drink was very delicious and came his come out of his dizzy state, he moved his eyes and saw a kid around the age of 10 seating next to him reading a book, the boy had a very weird mask on his face covering everything except his eyes.


    Makarov moved forward a bit to look into his eyes but the boy closed his book and turned to Makarov who saw crimson color eyes similar to the color of blood.


    Logan after staring into Makarov for a moment: I would like to join the guild. Do I have to fight anyone?


    Makarov after thinking for a moment nodded and spoke: Yes you have to fight and defeat someone from the crowd, Pick anyone you wish.


    Logan looked at Makarov for a bit then moved his gazed toward the guild members some of who have also noticed him. Logan saw Gildarts not present in the bunch and was disappointed.


    Logan spoke in a cold low voice: All, I will take them all.


    Makarov seeing the seriousness of the boy laughed and said: If you can take one of my attacks you are in How about it?


    Logan simply nodded.


    Both Logan and Makarov went out of the guild followed by other members some were happy and drinking while others where bit angry listening to the little twerp speak of taking everyone at the same time.


    Makarov started expending his size and became a giant, he saw Logan simply standing there doing nothing, unable to understand the situation he asked: Are you ready?


    Logan simply nodded his head and made sure to see his mask is not losses.


    Makarov throws his first punch with only half power, Logan moved his hand and used Gunbai to block it then deflect the force back onto Makarov. Makarov felt a push back after recovering he saw Logan simply standing there in the same position but holding a weird weapon so he asked: Do you want to continue?


    Logan: I''m already in the guild what can you offer me?


    Makarov: Which rank to place you on


    Logan hearing this nodded and said: I heard the guild only have one S rank member right now. I''m quite interested in that.


    Makarov smiled hearing this and said while throwing another punch: For that, you need to at least defeat or draw this match with me.


    Logan hearing this smiled and moved his hand, A skeleton hand came out of the ground and blocked Makarov''s hand surprising everyone then a skeleton started rising more taller than Makarov. taking Makarov whos hand it was holding into the air. With only half of its body, Logan from inside the skeleton asked while slowly rising his bloodthirst: I think we should talk in your office or do you want to continue fighting?


    Makarov''s size started decreasing, Logan too removed the Susano and put down Makarov.


    Makarov looked one more time in Logan''s eyes only thing which was not covered somehow and said: Follow me.


    Logan rearranged his mask and fellowed Makarov leaving a bunch of stunt members.


    After reaching the office. Both Logan and Makarov didn''t speak anything.


    Logan waved his hand and created 2 tea filled cups handing one to Makarov and started talking: Do you remember Kessa and Jacob Hunter?


    Makarov while taking the cup and after some thinking: Yes, if I remember they died while coming back from a mission, we sent some people and it looked like the work of bandits.


    Logan removed his mask showing his face, he also removed his shirt showing a fake scare on his body made by nanotech: I''m their son. No, they died due to a demon who can control people. when I was 5 I was living with my uncle Lucias when Not wanting to be a burden on them as they were poor I left home awaking some kind of eye power.


    Makarov shocked to hear that Logan was the son of his guild members then he heard about his struggle and went quiet.


    Seeing Makarov not talk, Logan continued: I went around everywhere doing whatever job I could, One day as I was traveling I was ambushed by some bandit when an old man saved me. The old man was injured somehow so I started traveling with him, he taught me his magic and told me about his life stories, he also taught me about fighting a demon who could control people and about his hunt for it, One day he had cornered the demon and was about to kill it when the demon control a group of bandits and attacked him during the fight who were passing by saw the old man alone fighting a demon and a group of bandit rushed to save the old man but the demon seeing them used them as a means to bait the old man who when saw a couple being involved in his fight rushed to save. Ultimately in the couple getting killed by the hand of bandits while old man getting injured with whom I had run into.


    Makarov had already guessed the ending midway through the story and kept quiet.


    Logan started putting on his clothes: Soon the old man too died and I started training in the magic went around everywhere. Trying to find clues regarding the demon but failed thus decided to come back and join the guild my parents were proud to be part of. With the highest S rank, I hope to find the demon faster to avenge my parents and master. That''s my story.


    Makarov nodded in understanding and after some time said: Okay, I agree to you joining the guild but you''re too young to be made S rank within the guild. Do some missions and prove yourself.


    Logan nodded and put on his mask. Then turned and started walking toward the door.


    Makarov from behind asked: What is the name of your magic?


    Logan: Caste Type: Arc of embodiment. Ancient magic.


    Logan simply walked downstairs and went to the mission board and took 7 most rewarded mission and went to bar and register then left the guild.


    The time when by soon the members of the core future team of fairy tail joined in, the guild remain lively as ever. Logan did all his missions quietly without talking to anyone or asking anyone anything and soon became an S rank member and started leaving for a longer time. He planned nanotech in everyone within the guild just to be sure. He was nicknamed Crimson Hunter due to his eyes and last name.


    Liam one day took the mission for a long time and left the guild. The mission was supposed to go for about 10 years as part of S mission. Liam hunted down the monsters which he was supposed to hunt as per the missions but decided to not go back, He made started watching as Lucy joined the guild and such, He started experimenting again with his magic and successfully created a fake gate of Babylon he went on to create various types of weapon he could think of including weapon he has seen and started filling his personal space. He via his nanotech saw the guild members levy and two others being attacked and understood the arc is finally starting and started moving toward the guild.

 Chapter 33 - Phontom Lord

    Logan soon reached fairy tail but remained hidden in the shadow. Soon Fairy tail attacked the headquarters of Phantom Lords ending in Malarov being out of commission.


    Phantom Lord moved their headquarters changing it into Super Mage Giant Phantom MK II mode and started researching Jupiter. Erza prepared her shield getting ready to block the attack but she saw someone standing in front of her.


    Logan arrived in front of Erza and took his Gunbai and observed the energy attack of Jupiter. He looked back and spoke in a cold voice: See you soon.


    Logan disappeared and appeared in front of Super Mage Giant Phantom MK II flying midair fired the energy bast from the earlier back into the Jupiter. blasting it to pieces. He jumped up and used his Sharingan rushed into Phantom lords headquarters, defeating everything which came in his sight and finally arrived in front of Jose Porla the guild master of Phantom lords using Susano he smacked Jose into ground again and again after which holding him by the neck disappeared and appeared in front of the fairy tails Headquarters where Erza and other where standing. He throws Jose in front of Erza and disappeared again appearing in front of Makarov who was lying on the beds. Logan waved his hand and created a soul recovery portion to him waking him up. Porlyusica soon arrived and asked who he is?


    Logan without saying a word signed showed his hand which had a fairy tail guild symbol on it.


    Soon Makarov recovered and saw Logan seating theirs without saying anything.


    Makarov: Did you complete the mission already?


    Logan: Yes


    Makarov: What happened with the Phantom lord?


    Logan: Done.


    Logan splits some blood onto the floor and waved to Porlyusia who was coming to help him: Guild Master I used too much magic to rush back to the guild when I heard it was under attack, I will be going into a slumber soon Take care of my body.


    Saying this Logan''s body felled on the floor and a black liquid started to consume him soon his entire body was covered, Logan who was pretending inside used his Sharingan''s ability and put in a dummy inside the crystal while going into his dimension.


    Now with the excuse of being in hibernation, he can practice and travel as much as he wants. Thus, Logan first in his dimension started experimenting with his magic Arc of embodiment, He tried to create Infinity stones, he was able to create the outer structure but not fill the rocks with power, no matter what he tied the power would always leak out of the stone such as F¨±injutsu which he learned in naruto world or Ancient Ruin magic he learned in harry potter world.


    He also found via his experiments that the chain of gods which he has created, he found that the chains were depended on the mightiness of the magic a person has not Divinity like the original thus now he faced a problem as he wasn''t sure whether the chains where enough to hold the Lesser god Ankhseram in the final fight.


    Deep in thought and research came up with various planes he can use during the fight and also old trick such as "Play dead" which he used with Little dark lord but wasn''t sure at this time the opponent was a lesser god with the power to eradicate all life near him with a wave of his hand. thus he decided to use his different persona and put away his mask and dressed differently and started traveling throughout the world in the hope to find different and all known versions of God Slayer magic. He remembered a little bit of fairy tail story arrived at Lamia Scale in search of Sherria Blendy who was known to have Sky god slayer magic but was disappointed seeing this as Sherria was just a kid right now and couldn''t use magic much.


    Filled with disappointment and waiting or the Tenrou Island arc where he remembered one of the attackers having Fire god slaying magic.


    Filled with boredom, Logan decided to travel in search for newer types of magic around the world, with his Sharingan he could already observe and copy the process of one''s magic, he has already copied Requip from Erza in her mode the Knight and the gunner from Bisca Connell. Like this with hope to find some good unique kind of magic he went around the world leaving from one to another continent in the hope to learn new things. He also met Gildarts in his travel and observed him using crush magic which with his Sharingan and Hope''s analysis copied, making it so that he could use crush magic while fighting bare hands in combat, with his experience from Sword art online and Naruto world he already knew how to fight thus incorporated one more magic into his arsenal.


    He also tried to create something to bind the Divin but due to his lack of understanding and availability to experiment on the Divin he failed. Thus Having no choice he went to see Zeraf but found that Zeraf had already sealed off his memories resulting in sealing magic thus, making it not possible for him to see him using his magic intentionally or not.


    Feeling with no choice, He continued his travel, he came upon a man who could use spiral magic to deflect the attack and return to the attacker.


    He also found various versions of takeover magic, he wasn''t interested in any so he didn''t copy any he just observed everything. During his travel, he found an old man who could use ancient magic by the name of Devil''s Lover, the magic was very unique the old man used the magic to recreate the memories of a much happier time of his youth when he had a lover and energy to take on the world. Logan felt connected to the magic and tried to use the same means as always to learn it but failed either his Sharingan nor Hope we''re able to provide him answers regarding the magic, feeling frustrated and with a sudden sense of helplessness, Logan decided to one day approach the old man. With Hope''s analysis, he knew the man would die of old age soon thus decided to reveal himself.


    Logan went up to the old man who lived in a broken house full of sculptures of different people, things as if they were part of some story. Logan also saw hundreds of sculptures of the same women the man recreated again and again in his memories using a ball shape magical item. Logan went the house but stopped seeing the man was working on a sculpture of the same women but the sculptor was smaller in size only a hand size. Logan stood outside the house observed the man craving it carefully with each stork trying to recreate what he had lost. After completing the sculptor the old man looked up and finally saw Logan. Logan bowed to the old man and asked about his magic and would it be possible for him to teach him.


    The old man seeing him started laughing loudly and said: Young man, you remind of myself when I was near the end of my youth I too saw someone use this magic and lost myself in it. You seem to not have passed your youth yet why don''t you go around a bit more because the magic I use it cursed.


    Logan confused by the words of the old man asked: What do you mean cursed? If it''s cursed why do you seem so happy to use it?


    The old man laughed loudly again and explained: Young man the Magic I use it cursed because it''s made purely out of love, it gives you joy sorrow strength and heartache at the same time, Love can define everything for one but at the same time define nothing but pain and suffering for other.


    Logan: Is that why I feel connected to the magic? Cause I have loved someone?


    Old man chuckling: No brat, you see this is the curse of the magic and also it''s a requirement ''Someone who loved you and you loved them more then you love yourself or anything else in the world, Love such which exceeds the boundary of life and death but in the end, you can''t with them'' that''s why you''re connected to this magic, that why this magic is Devil''s lover. They loved you so much that even the devil had respect for it.


    Logan hearing this went into deep thought he has in the previous life had been in a relationship with more than 300 women but all he ever truly loved was his wife Asuna, the more he thought the more he realized Asuna''s love. His heartfelt heavy heavier than anything he had gone through, he started remembering the moments of his life with her as Lu An in real life and as Kai in the virtual world. Feel with sadness and remorse Logan wanted to be alone and decided to simply walk away but he heard the old man laugh loudly and say: See this is the curse. When you can overcome it come to me I will teach you my magic, the strongest known love magic even the Devil''s lover.


    Logan didn''t really hear his words and just kept walking soon, he walked for days and night never stopping anywhere until ultimately he without paying attention walked off the mountain, Hope issued a notification after notifications regarding the mountain but Logan ignored them all. Hope using the black matter as a means destroyed and defended him form anything which cam in his way or was in any way about to harm him. Hope being part of his soul was able to control his body if there was a mean which needed its intervention. Falling from the mountain, Hope started to control the black matter in an attempt to use it and prevent anything from happening. Feeling the remorse and sadness in Logan, Hope decided to take matters into its own hands and started the process of initialing Logan onto World seed at the same place where Lu Ting Xiao and Ning Xi were.


    Logan lost in the memories kept waking not realizing the intervention of Hope. When suddenly he felt someone hug him, he looked up coming back to reality realized his mother Ning Xi was hugging him, seeing her He started crying. His father just pressed his hand on his shoulder.

 Chapter 34 - Who wants to be the Devils Lover huh?

    After crying a while logan finally calmed down, His mother took him inside the baboon house she and her husband lived in. She started asking him many things such as has he eaten food yet has he been well among other things.


    Logan hearing his mother go on and on smiled a bit and understood no one can ever replace the love a mother holds for her children not even death.


    Lu TingXiao seeing both of them relaxed and offered some water first to his wife and then his son.


    Logan took the water stared it for a while meanwhile Ning Xi and Lu Ting Xiao looked at each other and nodded, his father finally asked him: Son is something bothering you, You can share it with us we might be able to help you.


    Logan after some time started talking about his life, rebirth the mission and finally about Asuna about her death and the void which is consuming him how he is unable to understand why Asuna left him alone.


    Both his parents listened to him and were stunned to learn about their son''s reality they could feel the sadness and loneliness in his voice, his father decided to speak first: Son it must have been lonely for you.


    Ning Xi: Asuna just wanted you to move on son not be stuck on her, she really from the bottom of her heart loved you.


    Logan stayed silent but tears started falling from his eyes seeing him like this his mother hugged him.


    Logan stayed with his parents for a moneths, and become closer then he was in real life. Watching both his parents who were over 90 behave like teenagers in love, Logan understood what love truly was. He also gave both his parents access to other worlds with the seed so they could travel and enjoy if they prefer.


    Logan watching his parents with a heavy heart and understanding love decided to go back to the old man.


    Hope was on the outside was in control over Logan''s body had already brought him closer to the old man''s house and hidden him within his dimension.


    Logan took control over the body and noticed hope''s intervention and made a self note about it as it might one day turned against him. Logan went out of the dimension and simply walked up to the old man who at that time was watching his magic item. Seeing Logan come, the old man threw a knife at him Logan caught it, Old man: Since you are soo hellbent on learning this go crave something into the wood if I like it I will take you in as a discipline.


    Logan nodded and went up to a block of wood and carved a beautiful rabbit using the skills and experience he gathered in SAO. He pridefully showed it to the old man who took it and started observing it from different angles and throws it on the face of Logan and screamed: Do I look like someone who was joking when I told you to sculptor something?


    The old man raised his hand and a black mass came out and formed a big punch, Logan seeing this formed his skeleton to defend himself and used his chain of gods to bind the old man.


    The old man simply punched him destroying Susano and throw Logan miles and miles away destroying everything with the path. Chains didn''t do anything and seemed as if they were simple chain which broke apart easily without old man trying.


    Logan after falling from a distance stood up, his nanotech started healing his body standing up Logan took out the knife again and started carving another masterpiece with full concentration this time he carved a Dragon he has seen in harry potter world. But the old man again simple throw the sculptor back to him and this time punched him in the stomach. This went on for a few days Logan even decided to copy the old man and sculptured the same sculptor as the old man but the old man rejects him every time without giving him any proper reason and simply shouting at him for being unwilling to learn and being a brat.


    Logan feeling frustrated after a while decided to observe the old man as he sculptor. The old man smiled at the plain block of wood and started carving it with care as if each part was a story which needed to be noted as it happened, after observing a while Logan finally understood the difference between him and the old man. He was sculpturing with the heart to fulfill the task while the old man was carving his love onto a block of wood without care for the shape or size.


    Understanding the answer, Logan started thinking about love, his love for his parents and family in Sword art online world, his love for Kurama in the next and finally for his grandparents in harry potter world.


    He started carving those feeling onto wood but every time he completed a sculptor he felt as if it''s missing something. With all the time he had, he started carving each happy memory of his life. Each moment he spends with his loved ones, he felt joy but still, he always felt sometimes was missing.


    He observed Old man work every day trying to figure out what he was missing when one day the old man looked at him and said: Just close your eyes and carve your heart out that''s what I do.


    Listening to the old man, Logan created a blindfold via Arc of embodiment and shut his eyes. He started thinking about happy moments in his life when suddenly the last image of Asura lying on her deathbed smiling at him came to his mind. The knife in his hand started carving on its own, Logan completely lost himself in that image. After a while, he felt a hand on his shoulder bringing his back to reality. He removed his blindfold and saw the old man smiling at him.


    The old man: I like this sculptor of yours.


    Logan turned back his head and saw Asuna standing there smiling with the same expression he saw her last time telling him, I truly love you.


    Logan seeing her broke down and hugged the sculptor he had created and cried his heart out, the old man seeing this smiled and mumbled in a low voice: It seems she truly loved him even more than herself.

 Chapter 35 - Return

    Some days went by Logan carved a few more pieces his heart always felt fulfilled after carving a sculptor of Asuna. He talked to talked a lot with the old man who told him about his adventures and how stupid he was in his youth. Logan just listened to everything he also started learning magic in general which he never really did but simply learned by observing people around him. He also started diverting all his efforts in learning and opening 2nd origin in his magic which after analysis with the hope he concluded can leave a channel more power from Kurama and his dimension which had the power of three god trees.


    Devil''s lover was believed to be driven directly from All magic, making it one of the most powerful and offensive type of magic in the world. The kind of magic that could even be used to fought the devil or so was believed. The magic came into being from love in a version depending on the experiences in have learned throughout one''s life. It could give infinite supply as long as one remembers his source, nature was simple as his arc of embodiment it could caste any kind of element or non-elemental attack using it making it virtually impossible for a being to stop it or counter it back.


    Logan knew that the old man would be dying soon so he offered the old man if he would like to upload himself onto the world seed and continue his adventures but the old man rejected and even scolded him stating that the next big adventure of his is already decided and his love is waiting for him, a few weeks afterward the old man while working on his sculptor passed away suddenly his body just gave away, even the nanotech Logan had planned couldn''t do anything.


    Logan buried the old man and carved a sculptor of the old man. Leaving with the sculptor of his beloved. As one man in love, he used all his magic channeled it to break apart the space between his dimension and the real world and sealed everything the old man had from house to sculptors it inside his dimension so that it remained safe and secure.


    He created a similar house like the old man using the arc of embodiment and started living in it. He started experimenting with both his magics combining them and such. He also started learning God slayer magic which he observed through hope via satellite and nanotech he has left behind into the two people he knew used such magic. He also observed the moments of Fairy tail and how they all have left for Tenrou Island. He set a time limit of 10 years for himself and decided to use the last plan of waiting till Zeraf dies then use that moment to drag the mighty god down with him, with Devil''s lover and god slayer magic he had some confidence but didn''t stopped searching for other kinds of magic.


    After completing all his preparations in 7 years, Logan after visiting his parents and then went back realizing that the part to receive core members has already he decided that it''s time for him to wake up from the slumber.


    Logan transported himself back to the guild and saw that due to financial difficulties they have left the headquarters, many members to have left.


    Logan came inside the crystal form which was buried inside the ground and started coming out he heard shouting from the outside about bring money for safekeeping.


    A skeleton hand came out of the groundbreaking wooden floor half. Logan in his mask and old form came out. Logan stared at the person who was asking for the money then moved his gaze toward guild members who were also staring at him.


    Logan asked where is the guild master and such


    But before anyone could reply the person asking for money started shouting again for money.


    Logan asked the guildmembers if the guild owned them money to which they replied it was for safekeeping and they were threated into giving the money. Acting as if he is filled with anger, logan lifted the person and threshed him onto the ground, again and again, ignoring anyone''s shocked reacting. He asked Macao about the guild headquarters of the bullies. With the pressure exerted by Logan Macao quickly told the location but also ordered Logan to stand down stating that now he is the guild master and logan being part of the guild must listen to him, Logan waved his hand and created a lot of money and asked Macao to return all the money which has been borrowed from others. Seeing Logan acting peacefully, Macao decided quickly and started arranging members. Logan already via his nanotech knew that Natsu and the rest are nearby so he didn''t intervene in anything but he also didn''t let anyone leave asking or more like demanding someone to explain the situation before they can leave. Soon Natsu and the rest came barging in.


    Logan ignoring the rest went straight to Makarov and hugged the old man.


    Makarov was also surprised as he never took Logan to be an emotional type. Logan explained that he had just wakened up and then went on to explain the situation of what happened. Hearing him Natsu and the rest got angry and started urging to rush and beat the people.


    Logan stood at the side and just watched everything happen. He has already solved the financial problem of the guild but even then, most members insisted on doing or contributing to the guild hearing this, Logan created an advertis.e.m.e.nt poster of the Grand magic games and told Makarov the guild could participate in it to show their comeback and also earn themself some finance. Seeing this Natsu and others got fired up and started bugging Makarov to participate. Makarov not seeing any harm in participating agree but asked everyone to train hard. Logan in the meanwhile started giving the speech about how this is an opportunity for the guild to show everyone that Fairy tail is not to be messed with taking the example of people who were just bullying the guild earlier.


    Soon things settled down and Guild decided to participate in the Grand magic games and people left to do individual training. Logan with the pretense of also training went alone and left the guild with the promise to come back in time for the games.


    Logan traveled back to old man house and stayed for a month enjoying life and watching various factors playing out he also started via satellite started watching and learning the magic of the Spriggan 12, during his observation, he also found a god slayer magic user with the attribute to darkness, he only then remembered that there were various large guilds within the Alvarez Empire which got destroyed due to Zeraf''s order right around his time due to the order of Zeraf''s son August.


    Logan''s only reason to come and join the fairy tail crew this time was that he wanted to experiment with the 7 dragons which will come out of the Eclipse Gate. With the goal and plan in mind, Logan started his plan of learning God slayer magic combining the magic of 4 people with 4 elements, his understanding on how to stabilize the elements from the Naruto world helped him and quickly gained experience.


    With the month up and half of the new magic formed, Logan decided to go back. He changed his mask from a white color to purple, the black matter come out of his body and coated his complete body. He changed his eyes back to Sharingan and started his journey back to the guild.

 Chapter 36 - Dragons

    Logan returned to the guild earlier than everyone but he stayed in his dimension as he had no intent what so ever to participate. He had 3 goals. First, watch the Lighting God slayer magic first hand, Second, To learn and copy the Fairy Glitter, he had already learned Fairy sphere from the guild archives when he reached S rank and Fairy law when Laxus tried to use it to take over the guild and lastly, his third goal was the dragons.


    The games started, Orga Nanagear''s control over the magic was pathetic, to say the least, even dragon slayers were able to fight him filled with disappointment Logan continued to watch one, he copied the entire process of Fairy Glitter onto hope and started breaking it down. The magic was complex and require deep analysis to use it at full strength. Leaving the task for hope Logan rechecked all the things to make sure that he is ready for the fight with dragons. On the last day, Natsu left to save Lucy. Logan Waited for the fight to start activating his 2nd origin gave a huge boost to which gave him access to chakra up to 6 tails which in the fairy tail world would be equal to Acnologia right now.


    Soon the terror started, Logan waited till all seven dragons were out and gate to close.


    He appeared in front of the guild master Makarov and others who were watching in terror as they heard the voice of the dragons.


    Logan looked at the guild master who also saw him and spoke in a low voice: It seems I might have to overuse my magic again, Take care of my body I will return soon.


    Without waiting for the reply from anyone, Logan took out his Gunbai out and rushed to the largest building within the vicinity. On the roof, he inserted the Gunbai into the floor and raised both his hand.


    Thousands and thousands of Small golden circle covered the entire sky, different sides of the chains started pouring out and falling from the sky.


    Chains when on to pierce everything in its way and wrapped themself onto the dragons embedding into their core and started absorbing their magic. Hope with its analysis of the dragon slayer magic done throughout the years told Logan that he can concentrate all the magic from the dragon into one point and form his dragon seed which made dragon slayer, it also informed that the dragon seed would be under the control of his magic thus he can stop or let it grow as he wished.


    Logan was delighted to hear this, adding another power to his arsenal was never a bad thing. Logan started latching all the powers from the seven dragons onto him. Some chains came and embedded onto him making him fly into the air. People from everywhere were stunned by the sight A man defining the gods.


    Logan after sucking everything from the dragon fallen to the ground and a black crystal started forming around him. Everyone rushed to the site some even tried to catch him. Makarov and others found a huge crater within which was a black colored crystal. Some members were sad while somewhere trying to process what was going on. Natsu raged on to the fake Rouge and fought him till Lucy found the way to send everyone back by destroying the gate. Thus finally ending the Grand Games arc.


    With only Fairy tail members feeling sad for their fallen member. Makarov orders the members to take away Logan''s crystal back to the guild but the King stopped him stating that he and his entire kingdom owned a great debt to the Logan and he would like to be the one to take care of it.


    Makarov with much persuasion from the king broke down and left Logan in the Palace. Meanwhile, Logan changed back into his usual self and went back to the old man''s house and started working on his god slayer magic which he left halfway for the games, he also told hope to analysis the dragon seed which was being formed inside him due to high magic pressure onto the dragon force he extracted from the 7 dragons.


    Logan created a new style of fighting with the four God slayer magic with the attribute of 4 elements darkness, lighting, fire, and wind.


    Logan continued his lifestyle of observing and learning magic he also formed his dragon seed via condensing magic into a singular point, the dragon seed unlike the dragon seed of Natsu and other wasn''t of one particular element, Logan tried to incorporate the god slayer magic into the seed but failed as they both serve different purpose and made entirely out of different order or so Hope concluded in its analysis. Logan practiced the Dragonification of the dragon seed which gave an immense boost to the strength of a dragon slayer. His dragon slayer form contained various elements which caused instability and thus resulted in the power outlet to be less powerful overall. Logan with hope started searching for various ways to boost power and remembers there was a 100-year quest in the guild which was regarding the 5 dragon gods. With deciding to go and challenge them in the hope to absorb their elements. Before that 5th generation of Dragonslayer crap starts


    Logan prepared after practicing everything and learning everything knew about 20 types of magic with 4 ways specifically to fight the lesser god Ankhseram.


    Logan dressed in a simple outfit of white shirt and black pant started his journey toward the Diabolos, the dragon eating guild first which he located via satellite, standing in his dimension he watched the guild had 26 members each with a different kind of dragon slayer ability, Logan was very interested whether he can absorb their elements or not and used all of his magic to first compress everything within vicinity using Grivety magic: Fall which he copied from Bluenote Stinger one of the Grimoire Heart members. Blurnote wasn''t able to use the magic to its fullest capacity due to limited magic supply but it was different for Logan, he used all his powers making it so that only people who have equal or more power than him be able to move. After pinning everyone to the ground Logan embedded everyone with the chains of heaven of his version absorbing their powers but to his disappointment, he could only absorb the magic, not their elements. Hope after analysis concluded that eating them might provide the answers but Logan wasn''t willing to eat the flesh of a Human. Thus simply killed them and left in search of the 5 ancient dragon gods. First, he went to Viernes the dragon of gold who took ruled a village and gave gold to them in return for them to give something very personal and precious to them in return.


    Viernes was similar looking to those dragons he has seen in the harry potter world.


    Logan didn''t give a crap about the backstory of the dragons whether they were good or bad. Finding Viernes, Logan straight up used his EMS and formed a Full Susano which towered over the dragon making it small itself. Logan has been learned Brandish mass manipulation magic made his Susano so. Logan first punched the dragon while the Susano was being formed then released thousands of chains from the sky which pierced into the flesh of the dragon making his moments limited, Logan also combined his Devil''s lover and Arc of embodiment magic and created a huge spear and pierced the dragon from his mouth and rooted the dragon onto the ground, Logan created 2 more short knives and did the same to the hands of the dragon. Leaving it incapacitated to move. Chains upon chains kept falling giving it no opportunity to change into human form and such. The dragon god Viernes was not as strong as the dragon king but in the short future, he would be as the possibilities were hight. Logan not wasting any moment started absorbing the Dragon force and powers of the dragon all it''s magic filling up and increasing his magic capacity. In his Susano form with one leg on the dragon''s head and both hands forcing the Spear on the mouth, Logan didn''t pay any attention to anyone. After collecting all his magic powers including the life force, he throws the body of the dragon within his dimension and disappeared for the town into his dimension.


    With one dragon down, Logan''s next target was the largest dragon Aldoron who could read the mind of people which Logan wasn''t worried about as he had Hope protecting it all the time.


    With the Largest dragon in existence to fight, Logan started preparing first he imbued his entire arsenal with Devil''s lover magic, which gave it properties of all the elements disregarding all everything in its way when used to attack.


    Logan also combined his magic Devil''s lover into the black matter in his body giving it a sealing property by creating a magic device using the black matter.


    Logan already knew the location of the dragon via satellite moved and stopped in some distance, Hope to keep his entire mind blank while prepare to fight. As the Dragon stood up to move around, Logan jumped into his dimension and moved toward the sky, Falling from the sky, thousands of golden circles open up with weapons completely black in color thrown out of it. the weapons pierced the body of the old dragon disregarding everything in between, Millions upon millions of all weapon small big large starting from the head of the dragon creating small holes in his entire body, Millions of people lived in the cities of the 5 orbs from which the Aldoron draws his powers to cut the supply off, Logan who was falling for the sky activated his full Susano with 4 arms. With a Susano sword in each Logan embedded the hands and legs of the dragon. While motioning the chain to go throw the gaps created by the weapons he has cut throw the dragon earlier.


    Aldoron, screamed in pain and started using the wood around and on its body to try to protect itself. but due to Devil''s lover being infused with the weapon the weapons and the chains simply went through the dragon disregarding the existence of wooden barrier completely.


    The chains went through the dragon inside out completely covering the entire body. And started lifting the body of the dragon in the air. Aldoron SCREAMED in pain as both his legs and hands were still embedded into the ground and moved his head to use dragon breath to destroy the Susano swords. Logan used this opportunity to disregard the swords of Susano he was holding while seating atop of the dragon''s body and created a Rasengan like a ball made out of black matter with Devil''s lover and pushed it inside the mouth of the dragon who was about to throw a force blast at the swords.


    The black matter has the property to disintegrate everything so that hope could analysis it, with the infusion of it with Devil''s lover magic the black mass as it is disregarded the energy blast and everything and rushed into every part of dragon as if it was its blood. Dragon too stopped moving or doing anything like the black matter already infiltrated its brain and with the medical knowledge, he had from previous worlds hope to cut out the connection with his brain from the rest of its body while using the black matter to act as his brain following all his orders.


    Leaving Logan with A walking dying fully charged and weaponized largest dragon in the world under his control.


    -x-x--x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-xx-x-x-x-x--x-x-x-x-


    Kindly read Author comment and reply. Thanks

 Chapter 37 - The so called Gods

    Logan moved the entire dragon into his dimension. Millions of people who lived on the dragon''s body were already removed via chains left onto the forest nearby.


    Logan''s next target was the Moon Dragon god Selene.


    Selene the moon dragon god lived alone on a mountain at the highest point was it could bath in the moonlight every night. Knowing the nature of her magic and the power she draws from the moon and the starts, Logan knowing astrology decided to attack in the morning time when both the sun and the moon aren''t fully available not taking any chances and wanting to use the same strategize against Selene as the wooden dragon god, Logan covered the entire sky with the golden circles which chains upon chains descending onto the dragon who was sleeping, Chains covered the entire mountain not giving any opportunity to escape, the attack was completely silent not giving for dragon to wake up anyhow with Chains holding the entire dragon in his human form appeared onto top of the dragon''s head which was struggling and inserted his hand inside the brain leading the black matter to directly entire the brain disintegrating everything inside and taking command over the body of the dragon, with two dragons under control, Logan moved to the guilt-ridden water dragon who have drowned an entire town.


    The body of the Moon-god dragon was very unique with 4 blades like the scythe, due to it being sleeping and defeat in her sleep the full power was never used or the fight could have prolonged.


    Putting the third dragon body back into the dimension, Logan moved to meet the water dragon god this time.


    Mercphobia was living in with a girl around 11 years age, logan went up to his house and knocked on the door.


    Mercphobia surprised by not being able to sense anything from the man standing in front of him: Who are you?


    Logan: I''m here because of the 5 dragon gods, 3 are dead I will give you two choices first give me your powers second I will kill you and take your powers.


    Mercphobia hearing the first part got surprised and by second part getting angry he truly felt sad by his act of drowning the village but he wanted to have his power to protect Karameel and the people of the village, he understood that the body standing in front of him was giving the choice out of kindness if what he said regarding three of the dragons fallen to be true.


    Seeing the conflict on the face of Mercphobia, Logan decided to give him some time and told him that he will come back in the evening for the answer.


    Soon evening came and Logan could see that Mercphobia with the convincing of Karameel and the villagers have decided to give up his powers but within his dimension, he saw the unwillingness in the eyes of Mercphobia. Remembering the lesson about greed before Logan came up the House while on full alert to avoid any surprise. Karameel opened the door and welcomed Logan inside.


    Logan with fully activated EMS went in and found Mercphobia seating alone in the garden watching the sunlight.


    Mercphobia turned to Logan and started to get up from his seat when suddenly the Karameel which have lead Logan in turned into water and trapped Logan. Mercphobia seeing his plan be successful rushed to deliver the killing blow in one go using his full power to do an energy blast. Logan already transported himself to another dimension using Kamui while also launching chains onto Mercphobia.


    Mercphobia turned into his dragon form of the sea serpent, Golden circles covered his entire body as he was about to release of energy blast. Chains rolled around its entire body while piercing its tail with many weapons. Logan appeared onto of its head from the water bubble and tried to penetrate the head but it was too slippery, Using Devil''s lover and God slayer magic of lighting element in full power Logan punched the top of the head making dragon wealing in pain while smashing its head into pieces. Leading the Black matter into the brain which did the same as before and took control over the body.


    The body of the dragon was dragged into his dimension using the Chains, he could see the people of the village rushing up to him so Logan simply disappeared from the sport using Kamui leaving him with the last dragon Ignia which could give him flames to burn down the world.


    Logan was in no hurry the guild master has dissolved the guild about 2 months ago while leaving his crystal to Laxus to take off. With about 8 months left, Logan in his dimension started to absorb all the powers of the dragon giving him 4 elemental dragon slayer magic, he has seen all the dragon slayers fight and knew about the basic techniques and such living in a quiet home he practiced everything for 4 months and then decided to move onto the last so-called god.


    Ignia was special not only due to the nature of his flames but also his nature. While the other 4 were not of fighting nature and were simply living the life their way, Ignia was an angry immature brat who destroyed town cities as he wished, no one opposed him or try to take him on making him more arrogant and out of control. He was intelligent to a degree but most of the time underestimated his opponents in his arrogance.


    Logan planned to take the fight with Ignia as a practice for his dragon slayer magic.


    With the plan and all preparation done Logan moved to the decimated town in which Ignia lived. He let loose some of his magic to let Ignia know about his presence.


    Ignia sensing a strong being coming toward his got all fired up and start to fly. Logan used the power of the wooden dragon and cleaned out the entire area for their fight while also bringing the water underneath on the surface. He chose night time to fight with Ignia to maximize the power outlet of Moon dragon god which depended on the moon and the stars.


    Using his complete power, Logan started with a dragon breath covering the entire sky in golden color flames, Ignia also used dragon breath and overpowered Logan. Logan rushed to Ignia while using his EMS and appeared on its head and rooted a punch onto Ignia''s head using Dragon''s crushing fangs with the element of all 4 dragons mixed in.


    Logan giving no time to Ignia used his water dragon god power and used Dragon''s roar with the fullest power directly onto the head of Ignia, Ignia fell from the sky to the ground using his of Wooden dragon god and experience using wooden elements from the Naruto world created wooden dragon similar to first Hokage Jutsu which bit into Various parts of Ignia like his stomach while Logan powered up his Dragon''s Roar with moon gods power and throw it onto the head of Ignia who got buried into the ground without the chance to fight back.


    Ignia in anger broke off all the wooden dragons on its body and flew off into the sky while spitting into fire everywhere, Concentrating all his power into the pawn and punched Logan, Logan too charged up his hand using Dragon''s Iron fist punched back with the power of 4 elements combining turning his hand into light red-purple while a white color light cover. Both punches collide throwing both of them back.


    Logan recovered first and molded all 4 elements into Dragon god''s Element Ball and throw it onto Ignia.


    Ignia also recovered and saw a huge ball coming toward him and used his transformation magic and turned into Human and avoided the ball, Logan used Kamui and Appeared on the other side of the ball Holding the ball with both his hands and implanted it into Ignia which coved its entire body. Throwing him away miles away.


    With everything that happened to his Ignia in his peak anger Roar fire destroying miles and miles of lands, Logan ran toward Ignia avoiding the ray of fire. Logan decided to use a little bit of God slayer magic Compressing both his hands and used Lightning God''s Charged Particle Cannon, A dark pulse cannon passed through destroying the ray of fire from Ignia piercing its arm from the shoulder making it disabled it. Logan reached Ignia condensation a ball of water energy and shouted it into the shoulder injury. Ignia wailed in pain screamed and got thrown away.


    Logan decided that the fight was enough, used chains which embedded into different parts of Ignia. Logan let the black matter from his arm covering it entirely while forming a Blade on it.


    Logan used the blade onto Ignia lifting him in the air who was coved in chains even the mouth not giving any opportunity for attack. Started absorbing Ignia powers. Slowly the resistance from Ignia die down but chains still covered him entirely Logan not taking any risks waited for all the power to be absorbed. With only life force remaining Logan removed the chains from the mouth of Ignia.


    Ignia with lifeless expression with no power even to stand lifted in the air via chains stood there, Logan smiled and started absorbing the life force out of Ignia who just stood hanged there without moving even a bit, he body got skinner and skinner his eyes lost all colors. Logan said in a low voice: Don''t worry tell you, papa, I will be sending his other son Natsu soon to join you too.


    And absorbed the last of life force completely.

 Chapter 38 - August

    Completing his goal of absorbing the 5 dragon gods, Logan to visit August, and observe one of the most underrated magic according to him up close personally, Copy Magic.


    Logan''s understanding was lacking from what he has seen in the via satellite thus he wanted to go personally. With around 7 months or so left before Natsu coming back from his training and get the guild back together. Logan decided to visit the Guild Master of the first guild first and then go to August.


    His goal for visiting the first Guild master Elefseria of Magic Dragon was the reward which was promised for completing the 100-year quest. One thing in the world they desire, Logan was very suspicious about the wording but with full caution entered the Guild.


    A dragon came forth and greeted him, Logan just stood still introduced himself as a member of fairy tail here to take up the 100 years quest, hearing this the dragon changed into a human form and presented a magical contract to Logan stating that he won''t be allowed to reveal the details of the quest nor will he Elefseria be responsible for his death.


    Logan using his experience from the harry potter world used his Sharingan to make sure there was no hidden clause within the contract, seeing no funny business going on Logan before entering the contract asked about the reward to which the old man creepingly smiled and said anyone thing he desires in the world. Finding it weird and suspicious Logan pressed on to the issue and asked the Old man Elefseria to clarify.


    Elefseria simply smiled and said that they will talk about the reward when he completes the quest. Logan finding the behavior of Elefseria more suspicious and thus said that he will not take the quest if the reward is not specified and tell everyone else too that the reward for the 100-year quest is a scam. Feeling frustrated with Logan, Elefseria takes away the contract from him and tells him to leave.


    Logan activated his EMS and starts walking away when suddenly a tail directly passes through his stomach but due to Logan having Kamui the tail simply pass through Logan, Logan turns around and is greeted by Dragon''s Roar with the power density of only half of which Ignia have used in their fight, Logan simply rushed and avoiding the beam of roar punches Elefseria throat who was in his dragon form, Elefseira breaking the wall of the guild falls on the ground outside.


    Golden circles open around him and chain comes out piercing various places around his body, Logan taking the gunbai from his back comes on top of Elefseria who was chained to the ground and put his Gunbai on his throat.


    Logan: Tell me, Guild master why should I leave you alive? How about we start with his mission huh? What''s your real goal?


    Elefseria wailing in pain and having no capacity to move at all answered: I... I published the mission of traping the magic energy of 5 dragon gods and wanted to use this magic energy to break free from the shackles of this world and become a true Dragon god. I have a device which would let me trap and then absorb the magic of dragons but I wasn''t powerful enough to defeat any of them and by the time I self-taught myself dragon slayer magic to myself Acnologia defeated the rest of the dragons only leaving 5 who were just as powerful as him leaving me no choice so I created this guild the first guild to defeat those 5 dragons who were bit less stronger then Acnologia and absorbing their powers then go to absorb Acnologia becoming the last dragon, a true dragon god. But all the guild members died in one go against the water god. I alone managed to run away with my life. So I created this quest seeking powerful people who could bring me the magic energy of those dragons. But no one has succeeded yet 97 people died while one came back alive with one leg and arm missing.


    Logan smiled a bit and asked: I see, tell me about this reward, If I detect a lie I will kill you.


    Elefseria fearfully: There is no reward, after absorbing the magic I was planning on killing the person.


    Logan smiled and the chains around Elefseria''s body started absorbing his magic and life force. Elefseria screamed in pain but the chains got tighter and tighter. around his body. Leaving little life force so that


    Elefseria can live for 9 more months or so. Logan removed chains around his body while letting the black matter absorb the ball traping ball and other magic devices which Elefseria have collected letting hope analysis them through.


    Done with the first task and about 7 months left, Logan moved toward August who was ordering around the other Spriggan 12 cleaning out the guilds who stood against the empire, The thing about August was that he never went to fight on his own thus making it difficult for Logan to analysis the copy magic in full use. Logan using EMS''s Kamui simply avoided everyone and went directly to August who was sitting on the balcony.


    Logan goes up and punches August implanting some of the nanotech inside him while disappearing the next second, giving no opportunity to August to even know who did the deed.


    The nanotech would observe everything which August does and will make it easier for him to understand his magic completely.


    Logan done with his goals went back to the old man''s house which he reconstructed with Arc of embodiment and prepared for the war again the lesser god Ankhseram. While observing all the key players within the fairy tail and Zeref and August via nanotech in implanted in them.


    Logan found Zeref when the S rank competitions were going on, he knew Zeref''s cure will affect everything other than Natsu who had his scarf protecting him, knowing this Logan waited for the moment Natsu punched Zeref during the test letting the some of the nanotech Logan and left in Natsu transfer on to Zeref who simply took on the punch head-on.


    With 5 months left for the reformation of the guild, and all the preparations are done, Logan simple observed and waited for the moment.

 Chapter 39 - Cursed of the legend.

    In a far far away galaxy there existed the home of Humanity, With the development and innovation Human race moved one step closer to the evolution of the race.


    In this Munduan world was a boy addicted in every sense to a life of Bookworm, he read everything which he got his hands-on. His life was full of peace and laughter. Moral concepts like love, hate were foreign to him. In his journey of addiction, he found a particular website by the name of s he instantly read the top 120 or so more Power stones ranked fanfiction of that time slowly spending more than half a year on the site. It wasn''t untiled on one fateful day after reading Legacy (Naruto fanfiction) by cr4zypt that he decided to write a fanfiction based on some of his ideas but one of his friends who was also a vivid reader of the site advised his against it stating that the site is cursed, even stating that as much as 90% of the authors after publishing their novel get involved in some bad incident, some get sick, their family member gets sick or even going as far as their computer gets destroyed.


    Ignoring his friend''s advice, the young boy in his dream of sharing his ideas with the world starts writing the novel publishing one chapter a day.


    Everything remains the same and normal in the author''s life filled with peace and happiness when he suddenly finds out that his ex who was the only girl he ever truly loved is now dating his cousin and things between them have envolved to the level where they both are going to move together. Filled with disappointment and loneliness the boy leaves everything and finally understands the cursed of the .


    After staying 5 days in another city have going on a date with a girl he found on tinder, the boy filling bored and alone started reading the comments of the people in his novel in-depth and starts formulating a plan.


    While going through the comments, the boy stumbles upon one of his comments.


    "Sorry friend but This is not a story of a hero, sometimes it''s way darker than Black " - Chapter 10


    Reading this his still lips turns into a smile.

 Chapter 40 - Start of the war

    Logan 3 months before the return of Natsu went back into his crystal pretending to wake up, Laxus along with his thunder trio traveled around, Laxus carried the crystal with him everywhere. The crystal was indestructible as it was made out black matter which would always heal itself if ever attacked. Logan was at the beginning was left in the castle but when Fairy tail was dissolved, Makarov with the permission of the king gave the crystal to Laxus stating that they should care for one of their own.


    One day Laxus along with his companion were traveling when the crystal on his back started cracking a white light came out of it and within the light, the crystal changed into the shape of a human body Logan using Kamui had already entered the black matter reabsorbed it back into his body.


    With a complete white mask covering all the hair and face till neck wearing a blue color shirt and black pants with black sports shoes, towering 6''1 Logan stood in front of Laxus and the trio who have moved away. Logan slowly opened his eyes which were revolving from a single red eye came small black marks increasing from 1 to three before the eyes going completely black then changing into beautiful sunflower pattern a huge red dot in the middle and black flower left patterns scattered around it with red lines dividing and giving a pattern of flower Patel.


    Logan saw the four people in front of him stunt slowly in a low voice asked: Where is your grandfather? Were you trying to steal me?


    Laxus recovering from the shock replied: No grandpa discontinued the guild, Everyone has gone their way.


    Logan smiled and summoned a poach using Arc of embodiment and throw it at Laxus who caught it: Here some money for all your trouble. Tell the old man I will come back when I see there is a need for me to come.


    Logan using Kamui disappeared for his place back to the guild where a broken down Guild was. Ignoring everything Logan simply walked into the hidden underground where Fairy heart was stored.


    Seeing the fairy heart Logan walked straight up to it and touched it absorbing the huge magic energy residing in it when a voice came from behind him: Who are you? What are you doing here? How do you know about the Fairy heart?


    Logan didn''t turn around but a golden circle opened and a black colored chains bound the person speaking while slowly releasing his magical reverse which he always keep hidden. Mavis looked frightened as she couldn''t estimate the limit of the magical reverse of the person who was standing in front of her. Zeref or Archnologia in front of this person looked like little children. Logan slowly extended him hand inside the Lacrima touched Mavis''s body and started absorbed what was described as Infinite magic but was less than the 5 dragon god magic which Logan had already absorbed, after absorbing about 95% of the magic energy leaving only 5% for Zeref but then he saw that the magic energy was starting to be reabsorbed from the surrounding into Mavis physical body. At first Logan through about take away the crystal for himself but then he didn''t want to derail the entire plotline so decided to leave the crystal and moved back a little to watch and estimate how much magic power will be reabsorbed by the Mavis''s body by the time of the war after 2 hours of analysis with Hope, he concluded that the Fairy heart will be about 30% of its formal power at the time Zeref takes the power. Feeling satisfied with the result, Logan started to move out while planning his next step. Now all he need was the Zeref to hand over the key to the concept of space between time. Done with his task he looked back at Mavis who was struggling in the chains heavily breathing. Logan said in a low voice: Don''t worry little one I won''t wrong you and your family. You have people who cherish you soon the time for your return into the world of the living will come.


    Logan disappeared from there using Kamui along with chains that went back into the golden circle.


    Soon 3 month time passed away, the grand Magic festival hype passed through the entire continent meanwhile Logan went around everywhere and read through all the books as such regarding resurrection mainly but not limited to it, different ancient types of magic and such, he didn''t research anything but simply uploaded all the information onto hope, as according to what he knew and have observed Anyone who challenge the boundary between life and death brought themselves the attention of Ankhseram onto them which Logan didn''t want that''s why he simply collected all the information without processing or analysis it yet. He wanted to absorb Acnologia and magic in space between time first before finally targeting lesser god.


    Logan observing the main members through nanotech saw Natsu returning and melting the stadium of the Grand Magic festival. Soon with Lucy and happy Natsu embarked on to reform the guild. Continuing his work of collecting the books and information about Ancient magics, lost magics and laws on which Fairy laws were created and were the reason for Mavis suffering Ankhseram wrath.


    Soon Makarov was recovered and the guild was reformed with the declaration of war from both sides. Members getting back and allies joining in with Fairy tail while Zeref returning to his empire and declaring the preparation of war ordering all 12 members to launch the attack.


    Mavis who knew Logan or more like guessed is going to interfere in the war prepared the stagey with minimum casualties. While Zeref paid Achnologia a visit inviting him to the dragon festival.


    Logan patiently watched everything, his preparations were complete with the infusion of 5 most powerful magic - Dragon God slayer which he created using dragon slayer magic and experience from the fight with Ignia, God slayer magic which he learned and upgraded from watching 4 different types of god slayer magic, Devil''s lover which gave him an element less state due to which he could disregard any kind of defense used to stop his attack, Ace of Embodiment which could create anything he can imagine with the limitations of items which are prohibited by the laws of the world such as living being and lastly Copy magic which in addition to Sharingan and arc of embodiment removing all limitations regarding copying and nullifying all kind of attacks unlike August who was limited by the use of external items.


    Logan also recreated his nanotech and weapons using Adamantium-Vibranium alloy which was said to be the strongest and most durable metal in Marvel universe where cosmic entity existed in preparation of the fight. His weapon of choice was his Gunbai from naruto world due to his years of experience using it while wearing a simple T-shirt and pants made out of the black matter from the Harry Potter world.


    Due to the task list which the old lady gave to him in Hotel de Luna, he knew lesser gods can''t directly enter the world in physical form thus, He wasn''t very afraid while doing the task, he had also met death thus knew that Ankhseram didn''t have complete control over the laws of death and can''t directly kill him using them thus giving him a chance to fight.


    The war started soon, the dragon queen using her magic displaced everyone disturbing the entire plan which Fairy tail and the allies made in the meantime seeing her plan derailed Mavis who wasn''t sure when Logan would interfere and was captured by the Dragon queen who was preparing to use magic to take out the magic storied in Mavis body, using her illusion trick Mavis ran away leaving an angry Dragon queen who used her magical power to power up her entire army, making things difficult for everyone in the alliance.


    Logan seeing Makarov preparing to use Fairy Law decided to join in.


    Makarov seeing that the enemy forces have received a power-up decided to use Fairy law as a last mean to take down the enemy with him he joined hands started channeling the energy but suddenly 2 golden circles opened up near his feet, chains came out and wrapped around his arms sealing the magic in his arms and every part of the body the chains moved to.


    Millions of Holes opened in the sky, Chains falling from them, piercing all the footsoldiers throughout the battlefield while taking all the alliance force together and gathering them in one place and throwing the 12 Spriggan other than the dragon queen which was already with Zeref at Fairy tail HQ. Everyone whether they were with the alliance or Zeref tried their best to break free but failed. Chains throw them all onto the ground and went back into the sky in golden circles. Confusing everyone


    Logan calmly stepped out of his dimension wearing black shoes, white color mask which had Sharingan symbol on it made out of Arc of embodiment, while in cloths black pants and t-shirt made out Black matter in front of the Makarov who was standing in the front of the force of the alliance still chained, Logan slowly in a low voice but still audible to everyone in the alliance sending a chill to everyone: Do you wish to die old men? As far as I can remember I didn''t permit you to do that.


    Logan turned around looked at now standing Spriggan with Zeref in front of everyone and this time in a cold voice said: Mr. Dark Wizard Are you ready to dance?

 Chapter 41 - Arrogance of a God..

    Without waiting for anyone to recover or response Logan started running toward Zeref and the Spriggans, after taking 3 steps he simply disappeared and out of nowhere appeared again in the sky holding the throat of Arcnologia.


    Logan throws down Arcnologia down from the sky in front of Zeref and landed on the ground and release 30% of his magic pressure using gravity magic of Bluenote stinger pressing everyone whether they were with the alliance or Zeref to the ground only leaving Arcnologia and Mavis standing. Zeref too kneed on the ground along with August.


    Arcnologia quickly recovered and used his super-speed to rip out Logan but Logan took out his Gunbai from behind and deflected the attack while pushing Archnologia back onto the ground.


    Mavis just stood there supporting herself as she knew this was not the complete power of Logan. Logan started laughing loudly and said: Little dragon sit down for a moment I will come to you.


    Logan turned his gaze onto Zeref: I was sent to this world to Hunt down three people- The self-proclaimed Dragon King Acnologia, The dark wizard Zeref Dragneel and the fairy Heart Mavis Vermillion. We will first start with the little dragon king.


    Saying these 3 Huge circles opened in the sky, and the cries of the dragons came out of them, One with the size of more than entire Magnolia Town before the Dragon queen Irene used Universe one magic to relocated everyone and expand the entire continent size. 2 more dragons followed the big dragon both having a different body type.


    Arcnologia seeing the dragon turned into a dragon too and rushed toward the large dragon to take the size advantage to go into the blind spot of Earth dragon god but as he reached closer chains upon chains came out of the earth dragon gods body piercing the wings of Arcnologia who Screamed in pain but before giving him any time to recover 2 dragon roar from each side came and ripped his wings completely while also taking his left arm by simply taking out the shoulder through which the arm was attached to the body. Arcnologia with his experience with dragons knew that the three dragons in front of him were just a bit less powerful than him so he decided to retrieve recovery and then Take then down individual down using his experience of fighting millions of dragons in his lifetime.


    Logan wanted to finish Arcnologia first to complete focus on his fight with Ankhseram thus joined the battle himself charging the fire dragon god power in his arms he appeared on top of the right shoulder of Arcnologia and used Dragon roar burning down the entire arm of Arcnologia while also Binding now fallen Arcnologia onto the ground using black chains made out of Arc of embodiment empowered by Devil''s lover. Logan using Kamui appeared the screaming Arcnologia head and embedded his entire arm which was wrapped in black matter into his head, Filling the head of Arcnologia, destroying the part of brain which was under the control and made decisions and replacing it with black matter directly under the control of Hope thus giving direct control whole of Arcnologia but Arcnologia had the power of various dragon one of which was of a light dragon which could heal itself, Arcnologia without even commanding unconsciously started recovering his destroyed matter. But Hope not giving any opportunity to Arcnologia magic uploaded his consciousness onto the world seed thus making his body nothing more than a meatless suit under the control of Hope.


    Completing his process of control over Arcnologia, Logan took out his hand and started using his hands to reattached parts of Arcnologia which he had destroyed earlier. with his right arm made out of chains.


    Logan got of Arcnologia''s head and stepped back in a distance, the chains around Arcnologia''s body started going back into the ground while come entering into his body. Arms and wings recovered Arcnologia slowly got up releasing his complete magic power and roar. The three other Dragons in the sky also Roared along while flying in the sky. Arcnologia looked at the members of both Zeref forces and alliances who were all lying on the ground with only their head a bit up watching everything with their mouth open once again roared then flew up in the sky in which a huge black door opened up. Arcnologia directly went into the hole and disappeared along with the three other dragon gods which did the same.


    Logan calmly watched everything before turning his gaze back onto Zeref and said: One down two to go.


    He started walking toward the forces of both Enemy and alliance who all watched him with nothing but fear and dread in their eyes as they have just watched the strongest being in their world brought down. Logan slowly started removing his mask. Long Black hair reaching his shoulder fell followed by a face with was completely white and carved as if it was made by gods themselves along with 2 expressionless Black colored eyes that started revolving into and changing into red color and taking on the usual pattern. Golden circles opened near Zeref and bound all the members of 12 Spriggans.


    Logan throwing the mask back into his dimension said in a cold voice while looking at Zeref: I hunt the ruler of this world life and death law God Ankhseram I want the key of Space between the time you hold, if you give it to me I will remove your and Mavis curse letting you pass on without the end of the world. If you refuse then I might have to do something you might not like.


    Zeref who was kneeling calmly analyzed the situation he knew from watching what happened to Arcnologia that winning in this situation is not possible neither will he be able to use Fairy heart so decided to give up the key which he bound the space between the time with but just as he lifted his hand to give the key over the law his body stopped working, his body without his control slowly stood up magic energy started overflowing in it, a ball of energy suddenly came out of it his arm pushing it onto Logan.


    Logan in response stopped walking and deflected the attack using Gunbai on his back and pushed Zeref back but Zeref didn''t move but used his raw power to push back Logan who fell back falling into the ground rolling.


    Logan recovered and with a grim on his face asked: Am I talking to Zeref the dark wizard right now or the God Ankhseram right now?


    Without waiting for the answered Logan putting his Gunbai back on his back rushed to Zeref, meanwhile a black hole opened under all 12 Spriggan and alliance force consuming them as they were already lying on the ground.


    Natsu and the rest of the people found themself surrounded by 4 dragons who didn''t even look at them but were looking at a huge panel on which Logan was barehanded fighting Zeref with Gunbai on his back, earth getting destroyed with both person countering the attack of others, Logan with silver colors mix god dragon magic in both arms fighting Zeref who covered both his hand with black magic.


    Logan didn''t want Ankhseram to get used to controlling Zeref''s body used his chains to capture Zeref but Zeref simply using black magic broke the chains thus Logan used God slayer magic to counter the Zeref leaving him less opportunity to deflect the chains. Some chains managed to manage to hold onto the legs of Zeref using which as an opportunity more and more chains started attaching itself to Zeref absorbing his magic. Giving a moment to gain control over his body in which Zeref stood on Logan''s expectations and passed him the control over the lock implanted on the space between time.


    Finally getting the last key of the puzzle and not caring about Innocent life as he has already sent everyone on the kingdom in his dimension released his complete power of the 1 god tree out of 3 which was the limitation and the magic energy he obtained after absorbing the dragon gods.


    With the dimension, a chain came from the sky taking Mavis into the sky while 4 dragons moved to Mavis and started passing their magic energy onto her which was being absorbed by the chain which was holding her thus making it a power source for Logan to recharge if he fell low of energy at any time.


    Logan focusing his complete magic onto Devil''s lover which was formed and was the source of One magic itself that ruled over this world to burn down the body of Zeref itself bringing the spirit form of Ankhseram into being.


    Logan not giving any opportunity or waiting opened thousands of golden circles which surrounded every point possible around the Burning body of Zeref through which black-colored chains in which Logan through his hand passed Devil''s lover magic derived from One magic started piercing the complete body of the burning Zeref, A pulse of Black magic came out of the Zeref deflecting all the upcoming chains but due to a large number of chains, chains after moved to deflect resumed their course, the Spirit form came out rushing but before it could do anything was completely covered in chains. More and more circles opened up chains upon chains completely black in color covered the entire area, even the ground below was destroyed completely, all the building and everything with the kingdom of Fiore was already destroyed and turned to dust. Chains grinding against each other slowly absorbing the magic present withing the spirit form Ankhseram had, slowly absorbing magic which amounted to the power of a god tree was dawned into the soul of Logan into Kurama dimension which contained the power of 3 god trees already. The circular ball of chain hanged in the air 100 feet above the ground.


    After absorbing all the powers, thousands of black lines came out of chains all falling in earth connecting to various parts. Logan understanding that this was the connecting which Ankhseram used to come into being combined his god slayer magic along with Devil''s lover magic into his gunbai and cut them all thus removing all the influence Ankhseram had in the world, the space above his ball of chains cracked itself showing nothing but a hallow empty dark space and sucked the spirit form of Ankhseram automatically making chains which were binding it lose and onto the ground.


    The live feed panel in front of all closed, the dragons roared and moved back into the darkness meanwhile Mavis kept hanging in the air through a chain. Letting the rest of the people present freely move.


    In the meantime outside the space in front of Logan cracked but this time instead of one-two space opened up. a deep ancient voice came out of one of the space: I''m what you can call the true Dragon god, unlike my foolish Desenceds who proclaimed themself god without even knowing their origin. This world was created by one of my fellow friends Alastor and to bless it I sent some of my descendants into it to act as a guide for the people here but over time everything changed, their children fought among themselves which lead us to today. I Garyx, the god of Dragons would like to give you a task to remove all the dragon influence from the world which is left behind. As per your usual reward, I would give you a wish.


    Space through which Garyx spoke closed itself, Logan who was kneeling didn''t say anything but waited for the 2nd crack to speak.


    A voice came out of 2nd crack: I am Alastor the creator and god who blessed the world with Magic driven from One magic. I was the one who put the task to you, the collector made by the higher god. Tell me what you wish.


    Logan: Lord I would like to carry forth Arc of Embodiment with me in my journey.


    Alastor: Granted. What''s your second wish which you would like to carry with you to the next world?


    Logan: Lord I would like to carry forth Copy magic with me.


    Alastor: Hahahaha, Little brat you would be invincible with both of this. Your next world will become a joke and nothing more.


    Logan: Lord pardon me but as you have said I am but a simple collector, power was never my goal, to begin with.


    Alastor: Yes yes just a simple collector.... Okay fine I will grant you this wish too but you would have to complete this specific task for me.


    Logan: Lord, kindly instruct your kind follower.


    Alastor: I have looked through your life, I want you to use the same means as you did in the world of Naruto, but this time instead of chakra you will be removing Magic. Make a god tree using Arc of embodiment and Devil''s lover magic of yours and remove my blessing of magic from this world. I see the fate of my friend Garyx, descendants have come to this decision. Do this and I will grant you your wish. I will allow you to use your complete eye power in doing this task.


    Logan: As your instructions my lord.


    Space fixed itself again leaving Logan who was kneeling behind.


    Logan put his Gunbai back onto his back brought everyone back out of his dimension. Millions of people all trapped in golden chains appeared in front of him with Mavis to felling from the sky hanging by the chain.


    Logan seeing this moved toward the body of burnt Zeref and started healing it and bringing Zeref back into being in the state of when he was not under the direct influence of Ankhseram or his magic when he was just a little child of around the age of 5 using the magic of time from the rift which was in space between the time. After recovering Zeref into his state, He moved onto Mavis who along with the rest of the guild members were standing in front of Millions of people. He without wasting time appeared in front of Mavis and started moving time backward onto her, making her child of 5 years too and finally doing the same onto August who was watching everything from the sidelines. Putting all 3 members of the family together on a comfy bed. Logan took up the form of Susano and spoke in a loud voice: My Name is Kai, I was sent here to remove the influence of dark arts from this world, which I have done, Now Magic will slowly remove from this world and everyone. I was told to guide the world through the new era the civilization would go through. Kindly select someone among yourself as the leader of Humanity. I will come back after 6 months to talk to the person who has been selected. Logan in his Susanoo form raised both his hands, Houses roads trees started coming out of the ground restoring the town''s cities which were destroyed.


    Logan looked at the family of three sleeping peaceful on the bed and then at Makarov one more time and said: I have fulfilled my promise to Zeref and Mavis rest is up to you.


    And simply disappeared.

 Chapter 42 - Modern Times

    6 months quickly passed by a council was formed out of the present top ten saint wizards along with the king and the Guild Leader of all the guild. Makarov along with 3 more members was decided as the speaker for Humanity in that continent which Logan has asked for. Meanwhile, 12 Spriggan also returned to their kingdom, Dragon Queen Irene along with God Serena both disappeared at the same time when Logan had disappeared thus leaving the rest of the member of option to retrieve back into the kingdom while also establishing diplomatic contact with Fiore sending 2 members of the Spriggan as representative from their side.


    Logan first started with Killing both Irene and God Serena then went on to hunt down the rest of the dragon slayers he left the 4 dragon slayers in fairy tail while simpy killing the rest of the dragon slayers, some simply disappeared while they were on a job some simply dropped dead suddenly due to Logan using the nanotech present in their body to cause destroy their heart or brain.


    Logan went to the continent were the 5 dragon gods were hiding and Planned the seed as per the instructions of the god. Nourishing it with Devil''s lover magic thus letting it grow faster. Within 4 months it was ready to be used covering over 2/3 of the continent destroying the livelihood of over millions of people by taking over their lands and such in the process. He also in the meantime started researching about the resurrection which he earlier simply collect information about. Magic from his source which was created out of love was able to provide endless possibilities which included the chance of Ressurection, this fact was the conclusion which Logan after his research came to be, Magic can be used to do so but the soul which could be brought back would most likely be corrupt or impure in some nature this was due to the restriction which Lesser gods have implanted into the moral world in fear of them raising against them. Logan concluding his research started playing with world seed and the consciousness of the Ninja''s in have uploaded from the Naruto world. Using the arc of Embodiment and devil''s lover magic directly Logan was able to create an artificial body for the people inside the world seed. The basic concept behind the idea was that if a soul in the form of conciseness can be transferred into the world seed then why can''t the other way also happen.


    With extream research, Logan cracked the code of artificial resurrection due to Devil''s lover magic. With the option to use the artificial army for himself, Logan completed everything he had in this world.


    With everything ready, Logan went back to meet the selected members He introduced a democracy education system and other basic needs to form a country, In the night time, he went out and hunted 4 fairy tail dragon slayer removing even their bodies leaving no prove whatsoever. When Makarov asked him about them he told them the time is correcting itself thus taking all the dragon slayers which were brought forward in time by the dragons at that time. Explaining it via saying laws are correcting themself. Makarov knowing something about laws from Mavis knew they can''t be changed or challenged thus, he just concealed his worries.


    Logan instructed had established the system in place while becoming the first leader and made all the important decisions. Logan in the meantime on one night used his Rinne-Sharingan and activated God: Nativity of a world of Trees version using the wooden dragon god power.


    The tree-covered all the entire world withing a night and sucked all the magic from all the beings humans or creature, Creature such as Happy and Carla turned back into simple cats but with high intelligence while large creature in the sea also turned into simple whales and such those which were not compatible with the nature were completely sucked in. The whole process took about 2 weeks in which the entire world was in the god tree.


    Logan completing his task asked for the permission to carry forth his Devil''s lover magic from the dragon god, who granted his wish while also gifting the purest form of his dragon bloodline to him which would be available to him in each world when he reaches the age of 4 along with the black matter in a similar format of a coin appearing in his pocket.


    Alastor also granted his request of letting copy magic go along with him thus granting his wish.


    With all the tasks complete, Logan focused on the development of Humanity using his basic knowledge and avoiding any factors such as war hunger and such the society developed faster. within 80 years he developed the society by 200 years or so bringing the technology of SAO as common technology into the world. Computers were released and the foundation was formed. Logan released the world seed into the world and decided to leave the world behind. Moving the God tree into his dimension of Kumai which he got permission to consume.


    Logan took out the ticket from his pocket and used it. The space in front of him cracked and consumed him.


    Logan appeared in front of a young man who was talking with a young girl not paying attention to him, Logan smiled and politely knocked on the table. The young man quickly got up from his table and greeted him meanwhile the young girls looked at him as if he committed the most horrible sin their was or something. The young man told Logan that the manager is out right now and will be back soon till then Logan is free to use the faculties of the Hotel. Logan quietly went back to his room to return to Naruto''s world. In place of 3 beds like previous 4 were present this time, Logan slept in one of the beds and logged onto the world seed decided to visit the shinobi he has left out to study on there own.


    In the world tree seed, everything was free and available to everyone thus dissolving any chance of fight among everyone. Logan saw that 2860 people he has left have divided themselves into various groups with each group forming their leader made by voting and such studying the subjects they deemed to be interesting. Some adopted to work alone while some formed groups with their clanmates and formed a group within the clan or village itself. They have already learned more than the Basic knowledge and developed more than the SAO world. SAO along with many other games were also available to the shinobis, some chose to play which some chose to learn. Logan has placed universal AI in the form of little fairies that stay with every individual and solve any problem they might have while doing their business. Soon over time clans, villages and other concepts were dissolved everyone knew themselves and the people thus focused on learning themself rather than conspire with people. Love, marriage, family, power, status such concepts were dissolved. People who liked the other person company stayed together while rest minded there own business. S.e.x was not physical desire in any form, those who wanted to do it did it either with an Ai created in the form of NPC or with someone from the Shinobi force in who they were interested in.


    Logan went around the world to meet every individual, he also circulated the information regarding those who want to join him in the next world and all the basic knowledge regarding it. Around 200 members decided to stay behind as they wanted to continue their studies while the rest wanted to explore the new world. Making a deal with the Shinobi''s Logan decided to go visit Arcologia who''s consciousness Hope have uploaded in world seed and put forth into hellish brainwash world were using the concept of Infinite Tsukuyomi of his Rinne-Sharingan created a dream type of time difference were such that in the outside world one second would be equal to 1000 hours in the dream world. By the time Logan visited Arcnologia, more than a Hundred and thousand of years had already passed by breaking everything Arcnologia had with putting just one thought into him, Loyalty to Logan. Logan seeing this didn''t stop the brainwash but simply added a knowledge gaining portion about everything making Arcnologia his perfect puppet. Logan learning the Time discussion started thinking about the other possibilities which this can be used in and also told Shinobi''s to learn everything they can about genetics as it would be very useful in the future.


    Completing his goal in the World seed in logged off and notice both the character of IU and the old lady waiting for him. Logan nodded at both of them. The old lady started speaking first: Are you planning on going back to the Naruto world for that god tree?


    Logan nodded and slept again, his soul transfer to the body of Naruto without wasting time Naruto while lying in the bed itself formed seals and created a single massive seal with 3 layers, one was made to hold the power of at least 21 God tree which Hope made while 2 other layer one giving total control to Kurama over the god trees and another making it impossible for anyone to steal energy of the god trees without his and Kurama permission. Doing so he stabilize the overflow of energy which he absorbed from Ankhseram spirit form which was equal to a Single God tree, after sealing the energy he absorbed another god tree which was in his dimension making the total god tree under his 5.


    Completing his task he went back to the room again. The old lady in a very serious tone said: Your deeds have come to the notice of many gods now, some will come after you for entertainment while some might just come to push to your death. The next world you''re going to Is, in essence, flowing through Heavenly energy. the devil fruit, in particular, is made out of the energy and when a person consumes them the heavenly energy gets attached to their soul thus changing their soul essence and giving them special specific power. Your soul is special as it contains countless worlds in which there are countless souls thus you can consume countless fruits. Your task along with removing the Spirit form of the lesser god is also to remove the heavenly energy which has already been released in the world and to do that a special god tree seed will be given to you when as originally planned you close the rift in space. As Heavenly entity, you will be fighting in using Heavenly energy you are granted the eyes power ranging from that of your Sharingan up to basic Rinnegan level while granting Rinne Sharingan after you close the rift and remove the spirit. Usually, the amount of energy you can draw would be limited to the amount you can draw from Kurama which in this case would depend on your Willpower but due to world law already in the broken state I can''t identify the amount of energy you can use. The lesser god this time is more powerful than then fairy tail world as he has stronger control over the use of Heavenly energy around him. The God who gave you this task is very worried over it the reward would be very special if you can complete the task or so I have been told. Beware of one thing Power alone is not the identity of a man but simply a symbol. The last thing is that you can''t be born as Celestial Dragon as they are under the direct influence of the lesser god thus if you''re born as one of them than you will become a puppet before even gaining a chance to do anything.


    Logan after analysis the entire situation knew that the world ticket won''t be easy for this world, worried about the amount of magic he could draw, filled with excitement, dread, and plans Logan laid on the bed again and said: World: One Piece, Born as a twin older brother of Portgas D. Ace with power of Voice of all things.

 Chapter 43 - Son of a King Part. I

    The first thing Logan felt was the feeling of being released from a tube of some kind when he was born, Logan has long decided to not interfere with the current timeline of the story bringing less heat onto himself gave complete control to his bodily functions to Hope while logging onto world seed for some time on his own. He used time delusion of Infinite Tsukuyomi onto himself within his world and started his research in various fields but mainly in human genetics. After a million years or so in the world seed when outside, Logan turned 4 decided to take things in charge and told Hope to piece together his life story so far.


    His name in this life was Portgas D. Leo, older brother of Ace, Leo was a loner person who only came in front of people when his brother was in some kind of trouble. Hope mostly kept Leo''s body in the personal dimension and watched Ace make sure about his safety and did nothing else.


    Logan took over his identity as Leo. He first started channeling the magic energy which came straight like a beam into him without interpretation giving him complete access to Kuram without limit, unlike the previous world. Using the arc of embodiment Logan created his favorite nanotech which flew in his bloodline taking over his body. Logan then pulled 2 coins from his pocket one completely black in color while another simply transparent. Both of which got absorbed in his body giving him unbearable pain rendering him unmovable for 2 weeks or so.


    In the meantime, Curly Dadan and the Dadan Family whom Leo stayed with searched everywhere for him but were unable to find him. Making them decide that Leo is either dead or have run away.


    Leo in the meantime without any scream or anything took all the pain which came onto him. slowly started to feel his body structure change his blood felt as if lava have replaced it while his muscles and skins turned black stronger then steal itself. Nanotech reformed every tiny bit of his muscles turning them into the most efficient form. His hair also turned white from the change in his bloodline which he turned back to black using nanotech.


    After two and a half weeks, Leo returned home along with the dead body of a huge bear to the house of Dadan family. Ace was not at home as usual while some were drunk and some were fighting each other. Leo simply knocked on the door and throw the body of the huge monstrous bear inside. After eating a bit. Leo left the house again moving toward the seaside. And then simply disappearing in his dimension. Leo logged onto world seed and went to the shinobi world.


    Leo arrived in the body of a child this time made a worldwide announcement to gather everyone. Leo informed that the world which they were informed about in here. And people are free to move out if they wish to do so. Leo gave them custom options via which they can create their body type which they would like to use in the outside world. Many chose to use their own body while some formed a different body for themselves. Everyone that Leo chose from the naruto world was very experienced in fighting and knew what was the best type of body suitable for themself.


    Leo after announcing the body type also announced that proposal to be made by each team regarding what they will go in the outside world and their responsibility. Leo aimed to create 21 units that would work in a different field throughout the world and prepare everything till the time he reaches the age of 10 then he would leave behind the golden tri of Ace Luffy and sabo to fend for themselves.


    Everyone in the shinobi organization was skilled at works, they quickly formed a system on their own and proposed different research and things they would need.


    Leo using Arc of embodiment and devil''s lover created meat suits for every one of the 2580 people who wanted to come into being and embedded nanotech in all of them to always keep track of everything and uploaded their consciousness into the meat suit and thus creating an artificial soul in the one-piece world.


    Everyone used their body and got used to it while some who wanted to change came up to Leo and resolved it.


    After resolving the body problem, Leo channeled a large amount of magic and created 21 Insight Helicarrier made out of Vibranium adamantium alloy carrying everything which the shinobi forces have asked in their proposal. The shinobi forces knowing the plan went into their own Insight Helicarrier and started upgrading it as per their need if any which they thought was needed, Unlike the original Insight Helicarrier the new one didn''t need people to control it and was fully functional on its own each carrying AI which directly worked under Hope. Teams visited each other''s carriers upgrading everything which they deemed to be useful which also purposing upgrades and such to the ally Helicarriers.


    Leo also tried to sent and a probe satellite into the orbit to look at the geographical and outer space condition but failed as the entire planet was covered in some kind of energy bubble completely, Leo after some tries using different materials and such concluded that only certain kinds of material such as sea stones can go into the bubble. Leo wasn''t able to communicate with the probe satellite once it enters the bubble thus Leo didn''t waste any more time.


    The whole process of his took 3 weeks in which Leo again went mission to the outside world. Unlike the previous time, this time Dadan family members along with Ace didn''t get worried. Leo left them to there device didn''t interfere with anything. Ace never tried to talk to Leo and only observed him from far away whenever Ace came in front of Leo his body froze up automatically. Leo planted nanotech in the bear he bought with him this time, thus getting a means to spy on everyone who ate it and thus ace too protected him whenever he was in trouble of any kind. Sometimes just to see if Leo would protect him or not Ace would provoke animals and such around him, Leo after ignoring the way of Ace for first 3 times but on 4th he beat Ace till he could stand anymore thus installing fear into the bones of Ace. Soon people got used to his act of disappearance and thus stopped waiting on him. Leo too after 3 weeks or so always came back bringing some huge animal meat or something back with him. Ace too stopped acting out and started training, Leo seeing this decided that Ace no longer need to live in the protection bubble of him and left him alone, only saving ace when Hope had deemed it an absolute necessity.


    Covering his goal Leo disappeared in his dimension again checking on the progress of Shinobis. After a whole month, all the preparations were finally complete, Leo in the night-time open a hole in the sky letting the upgraded Insight Helicarrier out one by one. Each assigned a different mission. 5 were given the task to map out the entire world no matter where it is while also leaving Probes in the sky for them which would cover an island individually, 3 were assigned to research about the technology of this world and how to upgrade them, 2 were left alone to research deeply into genetics of the races of creatures and animals found in the world while 3 were sent to find and learn all about the different fighting style techniques of the world this including infiltrating various groups learning everything possible. While 8 were given the task of creating artificial devil fruit while also collecting devil fruit and planting nanotech in the devil fruit users silently without raising any flags. The number of the member in each team was different as each task required different man force.


    Leo also made 40 or shinobi souls which were under the control of Hope into a specific shadow force that would within the shadows like roots did for Konoha.


    Leo also deployed the Half of his shadow unit into Marine forces to mix into the forces planting his spies in the enemy force. While also sending Arcnologia into the marines using some trick to make a vice-admiral believe that Arcnologia was a sole survivor child in a pirate attack that destroyed one of the island towns near which the vice-admiral was passing through to go back to headquarters. Leo did deep research while selected the person who Arcnologia should be sent too. An old vice admiral who mostly did the job of escorting people was selected for this task, he was known to take back orphans back to Marine Headquarters which he found during his journey.


    The modified Helicarriers which were sent on scout mission regularly sent updates regarding all the discoveries while also developing Air probes and leaving them in the sky which will remain there above the island while being fully weaponized and act as a monitoring device which will record monitor and report everything which is going on within and on the island.


    Leo sent the rest of the shadow forces to the moon as he had heard about there being a city that was more advance then the rest of the world.


    Leo seeing them all off started with basic training, while also practicing his Dragon bloodline in physical form which gave him superhuman strength speed and agility making his body have unlimited potential.


    Soon years went by Ace met with Sabo became friends with him and started their dream of becoming pirates.


    Leo in silence also became friends with Sabo when he saved both of them from an animal that was about to injure them.


    Leo with all things in motions did nothing but relaxed and trained in his basics.


    Soon 6 years went by other than the task of genetic research, Artificial Logia/Paramecia fruit creation, and embedding/collection devil fruit and users were left.


    Shinobi forces figured out the method to search for the devil fruit in particular but due to the presence of Heavenly energy weren''t able to find fruit more than 5 km away from there location. After mapping out of the sea, the forces identify a bubble region at the end of the new world in which all the technology made by them failed similar to the bubble surrounding the planetary orbit, making them use wooden sh.i.p.s or other particular objects to enter it but those objects and sh.i.p.s got lost when they entered the sea similarly to the condition of the sky bubble.


    Leo remembered the storyline identified that the last island of one piece where the said treasure was can only be visited using the map which was inscribed within the Poneglyph. Thus Leo announced the task to collect all the Poneglyph or at least their images and such. Thus 10 out of 11 free teams moved onto looking for Poneglyph throughout the world knowing the location of some such as 2 in Alabasta, Three with Big mom one on sky island, one on Zou and unknown number with Kaido. While the last team was assigned the task to intercept all the transmission around the globe which they did by planting devices in each island which intercepted all the electric charged which came onto the island thus tapping into world communication of the whole world via current charge regardless of the lines or medium of transmission used. Another AI was made and modified for this particular task. It would record break down and solve all the communication recordings letting Shinobi forces spy on everyone.


    Arcnologia in the meantime topped his combat course showing top talent to the higher-ups who also took interest in him and started paying more attention in him while half of the shadow forces successfully infiltrated into the headquarters doing different jobs and moving up the rank, by now every person who has even one ate something at Marin headquarters had nanotech present in their body regardless of their rank or such making everything from food they ate to anything they drank from water to alcohol mixed in with nanotech.


    With the introduction of Luffy, he knew his time here as a child was about to complete. Leo uploaded all kind of Devil fruit uses which the satellite had recorded and started practicing them using copy magic he was able to do things which didn''t require his body itself to be changed its molecular structure to do so such as turning into the sand like Crocodile. He could copy all Paramecia fruits. He wanted to create artificial devil fruit using the arc of embodiment but didn''t as he wasn''t sure if messing with the already screwed world law was a good idea or not thus decided against it heavenly energy was another issue. His understanding of the Heavenly energy collides with various understanding. In some cases, Heavenly energy collected into a single entity and formed DF while in some changing a normal human body into a genetically modified body that could compete against the likes of Captain America and such in there a.d.u.l.t form.

 Chapter 44 - Order of Shinobi

    The story went the same as the original timeline with Luffy following Ace everywhere regardless of all dangers and such. In the meantime, Leo calmly watched everything while practicing Luffy''s fruit Gum Gum no me and it''s various attacks which Luffy will develop in the future.


    One day Ace abandon Luffy who gets captured in the hands of Porchemy of the Bluejam Pirates which were searching for Ace. Luffy with all his willpower refused to give out any info regarding Ace and sabo. Seeing Luffy like this and realizing the situation Ace along with sabo rush to rescue Luffy from the hands of Porchemy, Ace failing to use the element of surprise was about to be attacked when Leo appeared out of nowhere in front of him blocking all attacks on Ace and pushed back the attacker, Sabo using the momentum attack Porchemy from behind as Ace who after recovering from the shock have rescued Luffy and then using the opportunity to run away.


    The trio ran away in the meantime Leo pretended to have a tough time also followed after time shortly.


    Ace who was questioning Luffy suddenly felt a slap across his face and went on the ground after flying a distance, then went on to slap the other two who were watching from the sidelines with there mouth in the shape of O.


    Leaving them on the ground Leo walked away.


    After the incident, the trio becomes close with each other which after some time leads Sabo to move in together with Ace and Luffy.


    Meanwhile, Leo started learning observation Haki which was collected from the Marines headquarters by the shadow unit which had infiltrated it earlier, Using his mind into a singular task at full capacity, Leo sat in the same place for more than 4 months watching even the tiniest details of water falling from the leaf or a caterpillar moving slowly Villagers down below the mountain doing their daily life activity. Little by little expending the range of his Observation Haki.


    Arcnologia due to exemplary results were selected to be bought into Top academic class where the kids who either had High potential and are on the track of becoming become a top leader within Marines in the future or the relatives of Higher up within Marine who wanted to use nepotism to provide best for their relative and wellwishers. He was also adopted by the Vice-admiral which had earlier picked him up. With Hope in charge of everything as a Moderator, everyone did their task without requiring any assistance from Leo.


    Leo after practicing observation Haki for 4 months decided to develop his sword style. Using the Arc of embodiment and observation Haki, Leo started practicing the sword artwork he was already very proficient in various kinds of Sword fighting styles due to his experience in SAO and Naruto world but he regardless decided to incorporated a new single-handed style which worked with the techniques his team has collected for him. Leo''s team has already collected all the techniques whether they are of CP branch of Marine or the fighting and sword style of the likes of Shark and his crew who didn''t eat a devil fruit and sole relied on various skill and fighting styles. Probes in the sky in invisible form spied on everyone stealing everything which was deemed useful.


    Hope from time to time informed Leo about the trio causing troubles or fighting each other, Leo without any mercy always beaten them and when Luffy and others would complain about it he would just say this is his fist of love. Soon one day Hope informed Leo that Ace had stolen the wine from Curly Dadan. Seeing this Leo moved where Luffy and Sabo were, soon Ace arrived and was surprised to see Leo also present here, Giving a big smile Ace came forward taking out 4 small cups and purposed the cup of sake for brotherhood for life, seeing all three smiling like Idiotes Leo also giving a small smile to both Luffy and Sabo and said in a low voice: As we today take this vow, I as your big brother will always be there for you three. Hearing this the trio started laughing loudly like idiots again, feeling embarrassed Leo punched all three again and disappeared in thin air again.


    With everything over Leo decided to go out. He went to Dadan family informing them he is leaving while also leaving notes for the three newly made brothers of his stating that as big brother He has to get stronger quickly to protect the three thus have decided to leave the island and go on to explore the world also stating that they too should leave when they reach the age of 17 and that he will be waiting for their name to be heard.


    With the things with the trio completing, Leo moved onto one of the Helicarrier which was closest and was working on the genetic mapping of different species which morphed into a higher form of life due to exposer of heavenly energy.


    Everyone within the alliance was already a war veteran was had fought at least 2 or more war during their lifetime in Naruto world and were very interested in learning Haki and such thus everyone including the people who previously chose to stay within the world seed came into being and started training on their own. Many have already claimed fruits which were found by the teams, Leo had already declared that the timeline of the original story should not be derailed thus the fruits which were shown throughout the series till the Battle of Marinefort were left untouched while rest found were either collected or were put under observation by the alliance. The battle of Marinefort was when Leo and his team which wants to take part will appear in front of the world.


    With the period of 9 years remaining before anything remotely interesting happening, Leo and the rest of the 10 Helicarrier who weren''t assigned any tasks moved near the bubble as near it almost all life was the extent and powerful beast could be found to train on it.


    The forces selected a group of 7 islands with 1 island located in the middle. The forces took over the 7 islands whereas Leo alone ventured into the 1 island in the middle which had the most powerful beast and such out of all. Leo with his Arc of embodiment and Rinnegan didn''t have anything to fear in regards to death. But he chose to just use Haki and his gunbai while fighting through the Island. Each Island was different, one was such that it was covered in the snowstorm which was falling from Sky itself. The second was covered in Black lightning which was falling unpredictably, Third was a volcano range with one or more volcano always overflowing the island, 4 was similar to the sky island everything was huge trees animals beats everything, 5 was coved in thick mist it was the home of silent Monkey evolved tribe which could kill anything which moves within the island and eat it, and 6 island of the series of the group the Island of water were the island was just a deep well with mysterious beasts inside it the beast was made infused with sea stone and other rare materials within their bodies the uppermost layer of the island seemed like a fog ground by in reality was hiding the beast underneath which can attack you from any direction in any manner. the destroyed fog would automatically return and land would turn back into the wet sand.


    The middle island consisted of the beast which could be described as the top of the food chain with even the likes of 4 emperors of the new world being either weak or somewhat equal to them. Seeing this Leo and the alliance chose an island which they felt was most suitable for them and started their training. Teams were regularly changed so that even the people who were out working on the task given to them also came and practice on the islands.


    8 years pass by quickly, only around 200 people weren''t able to unlock of Conquer Haki, Defense perimeters where made around the 7 islands out of sea stones and such which would require a particular way for anyone to enter the middle island where Logan build a city in which each building was designed as per the needs of everyone. Leo at first assigned areas to everyone and later created Houses which they have made submitted proposal of using Arc of embodiment. In the middle was the tower of Leo, it was made out of glass-like structure through which like a two-way mirror, Leo could see everything but the outside world only saw their reflection. A training area was also designed in which various people can come together and fight each other to resolve issues and train together. An AI specifically made by Hope was designated to everyone which would rule on all the fighting and Judgements.


    Shinobis had a higher concentration with a tendency to be patient and focused thus fighting among themselves was almost nil. Clan and village divisions were already washed off thus individual member''s achievements and work was taken into consideration. His 7 island nation didn''t lack any resource due to him having Ace of embodiment, everyone was happy and focused solely on Training.


    After 8 years and the establishment of the cities, 8 out of 11 teams looking for devil fruit returned with more than 4000 fruits with them of various kinds which were not part of the cannon and were mostly lost or hidden away from the world. To make everything fair and just, and important to keep the forces motivated as some were just focusing on the research on genetics which they found fascinating Leo announced a fighting competition to be held every 5 days in which winner gets a devil fruit of their choice.


    The competition leads to active participation among everyone, due everyone been grown up infighting was less than what Leo expected. Leo also announced that 2 forces will be formed in which the leader will be decided by competition which will be held in 2 years, both the finalist and the runnerup will be the vice-captain of the pirate crew which will be formed in the future.


    The participation increased, Leo also fought with various people in various things, swords, gun manship, Fish-Man karate, Haki fight such as a person will wear a blindfold while other will attack using whatever they wish to use for the attack, Death was virtually impossible as Hope would always upload the conciseness of the person back into the world seed if the damage is done is more than what nanotech can heal.


    In the other side world soon after Leo left, the trio made a promise to train and find Leo in the future. Soon the incident with Sabo happened to leave Ace and Luffy feeling helpless, motivating them further. 6 years went by Ace leaving Luffy behind and started his journey becoming famous quickly while being offered the position of a Shichibuka which he rejected and later went on to fight and then join whitebeard after his defeat.


    Leo knowing the story declared that the forces will in 6 years one will go and finish Big mom while then second will go on to fight Kiado. Uchiha Madara of the Village Hidden in the leaf and Ranju Zabara from the warring state era Zabara clan were the two individuals who both got into the finals of the ranking tournament. With Ranju selecting Goro Goro no mi fruit which would in the future be taken from Enel when he fulfills his purpose within the arc. While Uchiha Madara wanted his Gunbai which was specially created out of sea stones, as for the fruit he didn''t have any preference so Leo decided to give him a Mystic Zoan fruit which was specially created in his research the model was based on the Kiado''s dragon fruit and Whitebeard first commander Marco Tori Tori no Mi, Model: Phoenix, Giving an appearance of a Kun Peng which had a mouth of a dragon and back made out of sea fish making it more adaptable to water element while having 2 wings which could collect the moisture in the atmosphere and attack as a water ball and 2 hawk-like hands. The research team has identified the way to upgrade a normal Zoan fruit as per the need, unlike the SMILE Kaido used. Research regarding other types was going on too. Many fruits were created but not consumed Leo wanted a perfect fruit with no side effects as the matter was related to a person''s soul.


    Leo himself didn''t take any fruit but only relied upon Haki like Garp to fight. Leo in the meanwhile also started learning how to cook by watching various techniques that were collected in the huge data compilation from all around the world.


    His half of the shadow team which he had sent to the moon returned about 7 years ago carrying various information regarding the technology of the world and their advancement made by the previous generations. Robot-like creatures by the name of automata were also brought back, which Leo along with other upgraded to serve as basic servents which would world from all sectors such as house cleaner to security, they had an appearance of Little dwarf humans children, which were modified as per the need of the duty assigned to them, they didn''t need energy as they consumed the heavenly energy within the surrounding to work. Making Leo understand the workings of the heavenly law more clearly.


    Meanwhile, the outside world, the original storyline went as usual which the slight change of Arcnologia become a direct discipline, Garp, with the request of Fleet admiral Sengoku who along regarded Arcnologia talent very much. Arcnologia under the guidance of Garp started training in the 6 Rokushiki.


    Leo along with the rest of the force already has the body structure of a peak human in terms of super strength and such due to nanotech in their body which modified their body in such condition and kept them in such have already started practicing the Rokushiki and also incorporate them within their fighting style. Fruits that were seen valuable in the hands of Marine were also collected.


    The second half of the shadow unit which was sent into the Marine and had spread the nanotech throughout the Marin was instructed by Leo to use any means to enter the CP units which worked for the World Government directly. Around 11 people from the Shadow unit were selected to do so information regarding the orphan children who were going to be selected was collected from the information pot which was planted on each island Leo made the identical meat suit as those children uploaded the consciousness of those 11 selected was uploaded. All 11 were placed within the selected batch of orphan which were going to go through the selection and then brainwash session of the world government before being trained to serve as an assassin for the world government.

 Chapter 45 - Son of a King Part. II

    Passing all the mental and physical tests. the basic training began which would select which branch the orphans would be sent to. Two out of 11 showed exemplary results outperforming everyone else within the team while 5 performed a bit above average and 3 serving as average and one performed badly just above the last 5 people. there were around 70 people within the camp from the original 150 which were kidnapped and collected in secret by the World government.


    The top 2 were selected as a recruit in CP-00 which was the main branch that Leo wanted to tap in. They had to go through a lot of mind molding training to make them loyal to World government, Hope in control passed everything and over time also joined in the branch and started doing missions for the CP branch tapping into more information branch, out of 2 one was sent to CP-09 which worked in secret to collect the things which World government deemed important.


    With the spies in place.


    Leo also sent the other half of the Shadow unit which had returned from the moon into Wano to learn the way of making a will contained sword which the Wano craftmanship was famous for. While the remaining spies from the first shadow unit were sent into the Revolutionary army to serve as spies within it.


    Leo started organizing get together for the people within his force, he wanted to mold all his forces into a more single entity leaving no scope of friction or anything distraction. In the Get-together, Leo announced that 3 branches will be formed one with him as the captain while the other two with Madara and Ranju as their leader. The requirement to join his team was to have perfected all kinds of Haki to at least Kings level, to be proficient in all form of Rokushiki along with the last 7th secret technique Rokuogan, and proficient in at least one way of weapon style. Whereas the Madara unit will be formed basically out of Zoan fruit users whereas the Ranju unit will be formed out of other 2 types of fruit users. Those who have Awakened their fruit will be given a free pass if they want to join another team whereas the division commanders can also request for particular fruit users if you feel the need for it within the company. Under Madara and Ranju there will be a command unit of 11 each with a leader who has an awakened devil fruit or who can defeat the awakened devil fruit user by using Haki or any other means.


    The formation will start after 2 year time from the get-together whereas after teams are formed an individual if he or she feels like have been put in the category he didn''t deserve and want to challenge his supervisor can come forth once a month and do so.


    With the army, Leo throws another bombshell by sending a notice that those who fail to learn at least one thing to the peak will be thrown back into the world seed to focus on one particular task as he saw some people just focusing on their research after learning the basics.


    With giving everyone 2 years of the period, the training and the rash started again, if two individuals wanted the same fruit for which they would fight and the winner would get it. The rules were simple everything was ruled by Hope.


    In the outside world, Arcnologia continues to train under Garp while Luffy started to prepare for his journey outside and after 3 months left for the adventure meeting Coby and later Zoro and Nami. Seeing this and with bored with all the training Leo announced his plan to visit the outside world to the people, most were not interested as they have already visited everywhere when they were assigned to go the tasks. 200 or so which originally were inside the world seed also wanted to continue to train thus adopted not to go.


    A team of 30 people was decided to go with Leo all of whom had already unlocked awakening with their respected Devil fruit and have all three kinds of Haki mastered. The moment Leo will visit will be when Ace joins Luffy, thus meeting both his brothers at the same time.


    Another task which was put forth was to design sh.i.p.s for the crew, each division has a ship whereas head having their ship, and with Leo''s ship be different then everyone else which would be designed by himself. holographic designs were sent to everyone within the force so as each member can input their ideas and such into the makings. The sh.i.p.s would be constructed


    Leo in the meantime made himself a small boat made on top of a Sea king which he could underneath the island. the size of the Sea king present in and around the islands were bigger than the size of the Marin grand line Headquarters whole who Leo named potter in reminiscence of his time in Harry Potter world, the ship was bigger than the future Thousand sunny and made purply out of elder wood from harry potter world while also with Adam wood from this world mixed in which was said to be the best wood within this world with the lower floor made out of Seastone and Verithanam adamantium alloy, the ship had everything from a kitchen to any other facility one could ask.


    Soon the time came where hope informed Leo about Luffy starting his journey to Alabasta also started his Journey, Uchiha Itachi was named the vice-captain with his fruit Tori Tori no Mi, Model: Hydra which was regarded as one of the strongest fruit artificially created by everyone within the force having 4 heads with elements such as fire water air and lighting in each mouth giving Itachi over command overall 4 elements with a body which was constantly burning and completely covered in light Green colored flame while also make the sea stones only applicable damage on him to very low level. Itachi served as the direct leader of the Guard unit which protected Leo and was also the Vice-captain of the whole division, only 4 people within the force were capable of fighting on even grounds with him, with only 2 able to beat him with one being Leo himself. Potter dragged the ship underwater quietly while Leo rested from all the practice and everything. Just enjoying the ride. 30 people who came with him also relaxed as potter alone was enough to deal with all problem which might occur.


    As Leo was moving forth, Hope informed him about sharks going to visit Whitebeard whom Leo had an interest in thus changed the course a little bit.


    Shark''s visit to Whitebeard was seen by the marines and reported to the headquarters when all forces of marines when quiet within the area. 2 teams of 5 people moved quietly killing everything within their path.


    Leo calmly bit far away from whitebeard ship underwater watched the situation, soon in the afternoon time shark approached whitebeard, all the whitebeard commanders came out to be ready for the war. Shark docking his and went up to greet Whitebeard who announced to his crew to leave them alone to talk when Leo commanded the ship to be bought to the surface and released the c.u.mulative bloodthirst he had over the millions and millions of lives he has taken in the previous world and his conqueror Haki. One by one other members of his team also released their Conquerors Haki they were mainly released on the commanders and other members-only leaving out Sharks and whitebeard. Everyone within his team including him was either as powerful as an Emperor or more thus with the force of 28 altogether released a lot of pressure on the ship of both whitebeard and Sharks.


    Shark and whitebeard felt a dread they have never felt before, it was as if the world was colored in nothing but red, most of the crew members from both Shark and whitebeard already fainted with white foams coming out of their mouth even the commanders leaving only about 10 or so people standing or kneeling.


    Shark and whitebeard saw a ship with the Jolly Roger of Pirate king Gold D. Roger moving toward the ship. Gathering both of there strength both screamed for their men to club together to get ready to fight, Leo using his Kamui disappeared from the ship and appeared in front of both which were holding their weapon and standing in front of there men. Leo increased the pressure a bit making the remaining men other than Shark and whitebeard faint. Itachi and rest quickly surrounded them both.


    Leo and the rest were wearing the cloths similar to Akatsuki with the difference of the cloud color being white instead of red like in the original, all of them were wearing Anbu mask with different patterns in him with Leo alone wearing a white mask with Sharingan on them.


    Leo in a low voice said: Now Now no need to tense up, I''m just here to see you two for my brothers.


    Shark after seeing his old crew flag has already lost it shouted: How dare you use that flag?


    Leo laughter loudly and replied: If I can''t use this flag then no one can. I''m his son after all.


    Shark and whitebeard both got shocked hearing this.


    Potter who was underwater also came out covering the entire sea masking the sun in the sky, Shark and whitebeard who were watching saw 2 eyes completely painted red spinning fear stepped into their bones as they felt as if an ancient beast was watching them.


    Leo not caring about there shock walked toward a whitebeard who wanted to fight back but his body refused to listen and didn''t moved even a bit. Leo placed his hand onto the body and used the power of his copy magic to copy the effect of the fruit eaten by Jewelry Bonney had made Whitebeard a man within his late 20ish then moved onto Shark who watched the entire thing with his mouth open. Leo moved in front of him and using the arc of embodiment created arm which Shark lost while protecting Luffy using the analysis of hope to calculate the arm structure using his other and as a model. Thus used Trafalgar D. water Law''s Ope Ope no Mi fruit using his copy magic to attach it.


    Whitebeard moved his body a bit feeling smaller in size then he previously was and healthier too making breathing easier for him. While shark also moved his newly grown arm checking it.


    Leo spoke: You took care of my little brothers Ace and Luffy so take this as a gift.


    Whitebeard: So you''re Leo? Ace told me a few things about you he was worried as there was never any news about you anywhere.


    Leo started laughing loudly: People need to alive to report things. Those who see me without my permission are deemed to die. Well anyway, I came here to speak to two of you about a few things. First Ace and his hunt for Blackbeard.


    Shark: Yes I''m also worried about that. You should ask him to come back.


    Whitebeard: It''s the rule of the crew if broken punishment must be given. Even if I want to I can''t order him back he has set his mind on it.


    Leo: I hope you too realize that if Blackbeard knowns his identity as my father''s son he will try to use it.


    Whitebeard got stunned hearing this after some moment after thinking replied: Yes Blackbeard knowns aces identity.


    Leo: From what I see, Blackbeard will use a group to trap ace and then hand over Ace to the marine who would be more than happy to give Teach anything he wishes in exchange for Son of the pirate king.


    Shark: So what is your plan? You have already shown that you can go and save Ace what do you want from us?


    Leo laughed out loud and screamed: Everything.


    Leo turned back and said: Whitebeard I think you should hide, for now, don''t let the world know about your age if the condition of all-out war with Marine does arise. As for you Sharks will take Whitebeard here with you keeping him hidden from the world.


    Leo motioned Itachi who came up and slapped and woke up Marco who after waking up get ready to attack Itachi but Itachi simply punched him onto Whitebeard. Whitebeard who was young now being more agile too caught Marco and hold him down.


    Leo: Marco you will take a whitebeard place while he is with Sharks while announcing that whitebeard has gone in search of the 2nd son of Gold D. Roger the brother of Ace and due to not wanting any information only informed you.


    Marco who has his mouth in the shape of O as he was watching younger whitebeard heard this and realize something important was going on.


    Whitebeard who was listening to everything carefully asked: What do you mean everything?


    Leo without replying moved back toward his ship, potter went back into the ship, rest of the members moved back into the ship too while Itachi went up Marco Shark and whitebeard and gave them a silver-colored dish and explained that they can get in contact with Leo using this device by pressing in the middle circle. Nodding at each of them Itachi too went back to the ship which went underwater again.

 Chapter 46 - Brothers

    Marco, Whitebeard, and shank recovered quickly. For now, they decided to follow along with the play of Leo as they saw no harm in doing so. Shanks and Whitebeard quickly put back all the people from Shanks crew back into their ship started moving away while Macro started waking up the commandos and informing them whitebeard going away.


    Leo already planted his nanotech inside the body of both Whitebeard and shark while Itachi did the same with Marco while waking him up, started moved toward Luffy and ace which have just missed each other on Drum island with Luffy leaving and ace reaching there after him.


    His shadow unit which was sent to Wano country reported back stating that skills of making a sword with will have been learned and around 50 swords have also been collected to serve as an example while making the sword. Leo instructed them to come back and wait for him within the island nation which was formed by him and report everything to Madara who then assigned people who were interested in blacksmith to try out the techniques and such using methods that were brought back by the shadow team.


    Leo within a week reached the port of Nanohana in Alabasta with potter going at it at half speed of his.


    Soon Leo and his comrades moved over to the drylands of sand. Many went on to explore the town while Leo and Itachi stayed on the ship in the meantime after 2 days Luffy along with his crew arrived at Alabasta to refurnish their supplies meanwhile Ace arrived on the same day as him.


    Leo watched everything clearly as Luffy broke into the restaurant throwing both smoker and Ace away. Leo instructed all the people who were within the town to return as it was time to meet his foolish brothers.


    Luffy after finding out about Smoker quickly ran away while ace came in between the two and protected Luffy.


    Soon both Luffy and ace reunited and started going back to the Luffy''s ship which had already departed.


    Luffy using his rubber arms went back to the ship while ace using his one-person boat went back.


    Zoro: Ace? Your brother was with you?


    Usopp: Is it okay for you to leave him there?


    Luffy: I guess he will be okay!! Ace is Strong!!


    Chopper: He is strong?


    Luffy: Yeah! He hadn''t eaten Flame Flame fruit a long time ago, but I still never beat him in a single fight! He is really strong, Ace is!


    Nami: There are flesh and blood person you could never beat?!


    Ussop: I guess the big brother of a monster is an even bigger monster.


    Luffy: That''s right I lost all the time! But I''d win now if we tried!


    Zoro: I assume that another groundless claim.


    Ace jumped up from his small single-person ship and said: Who can win what now?


    Luffy: Oh! Ace! this the crew I was talking about!


    Before anyone else could say anything Leo appeared on side of both Luffy and ace and punch them and knocking Ace down to the lower deck directly while Luffy after getting punched flew in the air down the lower deck too. Leo standing in front of everyone. While Ace and Luffy recovered, Leo wearing the mask said to others who after recovering from their shock were preparing to fight: Don''t worry I didn''t kill them yet.


    Ace and Luffy who was lying on the ground quickly got up and took their attacking position.


    Seeing this Leo laugher loudly and said: Good good Now you want to beat your own older brother huh? I see that you have forgotten my fist of love already huh?


    Ace and Luffy both got confused, with Ace concluding first and asked: Leo?


    Leo laughed loudly: How have you been little brother? I visited Whitebeard I while ago you weren''t their so I came looking for you here and what do I find my brothers fighting among themselves. Guess I will join on this brother vs brother fight too.


    Luffy remembering the terrible memories of childhood were Leo would beat all three of them if he ever finds them fighting started screaming: Leo nee-chan I didn''t do anything it was ace. I didn''t do anything.


    Ace also recovering from the shock asked: Leo is that you?! Did you meet pops?


    Leo slowly removed his mask revealing a long black hair that went longer than his shoulders while forming a ponytail on the back. His face was completely clear with no scars or even tiny mishap eyes completely black in color and a small smile which made one feel loved on the face.


    Before Leo could answer, Baroque Works with 5 sh.i.p.s came to attack Luffy''s ship seeing this Leo in a low voice said: Itachi take care of it.


    Itachi like a shadow appeared behind Leo and jumped off the ship and started running on water. Leaving everyone other than Leo on the ship with the mouth shaped O behind. Itachi reaching a close enough distance took a deep breath and used a Dragon''s roar type of attack with a red beam that burned all the sh.i.p.s down in one go without leaving any evidence of any ship ever been there.


    Leo slowly walked toward the edge of the Marry go when another ship comes out of water. Leo turned back and said: Come on my ship we have a lot to talk about.


    Leo disappeared appeared on the huge ship which was thrice the size of Going Merry.


    Luffy and others jumped on the ship too, the ship exceeded all expectations. 7 people were sitting on a table drinking tea while working on something which by their eye felt as drawing floating in the air. The entire floor was made out of gold which also contains a little garden in which someone was watering the plant. Ace and others watched curiously when Luffy suddenly got close to one of the people and try to touch the figure floating in the air but his hand just moved passed it.


    One of the people working raised his head and saw Luffy when Leo shouted: Come out I have bought my brother to visit my ship, Come and greet them. Prepare someplace for them to sit too.


    One by one around 30 people appeared surrounding Straw Hat and ace completely other than Itachi and one more member''s rest were wearing casual clothes they looked at Luffy and others and disappeared again. A dining table appeared out of nowhere in front of them with11 chairs. Leo sat on one of the chairs with Itachi standing behind him and both Luffy and Ace seat on either side of him. Luffy and others took their sit but before anyone could talk food appeared out of nowhere on the table.


    Leo started talking again: I met whitebeard before coming here to talk about your hunt, he too feels you should return now but ultimately that is your choice.


    Ace seriously replied: I have to fulfill my duties as a commander to enforce the law.


    Leo: Okay if that''s what you want.


    Leo turned to Luffy who was eating like crazy: Won''t you introduce me to your crew?


    Luffy with food in his mouth and a chicken leg piece in hand started pointing at Zoro and others and started mumbling.


    Nami punched Luffy and started introducing herself but before she could say anything Leo started talking.


    Leo smiled: "Cat Burglar" Nami formal member of the Arlong Pirates. Adopted by formal marine Bell-mere. A pleasure to meet you.


    Without waiting for Nami to reply Leo looked at Chopper who started introducing himself: Tony Tony Chopper''s newest member to join the crew, Student of Dr. Kureha Drum Island.


    Leo went on: Roronoa Zoro the former bounty hunter turns pirate, Carries the sword of his childhood lover Kuina. Usopp, son of Yasopp of the Red hair pirate Childhood friend and lover Kaya. Vinsmoker Sanji, the formal prince of Germa Kingdom and now adopted son of Redleg Zeff. And lastly Nefertari Vivi princess of Alabasta and formal Baroque works agent.


    All of them were surprised as to hope Leo knew about them and something so important about their past in such detail. But Leo didn''t pay any attention to them and started talking to Luffy and ace. With Luffy telling Leo all about his adventures while ace constantly falling asleep while eating.


    Luffy suddenly asked: Leo where have you been all these years? There have been no new about you.


    Leo: Well I have been here and there which reminds me I met Sharks you''re always going about. His arm is healed now.


    Luffy surprised screamed and asked: Really?


    Leo: Yup. He told me to tell you that he is still waiting for you to return the hat to him.


    Luffy paused his dinner for a moment and started looking at his hat remembering his childhood memories.


    Leo saw others such as Nami Zoro and others had long stopped eating and staring at Leo. Leo started laughing and asked: What happen why are you all so serious?


    Sanji with all seriousness asked: How do you know about my past?


    Leo simply smiled and completely ignored Sanji asked Luffy and ace: How is the food? I cooked it myself for you guys.


    Before others could reply a cannonball landed next to Leo''s ship rocking Going Mary. Seeing this one after other people appeared next to Leo who in a low voice after seeing a marine ship coming their way spoke: Potter go take care of this, destroy their ship.


    Within seconds a huge tsunami arises out of the ocean throwing Smoker''s ship who was coming to chase Luffy back into the beach.


    Leo standing up spoke in a laughing voice: Come Luffy I will show you something.


    Ace Luffy and rest were quietly watching Smoker ship being thrown away heard Leo and looked over.


    Slowly Potter came out of the water rising freaking out everyone due to his size.


    Seeing this Leo laughed even louder.


    Luffy recovering first came forth and started playing with Potter. While chopper started talking to him using the beast language of his.


    Leo smiling said out loud: Itachi why don''t you take everyone around the ship show them various places.


    Ace, as he was about to get up, was stopped by Leo. Seeing this Ace too stopped and seatback down. Nami and others seeing this realized Leo wanted to talk to Ace and Luffy alone went with Itachi.


    Leo called Luffy back from playing with Potter and started talking: I know about Sabo''s incident. He is not dead he has lost his memories and was seen in various places. He is still using the same name, Sabo.


    Hearing this Luffy and Ace both turned serious too. Luffy with tears in his eyes asked: Nee-chan you aren''t lying are you?


    Before Leo could do anything, Ace punched Luffy and turned to Leo: Have you found him?


    Leo: No but I want both of you to not tell anyone anything about Sabo, his life might get in danger. I will search in the meantime for him.


    Luffy started crying loudly while Ace also got very serious. Soon Nami and others returned with weird expressions on their face and saw Luffy crying like a baby.


    Leo seeing this smiled and spoke: Itachi bring some ice cream for everyone. Potter starts moving the ship to take Going Mary with us too.


    Seeing both Ace in the serious face and Luffy crying the straw hat crew just seat in silence.


    Seeing this tense situation, Leo started talking to Vivi: So crocodile is finally making a move for the kingdom huh? That''s something.


    Vivi: If you don''t mind can you kindly explain how you know so much about every one of us?


    Leo smiling said: Because you''re related to Luffy


    Sanji interpted: What does that mean?


    Leo: In your upcoming adventures people will find out every little thing about you when you get famous. I paid interest because you will be traveling with my littler brother otherwise why would I care.


    Zoro: If you''re so connected and powerful why has no one ever heard about you?


    Leo giving a big creepy smiled: Well believe it or not but those who see me either Die by my hands painfully or kill themself on there own. Do you want to see it?


    Nami and other sensing dangers didn''t reply. Luffy recovered from his crying while Ace just stood up from his seat and watched the sea.


    Seeing this Leo shaking his head spoke in a loud voice: Little brother, I''m running a bit short on time. So I will be going for now.


    Luffy hugged Leo while Ace just nodded. Leo one last time looked at the straw hat crew who had moved back to Going Mary and spoke in a low voice: Don''t worry I don''t eat people..... not yet.

 Chapter 47 - Start of Battle of Marineford

    With all the pieces in place, Leo and others started moving back to their headquarters. The research team has identified the modification which increased the size of the creatures such as giants and sea king when heavenly energy was injected in them changing their genetic structure. Shadow unit which had returned for Wano Country was sent to collect some normal human so the human trials can begin while Leo also instructed a team lead by Madara held to Elbaf where a Poneglyph was suspected to be located and to also bring some giants back for the experiments too. Similarly, other teams were deployed to collect alive being from all around from which they have previously only collected simples. Weapon forging started using the swords which were brought back from Wano. The technique was copied from the original craftsmen of Wano while using their specialized material. Mostly everyone with Leo''s force had practiced some kind of weapons thus a special unit was assigned to make them. Will would later produce with the usage or so was leaned by watching the practice of Wano country.


    Leo himself went to Fish-man islands and collected some criminals which no one would notice to be missing.


    With plans in motion, the work on warsh.i.p.s was also president overtraining. Leo created supplies using the arc of embodiment meanwhile thousands of mechanical probes launched around the planet to search for places where the material via which Poneglyph is in large concentration. Meanwhile, thousands of other probes were launched underwater to search for devil fruits which have remained dormant underwater through centuries. Shinobi forces also started gathering firepowers. This all awaited fight would begin soon, Pluton which was hidden by Iceberg was long found by the special team which Leo, when he was a child and before Iceberg had the opportunity to give blueprints to Franky, was copied and placed in the same state as found to not disturb the timeline was also bought back into consideration and used as a base on which the all battlesh.i.p.s would be created. The modifications were done on the blueprint by both teams as per their needs. After 9 months both teams submitted their proposal for the battleship and their team members.


    Leo''s team consisted of around 250 people while Madara was made out of 900 people and leaving 1050 in the team of Ranju. 660 members were left out and divided into various teams which would collect after the spoils in the war. A team of around 300 will break into Impel Down just after Luffy and collect all the Devil fruit users locked in there. 200 will act as a backup for these people while 100 go after Blackbeard and his crew.


    Leo was waiting for this opportunity because it was rare for the whole navy to gather together in one place. Various plans were formed with 3 forces to be whipped out at the same time 1. Marine 2. Kaido 3. Big mom.


    Leo already sent some teams to infiltrate and make the whole crew which was present with the main boss bugged with nanotech. Leo only needed about 2 nanotech within the body to form a circle via which he could upload the conscious matrix of an individual into world seed.


    Soon Luffy and his crew after rescuing Robin continued their adventure to which according to Leo memories would be Thriller Bark and then next Sabaody Archipelago. Leo estimated about 5 month period and announced it. Designs of the sh.i.p.s were submitted in 3 months by everyone and created by Leo using Arc of embodiment. More than 200 fruits were recovered underwater within this time thus letting Leo send more probes underwater. Madara returned with 2 giants and 2 Poneglyph from Elbaf, with 5 singles reported by the probes regarding the high material composer of Poneglyph.


    Leo sent another team to collect them while Madara and Ranju started forming their forces and commanding them. Leo aimed to end the war on all front with less blood spilled as possible but due to the uncertainty of heavenly law and energy present, Leo wanted to be prepared for everything. Leo gave only one command while giving directives to fight on their front. To not kill anyone. Leo wanted to capture and then research on each individual, Blackbeard fruit was also very fascinating to him but after finding out at instead of one Blackbeard there were 3, 3 in the sense that he due to overexposure of heavenly energy in his childhood had his soul be divided into 3 parts, making him a flesh which contained 3 different people inside him, one devil fruit will be attached to one soul in his body thus letting him consume multiple fruits without any risk. It was due to this that Leo has assigned 100 people on Blackbeard he didn''t want to take any chance of him getting away or escaping.


    Arcnologia who was training under Garp had long completed his training and was assigned under a celestial dragon''s 5 elders direct command by Sengoku who along with the elders saw him as the future of the Marines and have decided him to be made the next Admiral but rejected by IM stating that balance of the world should just be maintained right now and thus elders decided to have Arcnologia serve directly under them to train, command and act as an emergency resort for them settled for this. Arcnologia was said to go against Garps and most times come on top was also liked by the elders as he did everything which was asked of him showing himself as the perfect servant of the World government.


    In the meantime, teams returned with their assignment of collecting the living creatures thus the human trial and further research in Heavenly energy continued. On the big screens which were present all around the 7 island cities the fight between Ace and Blackbeard pirates was played.


    With the fight being over, All units assembled those who were out on the missions also started coming back.


    Soon with everything, ready Madara took his team to go toward Kaido while Ranju was assigned, Big mom. The impel down unit was not going via sh.i.p.s but used Helicarrier, other locations too had Helicarrier but didn''t consist of anyone on them just there to provide support in case something unknown happens. With clocking technology everything was ready. The information was collected from the information probe regarding the deal made between Blackbeard pirates and Marines. After losing face in the Enies lobby incident the elders wanted to take the opportunity to prove to the world about there powers thus agreed to make Blackbeard Shichibukai.


    The news of the execution was printed in papers and distributed all around the world. Whitebeard and shark both were surprised that the prediction of Leo has come true decided to contact him to discuss the plan. Leo instructed Shanks to keep all the territories of his and whitebeard in peace while telling whitebeard to gather his forces and come to join the battle of Marineford. Leo also sent a two-man team that went on to destroy all forms of surveillance marine had within the new world on Shanks and Whitebeard. the two-person team escorted whitebeard back to his crew and started preparing for the war. Meanwhile, Marines made a deal with Kaido to keep Shanks busy so that Whitebeard be isolated without help who they can take down to establish their dominance in front of the whole world.


    Kaido accepted the deal and started gathering his crew to keep shanks busy. Madara forces reached the boundaries of Wano and observed the gathering of Kaido''s beast pirates. With 4 Helcarrier flying Wano country observing everything going on and reporting to Madara. Under his command were 900 personal divided into 11 sh.i.p.s excluding his Main battleship with the external support of 10 sea kings from underwater.


    Meanwhile Ranju and his 1050 members which had 1 main battleship 11 sub-divisional battlesh.i.p.s divided and formed a circle underwater with the support of 13 trained sea kings while in air 3 Harricarrier cover the Cake Island.


    Leo in the meantime with only 1 main battleship, 5 subdivide battleship, 7 Helicarrier and 10 sea kings including potter started his journey to the Marinefort.


    With another 7 directed at Mary Geoise from a distance with a fully stocked armory.


    Whitebeard arrived at his ship along with the two team escort surprising everyone who saw him in his younger form, soon he started recalling allies in preparation of the war. He knew Leo won''t let anyone alive who have harmed Ace from the stories Ace has told him about Leo and his childhood thus he decided to only took people which he deemed to be powerful enough to survive the war. With his ship and 17 alliance sh.i.p.s he too started his journey toward the Marinford, whenever he asked anything about Leo to the two team person team escorting him, they simply ignored him. After their task was done both simply disappeared.


    Leo slowly crossed the Redline, he could hear the sea kings talking and told them the time for Noah to be used will come soon that they should start gathering forces confusing the sea kings as they had alone once seen a human talking to them.

 Chapter 48 - Legacy of Gold D. Roger

    Sengoku announced to the world the execution of Portgus D. Ace, everyone waited for the whitebeard to appear and soon clouds started forming over the Marineford the person looking through the scope saw sh.i.p.s appear one by one, as everyone was wandering, was Whitebeard is while whitebeard in his ship covered in bubble moved underwater soon reaching started the Marineford


    In the middle of the Marineford, bubbles started forming underneath the water, Many low-level soldiers started panicking One by one three sh.i.p.s came out of the water clade in air bubbles.


    Clang Clang Clang the sound of a weapon being put while walking started coming out of the middle ship. Soon a sound of laughter rang throughout the Marineford with Whitebeard asking in low yet audible to everyone present: Sengoku How many years has it been? Have you taken good care of my son?


    Garp and Sengoku started at the appearance of a 20 something Whitebeard standing in front of everyone. But without waiting for anyone to respond Whitebeard continued: Sengoku you f.u.c.k.i.e.d up big this time, Don''t you know who his brother is?


    Before anyone could comprehend what whitebeard said a huge ship fell from the sky and a voice came out of it: My my my Do I know how to make an entrance.


    Whitebeard unfazed by anything continued walking While laughing. Leo sitting on his throne holding Ace who was now on his ship with him started talking again: Garp I thought you were a man of principle but now I see old age has made you nothing but a dog of the World nobles.


    The water settled down reveling an ancient yet magnified boat made out of metal gold wood sea stones with the Jolly Roger of Gold D. Roger. Leo motioned his hands cutting off the handcuffs on Ace freeing him.


    Sengoku seeing ace freed screamed out to capture him. Admiral Aokiji jumped up to freeze the ship and then attack but just as he jumped and moved his hand but all he saw was his hand felling which he has just motioned. Quickly recovering he formed ice under his legs and jumped back but before he could jump one of his legs detached from the body.


    Leo seeing this simpled and screamed: Rutsu come back.


    A person holding an ancient-looking sword in one hand while Aokiji''s leg in another appeared on Leo''s ship. Leo took Ace by his neck and throw him onto a whitebeard ship on which commanders quickly caught him. He looked at Whitebeard and said: You can leave now, you have done your part of gathering the sheep in one place I will handle the rest.


    Borsalino seeing this used his fruit Pika Pika no Mi and tried to catch the commanders of Whitebeard who had caught ace thus were unfocused but as he was traveling via a beam of light he felt himself slowing down while the blood vibrated over each other tearing his body from inside thus making his entire body turning back into human form in mid-air which then started forming cracks as blood started collecting itself in bubbles all over his body, soon one after another bubble started busting, Borsalino injured with his status of alive and dead unknown fall into the river.


    Whitebeard bowed a bit showing his appreciation and ordered his man to move back. Leo seeing this tiled his head once watched Garp along with Senguko watching everything with a mouth shaped O. Leo smiled a bit waving his hand then turned back and snapped his fingers one by one Marine''s present started falling. Nanotech inside the body which his spies have planted earlier started either uploading the brains to the world seed of the people which after observation was deemed to be talented and useful in the future making them go through the same torture as Arcnologia did for their loyalty or were killed by simply stopping the flow of blood into their heart or making them brain dead and such.


    Seeing this everyone was taken back and fear slowly started filling their bones when they heard Leo''s scream: You wanted the son of the Pirate king right? Let me introduce myself I''m Gold D. LEO son of GOLD D. ROGER and PORTGAS D. ROUGE, OLDER BROTHER OF PORTGAS D. ACE, MONKEY D. LUFFY the son of Monkey D. Dragon AND SABO the 2nd in the commander of Revolutionary army. Come and touch me if you can. How dare you bully my little brother? Move out I want everyone dead.


    2 sh.i.p.s felled from the Sky while 2 others came out of the water. One by one the cannons around the marine headquarters got destroyed.


    Only about 100 or people on the marine side were left standing when Leo was done. One by one people jumped out of sh.i.p.s which had just arrived Marine forces falling one by one, From the present Shichibukai Dracule Mihawk who was already warned by Shanks to not fight against Leo under any circ.u.mstances refused to fight and went back, Boa Hanc.o.c.k after hearing Leo is the brother of Luffy too refused to fight along meanwhile Doffy wasn''t given any opportunities, one after another attack came onto him without letting him gain any opportunity to fight back soon he left opening in his defense and paid heavy by losing one of his hands and legs. Akainu too suffered the same losing both his hands and legs in the attack, the number of Marine and their forces depleted quickly the people were left alive but without arms or legs. The live feed which Sengoku desperately wanted to cut off was in Leo''s hand who showed the state of Marines to the entire world even the 5 elders who were watching the feed while Arcnologia served them refreshments. Only Garp, Tsuru, and Sengoku were left untouched.


    Leo appeared in front of them and asked: Now tell me was this all worth it?


    Sengoku who was watching everything happen with open mouth hearing Leo turned toward him and saw his smile and fell on his butt and started crawling backward while laughing.


    Garp knew Leo''s behavior from childhood and his overprotectiveness toward his brothers but due to never hearing any news regarding him presumed he was safe somewhere or was not part of Marine/Pirate world anyhow never imaged him to return in this manner.


    Tsuru who was the most intelligent of the lot carefully saw the young boy in his 20sh standing in front of her, the smile on his face was one which would make one feel dread just by seeing this, the expression in his eyes was of boredom as the massacre was nothing more than was just regular thing to him. She gathered all her courage and asked: What do you want from us?


    Leo''s mouth moved up a bit and said: For you 3 the oldest and most knowledgable person regarding Celestic Dragon and their deed to confess everything in front of the whole world.


    Sengoku who was laughing like crazy stopped and screamed: Are you crazy? Kill us we will never do what you want.


    Garp still watched quietly from the sideline seeing this Tsuru said: Sorry but I can''t do this I will fulfill my duty as long as I live.


    Seeing this Leo started laughing, the fight below has long finished, Leo''s forces seeing Leo laugh also started Laughing loudly. Leo replied while smiling: It''s soo cute that you believe that I was asking.


    Leo''s eyes started changing from completely black they turned red soon one dot divided in 2 then 3 then changing the shape completely and a pattern took over. Leo in a low voice said: Kotoamatsukami

 Chapter 49 - First war ends

    Leo started changing memories of all three, making them believe that the celestial dragons must be stopped and that they should tell the truth of the celestial dragons to the whole world even if that the last thing they do.


    Tsuna comes forth first and started talking about the deeds of celestial dragons first in front of the telecast which was going on in front of the whole world there killing, discrimination seeing the lives of others as a bug and such.


    Garp then came forth and started telling the story of his son Monkey D. Dragon who was once a vice-admiral within Marine but one day when Dragon was escorting a celestial dragon somewhere, the celestial dragon saw the wife of Dragon who was at that time 3-month pregnant with dragon''s child taking liking to her, celestial dragon will their usual tendencies wanted to take her as slave in front of Dragon and Garp but Dragon didn''t comply with his wishes and knowing the consequence of attacking a celestial dragon Dragon took his wife and ran away, Celestial Dragon seeing this ordered Garp stop Dragon and bring back his wife for him. Garp who was trapped under the commitment of family and duty chose duty under the pressure from Sengoku attacked Dragon meanwhile the celestial dragon using marine soldiers attacked Dragon''s wife to capture her. Dragon''s wife was a simple Captain in Marine and wasn''t able to hold off the attackers after a while and got injured but was rescued by Dragon who used his Devil fruit to escape.


    Garp after telling this much was crying loudly and after some moment started talking again about how Dragon ran away from the wrath of the celestial dragon back to his hometown and Garp under the order of Sengoku attacked dragon with 2 Admirals but dragon somehow with his allies ran away from there with his injured pregnant wife. Dragon on the run somehow fighting everything alone with his wife managed to be out of reach of marines for 5 months when his wife gave birth to a boy child and died from her previous injuries during childbirth. Filled with Grief and anger Dragon left the child to Garp while starting the Revolutionary army.


    After sometime Sungoku came forward and started the tale of how other beings who didn''t have the blood of Celestial dragons were seen as less than bugs. He started recounting stories of countless incidents were Celestial Dragon''s have destroyed people''s kingdoms or even the entire Islands. Lastly, He started telling the story of Nico Robin who was labeled as the Demon of Ohara, he told the world what Poneglyph and how the people of Ohara was labeled as Criminals who were killed and their entire islands were destroyed for just studying Poneglyph who the Celestial Dragons were interested in. He then started telling everyone that the world government had spies in every kingdom inner court using which they controlled the world entirely and the tales of the countries which have been destroyed recently through World government instructions or involvement.


    After saying there piece everyone all three of them moved back, Leo smiled and came in front of the telecast next, giving a wide grim, he started talking about the new order which is going to work in the world now. Each island will be librated, all traces of world government will be removed and also stating the beginning of the Order of Roger which will work in each kingdom to ensure Justice for all while also stating that Kingdoms will be given back to the citizen and if citizen of the kingdom decides to leave the order then there will be respected. And finally ending the end the live telecast.


    Leo seeing everything end ordered his man to collect all the people within the vicinity who now didn''t have either legs or hands. After collecting everything Leo with his people started there journey back, the amount of casualty on their side was nil while about 7 thousand people on the marine side died. He ordered his people to turn the entire Marineford upside-down look for anything which can be useful. Sangoku corporated and took his people everywhere giving them Devil fruits fighting techniques and such which were hidden in vaults at different locations. He also provided the team with a copy of 9 Poneglyph which he had received from the world government when Nico Robin was captured, world government wanted him to make Robin read and translate them. Collecting Everything Team moved throughout the resident looking into all quarters and everything as there might be some secrets hidden which even Sengoku didn''t know.


    Leo started the feed on the other two feet which attack Kaido and Big Mom, Madara using Helicarrir lighting pulses destroyed all the sh.i.p.s which had foot soldiers who had eaten SMILEs provided by Doffy while Madara ordered 3 sh.i.p.s which contained about 400 people to attack Kaido main ship. Helicarrier from above-using small scale ray pulse on arms and legs on a person attacked Kaido meanwhile Using Sword art people divided his ship into various parts. Kaido and King took there Devil fruit form while Queen and Jack try to fend off the swordsman''s, due to the presence of swordsman''s Kaido and the rest thought that the people attacking them are the rebel forces which had earlier ran away, Not giving any opportunity to anyone One of the subdivision sh.i.p.s which Madara had earlier keep out charged its Pluto based mass destruction weapon and targeted Kaido who in his dragon form and was fighting 20 plus people who attacked him on multiple fronts. The Connon went off creating a huge hole in the middle body of Kaido while Both of the wings of Kings were cut off He was chained in sea stones and nails of sea stones were embedded into his body different parts. All-stars which had taken SMILE''s were all killed while the likes of Queen and Jack were thrown in the ocean in which Sea kings beat them into half-dead state later they were thrown out of the sea and chained in the same manner as the King. Kaido with his wound and seeing all of his force being whipped out decided to take out the gun which was attacking him from above.


    Madara calmly watched the situation and decided that it''s finally time to sweep everything as all the interested person within Kaido forces has been captured order all him man to stop playing around he alone jumped high in the air, Black clouds started forming in the sky Dark mist came out of Madara''s body surrounding him, 2 Huge wings came out of the dark mist lighting fell from the sky and a roar of an ancient beast came forth, Madara in his Hybride Ken Peng came in the view of everyone soon every person within his army started changing in different type of animals many with Arms and wings. Kaido seeing these changes knew that winning now which such force as an opponent is difficult decided that retreating for now is a wise choice so he roared and looked back to order is him but saw his complete forces have been discriminated into ashes, no one was left in fighting condition. Madara charging a water pulse by combining both his wings giving a lighting coating on top of the water pulse attacked Kaido was had turned his back on him to see his forces. Sensing the danger Kaido looked back but before he could realize anything the water pulse hit him, lighting penetrating all defenced while water cutting into his body everywhere it went, with injuries all over its body Kaido had no choice but to turn to human form again Kaido turned in Human form and knew that it will either be death or capture now decided to take down one of the sh.i.p.s at least Aimed at the main ship from which Madara had earlier jumped from. As he was felling, Madara using his tail in Ken Peng formed attacked Kaido, Kaido with injuries and next to no defense wasn''t able to protect himself at all and thus tail banged into him throwing into the sea where Sea kings using all their power Send Kaido into the Sky out of the sea where 20 or so man in there DF form attacked various parts of Kaido. Kaido''s physic as the strongest person alive was well known throughout the world thus Madara not taking any chance decided to take extra measures to ensure Kaido is completely broken. With continuous attacks and injuries, Kaido finally lost consciousness. Madara orders his man to nail Kaido into the Sea stone slab which was then kept inside the seawater tank which was specially created to keep enemies with DF incapacitated.


    Leo saw the fight on Madara sent instructions for Madara to sent a team onto Wano and restore the system and collect all the treasure which can be useful in the future while the rest of the people to move back to the 7 island nation of theirs. Ranju along with his man waited for Leo''s instructions to start the fight. Leo used his EMS to arrive onto the Helicarrier above Ranju''s unit gave directives to start the attack.


    Ranju, unlike Madara, was task with capturing everyone who uses DF within Big mom unit first sent various probes and scanned the entire islands and Identifying all the people who are the target. Ranju using the same strategy as Madara ordered Helicarrier in the sky to attack all the non-DF people and destroy the entire Islands which were useless for them, Big Mom''s base of operation, in its center, and 34 subsidiary islands, arranged roughly in concentric circles. Each subsidiary island was ruled by a member of the Charlotte Family as its minister. Ranju erased 29 islands from existence while 5 islands were severely damaged. The attack was coordinated and done via AI which was created for targetting specific targets thus the 5 islands which survived only remained because some use was seen from them, Ranju instructed 5 of the 11 subdivision ship he had to go and sweep through the 5 islands before the next part of the plan happened. Big mom reacted in the same manner as was expected She instructed all the forces under her to attack Ranju, She joined in the fight by riding on Zeus. Leo seeing Big mom joining the fight decided to join the fight too instructed Ranju to end the forces of Big mom as fast as possible while he will take care of big mom.


    Ranju in response instructed all sh.i.p.s to remain on the stand by, Big Mom rushed to the front and saw the forces which had attacked her have remain still even after seeing her got more pissed and more anger increased her speed. Ranju was standing in front of everyone on the front deck of the ship moved back. space in front of him started breaking Leo calmly stepped out of space. Big mom seeing someone new appear out of nowhere became more cautious and decreased her speed. Leo raised his hand and hundreds of golden circles opened in the sky behind his back, Chains, and chains made out of Sea stones rotating at high speed came out of them, Seeing this Big mom knew that the fight won''t be so simple stopped at her spot waiting for her forces to catch up, going alone now would just bring more harm than good.


    Leo not waiting anymore motioned his hand chains rushed to the direction of Big mom, Big Mom using her sword Napoleon try deflected the first chain but chain moved only a little while chipping away a little bit of Napoleon, one by one chain''s keep on coming chipping away Napoleon away soon Big mom realized that chain''s target was not her but her sword the person controlling the chain''s wanted to destroy part of her soul and weaken her. She focused all her Haki into Napoleon wanting to make it invincible, Leo seeing this smiled and instructed Ranju who was standing behind him to go do his thing. The Main battleship started moving and Leo started flying his eyes started changing with EMS becoming Rinnegan, Big mom frustrated with constant defense and seeing her enemy move forward used her other Homies Prometheus and started using its heat to melt the upcoming Chain''s of sea stone seeing thus Leo smiled and waved his hand a bit Hundreds of golden circle like the one behind him opened around Big mom with chain''s made of Sea stones clad in Armament Haki colored dark red color completely covering them. Seeing this Big mom wanted to move back a bit but before she could react to chains attacked her from all angles, having no way to defend herself big mom left with nothing Infused her body completely in Haki. Chains upon chain come forth destroying her Naponelon completely while some chains went inside Zeus the cloud soul entity which Big mom was riding taking out every bit of electricity it had while Prometheus freaking out loudly seeing the fate of his companion, Chain''s directly didn''t attack Big mom''s body as she had expected but started binding her legs and Hands. Leo using his Kamui technique appeared in front of Big mom and used copy magic and copied Whitebeard GURA GURA NO MI fruit creating cracks right in front of big mom''s large body, the space cracked and crack started spreading in front of her body. With chains binding her, Big mom becomes unable to use her DF or moved could only suffer from the full force at such a close range.


    With the full force up close banging against her breaking every bone in her body big mom became completely useless. Chains with giving her any moment started dragging her into the sea. A part of chains was taken by the sea king and then Big mom was dragged into the deepest part of the sea. Prometheus which was present in his blazing sun form screamed and screamed but could do anything due to the presence of sea stones which were binding him soon after some dept completely evaporated into smaller and smaller states and finally turning into nothing. Leo in the meantime went back to the Helicarrier and observed the battle between Ranju division and the rest of big mom pirates.

 Chapter 50 - Order of Roger

    Ranju leads a simple charge, Big mom forced had around 400 pirates in it many of who didn''t have DF. With his 1100 men, the battle was easily won. With No casualties, Ranju division returned. Leo seeing the situation under control. Leo went back to his division. Reports of both the forces which went to capture Blackbeard and Impel down came in with both teams completing their missions.


    Luffy who was at Impel down was already informed about the situation by one of Leo''s subordinated decided to come with them. Meanwhile, the rest of the world went into chaos. With most of the Marine forces gone everyone wanted to take advantage, Arcnologia who was assigned under the five elder was given command over the marine forced by the elders who then at first decided to regroup the rest of the forces at Mary Geoise under the pretext of protecting the Celestial dragon as priority which was approved by the Elders who also ordered all the CP units to report in. Leo got the report of everything via Hope which overlooked all situations. Leo orders all his forces to retreat to the seven island nation of theirs where future directions will be given, Meanwhile, all the probes which were left on top of each island were given weaponization permission to kill anyone who disturbs the peace order thus putting limitations to Chaos which was happening all around the world.


    Soon all his forces gather and Leo announced the list of islands where 2 members of the force would be sent to who will ensure peace on the Islands and introduce and democracy, education system and such to the normal people there. After the complete survey of the world, Leo had estimated 956 islands are present on the planet which were divided into 2 parts by the red line, first ending at Mary Geoise and then journey to final island Rafteal. Only around 500 of the island were inhabited by people with only 400 or so were Marine were present with 170 or so being part of it forming world government while the island which was not part were either hidden or were in such state which didn''t interest the World government but still have some influence in them in one way or another. Thus 1000 member of the alliance were dispatched with criteria which would be best suited for the island and its condition. Language difference was also cracked by the probes which had deciphered it while observing the islands for years.


    After dealing with the matter of public, Leo instructed the remaining 1080 to formulate a team of 3 which will work on the next part of the plan.


    The 6 surrounding Islands were connected via bridge to the center Island and then Weaponized with Nuclear warheads created via Arc of embodiment. The members of Marine, Kaido, Big mom and Blackbeard forces that were captured were hanged from these bridges in such a manner that they were submerged into the water and were under the constant watch of sea kings from beneath while their DF power was useless in the water and without either leg or hands to do something making escape utterly impossible. Instructions were sent to both the shadow team with CP unit and Arcnologia in Marine to let all the forces infest with nanotech. the secondary shadow unit was also sent into the Mary Geoise who were then using Arcnologia authority placed under Celestial dragons directly as their servants, the secondary shadow unit infected all the celestial dragons with the unit with Nanotech, Leo''s aim was simply to end the conflict in one go he created 10 backups using various weapons and such in preparation of the final fight as he didn''t know what to expect from the lesser god of this world or its control over the heavenly energy which was one of the main reason''s why he didn''t eat any devil fruit, He didn''t want to have any drawbacks while fighting the final battle.


    The 2 person team went on to each island and multiplied the probes in the sky by 5 and introduced the Order of Roger, All kingdoms were given 2 choices Follow the order or Fall due to order. Many kings and big pirates in there arrogance chose to fight the order believing that 2 people send before them didn''t have the capabilities to fight their entire nation or armies but even before they could reject or surprise attack the 2 people team, the probes in the sky erased the entire Kingdom via Nuclear weapon. Islands were whipped out of existence by the probes.


    Leo had neither the patients nor reason to negotiate with people. The probe was present there for more than 10 years or so thus Leo using various AI who was in charge of the Probes knew the value of each island and nature of the people on it. The people who were found to be useful or somewhat innocent such as Children''s and such were collected and secured by the two men team whose main mission was such. Out of 500 islands, around 300 after watching the fate of the Marines and with the help of Whitebeard and Sharks who acted as peacekeepers agreed to join and come under the banner of the order. 120 islands which were in conflict in some manners and refused were destroyed with innocent people being rescued. 80 Islands that were hidden from the worlds that even the Marine didn''t know about were negotiated with and made to join the order.


    Meanwhile, The five elders under the command of IM instructed all their CP units to go and infiltrate Leo''s forces in some manner but any sh.i.p.s which would leave the Mary Geoise were destroyed by the Helicarrier which Leo had placed around the entire Mary Geoise trapping it into a bubble. Luffy and ace were sent to train under shark and whitebeard respectively. Revolutionary forces also stopped all its operations to watch the work of the order. IM or the lesser god due to his impositions and hunger of power order the Elders to find a way to find and end Leo and his forces to re-establish the order of world government.


    Vagapunk, the top scientist of the world government was also put under the hunt list by Leo, Sengoku under the effect of Leo''s powers revealed that Vagapunk was kept in secret within the boundaries of Mary Geoise under the constant eye of the elders and thus was hidden away from even him. Arcnologia was instructed to look into the matter of Vagapunk.


    The forces of order took about 2 months to complete the formation and then making nations join it. Leo completing all preparations decide that the time for the final war is here. Order all his men to regroup at the 7 nation island while also sending orders to whitebeard and Sharks to gather all their forces. Whitebeard and Sharks knowing and seeing Leo''s work of bringing order decided to join in. All the person who was either deemed weak were send back to the eastern sea by Leo which included Luffy and Ace.


    Leo planned everything to the last detail 3 person team will go after an individual member of the enemy forces. Whitebeard and Shark forces will act as the first wave of attack which will draw the enemy out while Secondary wave consisted of Automata who will be the suicide boom squad of the force that will render and work to destroy all which are deemed as more dangerous during the first wave. Then the forces of Leo will start attacking.


    With the battle of the Mary Geoise approaching All the alliance forces of Shark and Whitebeard were instructed to be gathered near the formal Marine Headquarters which was destroyed in the first war. Leo increased the number of Insight Helicarrier from 21 to 46 which were already modified as per the previous models. 10 Helicarriers were already present around Mary Geoise forming a bubble. 1080 personal were divided into 360 units which were then assigned to individual Helicarrier. Meanwhile, 900 members were assigned under the divided into 3 units of 250 under Leo, 300 under Madara and 350 under Ranju who will attack by sea using the main battlesh.i.p.s which were used in Marineford and other wars while 33 subdivisional sh.i.p.s were given to Automata who will use them to fight off the enemy forces.


    As per the information Arcnologia had provided Leo, the forces which were hidden in the Holy Land Marijoa numbered around 9000 strong while Sengoku also informed him that Elders were also in possession of one of the ancient weapon Uranus which is capable of destroying any island it is used on. Arcnologia had also sent information regarding the weapon describing it as a canon of the sort which gathers heavily energy from the surrounding and releases it in focus destroying everything which it hits.


    Leo instructed all his Helicarrier forces to move out and gather within the Helicarrier which were already present there while he along with his 3 main battlesh.i.p.s and Automata forces moved to Marinford to join Whitebeard and Shark forces.

 Chapter 51 - Fate of the world Part. I

    While Leo was moving toward the Marinford, his ship was intercepted by Dragon who along with his commanders wanted to talk to Leo.


    In the meeting, Dragon expressed the desire to join in the final battle which Leo had invited Whitebeard and Sharks to join in. Dragon using the spies within there forces knew they were working with Leo and were planning an all-out attack on Holy Land Genoise where the celestial dragon''s resided.


    Leo at first told Dragon to send back anyone who can''t even use basic Haki back for safety and they told him to gather all his forces at Marineford.


    Meanwhile, Arcnologia was offered 3 DF from one he could pick one. the three DF were such as Kiri Kiri no Mi which can turn one into Mist while the user can also create and control Mist, Tsuchi Tsuchi no Mi who allows users to create, control and become one with the earth thus making it possible for the user to control the area within his reach fully and lastly a Paramecia type fruit Barans Barans no Mi which give the user full control over the direction of Gravity. Arcnologia at first wanted to reject the DF as Leo have expressly told him to not eat any but to do his duties as the Marine Commander and Main priority mission of seeing loyal to the elders, Arcnlogia decided to chose Tsuchi Tsuchi no Mi. The elders under the orders of IM personally started training Arcnologia. All 46 of his Helicarrier positioned themselves in the strategic position around the Holy land meanwhile Whitebeard and Shark alliance also regroup, the instruction let for them were such that they were to gather all forces from all kingdom which were interested and powerful enough for the attack on the Holy land Geoise all races were invited to take part in the war no one was forced, fish-Man led by formal Shichibukai Jimbe, Longneck tribe lead by their war hero Amura, Longleg tribe lead by a council of 3 elders, Kuja lead by the formal Shichibukai Boa Hanc.o.c.k and elder Gloriosa, Giants lead by there formal Kings Dorry and Brogy, Tontatta Tribe lead by Torto Corps Warrior Leo, Shardia lead by Wyper, Mink tribe lead by Inuarashi and Nekomamushi the duo guardian of Zou, a group members from both the three-eye tribe and Kinokobito and lastly Wotans represented by a pirate group captain by the name of Sharul. The human fraction was represented by various parties such as Whitebeard, Sharks, Dragon each representing their interests and forces. While kingdoms sent their own representatives and forces.


    Leo instructed his Automata forces which numbered more than 3000 to divided into 3 division, one via 33 subdivisional sh.i.p.s while one will be present in Helicarrier and launch the second wave attack from Sky and last division were instructed to travel underwater with the group of Sea kings till the gate of Holy Land of Genoise and open the gate for the invasion, the undercover CP units were instructed to sabotage and destroy all means of defense which are present at the gate. With Leo''s years of observation on Mary Geoise and using various means no information what so ever regarding the attack or the force was made known to anyone within the Holy Land.


    Arcnologia was under constant observation of both elders and the IM under the pretense of training of DF, IM used various methods to influence the mind of Arcnologia and make him utterly loyal mindless doll of his, but due to strong mental fortitude build by years of torture and with Hope''s guidance was immune to all effort of IM. Arcnologia during training was able to see the real self of IM, the body of IM was such that every part was colored in a different color, one arm was larger then the other while Height was more than 11 ft tall, Face consisted of 5 eyes which were located all around his head each with different color Cornea, no hairs on the head were present. Teeth were similar to that of a shark while the neck was a bit longer than a normal human, the clothes were completely white as in Shirt pants and Shoes.


    Hope transmitted the visual to Leo who chose to not see it as he didn''t know the extent of the power of eyes on IM head. Leo using the disk given to Whitebeard and Sharks instructed that all units should start moving toward Holy Land Geoise. Whitebeard gathering everyone started his journey with about 5000 strong men, Leo with his 3 main battlesh.i.p.s waited near the Holy land to regroup with the men and start the attack. Meanwhile, the shadow unit which was assigned to Celestial dragon 2 months ago were sent instructions to clean all the forces near the main seaway through which celestial dragon travel.


    Soon all the forces gathered in front of the pathway of Holy Land Geoise, with Leo''s main battleship in the lead and Ranju''s Battleship at the end, the journey of the mountain climbing started.


    The inside secondary shadow unit which worked under the celestial dragon killed all the guards, while the first shadow unit within the CP sabotaged all the weapons. Leo along with the alliance easily climbed the Holy land walls with his sh.i.p.s meanwhile 200 of the Automata forces due to their small size passed through the gates of Holy land port where Sh.i.p.s and such were kept and secretively opened the gate for Leo and the forces. Seeing the plan work completely fine, Leo instructed both his shadow unit to go back and mix again with the forces of the enemy.


    With all the forces gathered right beside Mary Geoise, Leo stood up from his chain walked to the front of his Ship, His eyes started changing from completely back to red and then finally changing into Rinnegan, Leo slowly started flying into the sky. His body turned to the alliance force while all 3 main battlesh.i.p.s submerged underwater surprising everyone.


    Leo started speaking slowly but his voice was heard all over the world on each Island, A huge projection opened up all over all the islands via probes present in the sky on-screen was Leo standing in the Sky, he slowly in a loud voice started talking which was translated via probes in kingdom''s which used different language: My name is Gold D. Leo, Son of Gold. D. Roger the formal king of Pirates. I have long since found the treasure my father left behind in the name of One-piece for all to seek. I previously showed the world truth about its rulers the celestial Dragons and today I give this opportunity to every one of All kind races to seek Justice for the suffering you and your loved one had to go through for centuries due to them. I, Leo have let you all gather every working fighting body and brought you all in front of your assurers. This is now your Moment to stand up for your race, for your loved ones, for your self. This is your Justice. If you today you chose to coward behind walls and hide in fear or chose to run away from a fight then I ask you How will you face the future? This is not just an individual''s fight but the fight of your past future and present. So Stand up, Stand straight fight with everything you have. You can die anytime, but living takes true courage.


    The screen turned to the alliance forces and their battleship, Leo in the meantime disappeared using Kamui and appeared on the Helicarriers.


    The alliance forces worked fast and started leaving there sh.i.p.s and started destroying everything with the sight.


    IM in the meanwhile instructed Arcnologia to gather all the forces and kill everyone. CP units were also involved to fight against key players which were identified such as Whitebeard Sharks Dragon and their commandos. Arcnologia moved his forces out in the open the first wave was of normal common soldiers to slow down the forces of the enemy and divide them, secondly, the Haki and Rokushiki were placed strategically to divide and reduce the number of enemies, final line of defense was left to 5 elders who protected IM and the main building. The world government forces with the forces of leftover Marine were around 9000 almost twice the number of Alliance forces thus making it easier for the Arcnologia to fight them off.


    As per the orders of Leo, the force of alliance only consisted of the top warrior of each race thus casualties on their side were only 1/6 compare to the world government side. Seeing this Leo instructed the launch of the second wave.


    The second wave was a surprise attack on world government, Armed with laser technology of massive destructions Automata swept through the World government forces. One force came from under the ground surprising the enemy force meanwhile 33 sh.i.p.s came out of the water with each launching 10 Automata armed with different weapons made out of Sea stones and such. World government forces were reduced by almost half the number with only 4800 or so of the 9000 remainings, CP units were all destroyed by Alliance forces while many were assassinated by the shadow unit which was assigned in the same unit as them.


    Leo in the meantime went forth and collected all the celestial dragons into his dimension of Kumai and freed all the prisoners who then either joined in with the alliance and started fighting the world government forces or ran away from the Holy land Geoise. Third Automata unit from the sky also joined in via surprise attack destroying more than 1/2 of the enemy forces reducing them to 1000 or so. Many weren''t killed by the Automata''s attacked but were forcefully uploaded into the world seed using the nanotech which was planted earlier.


    Seeing the number reduced Leo decided to join in the battle, announced all the alliance force to retreat. The Insight Helicarrier above started raining Light laser beams onto enemy forces, seeing this Arcnologia order the retreat of all Marine forces.


    The buildings where the celestial dragon lived were all made out of metal rooftop which was constructed using various material mixed in with sea stone making them incredibly strong but the light beam from Helicarrier easily destroyed everything. Elders seeing the condition ordered the Arcnologia to retreat to the inner circular building which was made out of unknown material and was the palace of IM and main official headquarters of world government where even the celestial dragon would have to behave properly.


    Both Alliance forces and Automata unit retrieved, the space outside the inner circle cracked and Leo came out of it with gunbai on his back. One by one Helicarrier came into being, the three main battlesh.i.p.s also came out of the water.


    The inner-circle gates which were locked up opened a bit and a huge cannon came through the gap pointing in Leo''s direction, a white beam of light pulsed through the cannon directly at Leo who used Copy magic along with the gunbai on his back to defect the attack and counter it at the same time, the cannon blow up to pieces along with the wall of the inner-circle which Helicarrier light rays beams were unable to pass through.


    Leo shaking his Gunbai while one by one the team of 3 appear behind him looked at Arcnologia with CP-00 member who was standing in front of the World government forces behind them said in a low cold audible voice: Are you ready to dance?

 Chapter 52 - Arcnologias Role

    Without waiting for any signal or anything the CP-00 member standing next to Arcnologia suddenly attacked him, while rest of the CP units started attacking the world government forces disrupting the flow of World government and making their plan useless, Leo along with his forces also attacked and the battle of inner-circle of begin, Leo secretly gave instructions to Autonomous units to go search for Poneglyph, on logan side were about 336 teams with each team working in team of three while 1000 more stayed behind and covered all the areas which required assistance. Top 5 fighters from Leo''s side were sent to fight off the 5 elders of world government, meanwhile, Leo stayed behind waiting for the main character to show up, One of the Autonomous units reported in regarding the situation of the Poneglyphs while another unit took over all the valuables such as DF or any other ancient important artifact which could be found.


    Leo, after killing Kaido, big mom and joining hands with whitebeard sharks and Dragon along with his efforts, had 26 Poneglyph out of 30 he was missing just one important clue regarding the fixed location of the rift and to succeed finding them was very important thus Leo started using Helicarrier to search for any material composition of Poneglyph within the boundary of Holy land.


    A small creepy voice of laughter took over the entire battlefield followed by a shout: You peasants still have the will to come here, Let me show you what living in hell truly means.


    Seeing the arrival of the main guest, Leo signaled his people to move back, the loss on his side was next to nil with only 5 people injured while the world government side the survivors were next to nothing, only 200 or so remained standing which included the 4 elders, Arcnologia and some high up workers of world government.


    Leo taking Gunbai out of his back waved it in front hundreds of golden circles opened covering the battlefield while 2840 members of his forces behind his back.


    Everyone could see from this point that the world government was about to end when suddenly the building of the innermost layers started tearing apart as if someone was coming out into being, A giant towering over Leo stood in front of Leo, the giant was made out of pure sea stones making it impenetrable while it was equipped with lasers and various weaponry, seeing this the Leo and his forces started laughing, Arcnologia using hope informed Leo that this was Vagapunk who has to build this giant as the final layer of protection Holy land if something happens, Vagapunk lives and works inside giant making it impossible for anyone to either disturb him or attack him in any manner.


    Leo using Kamui arrived in front of the giant and sent it to his dimension were Vagapunk and his giant robot won''t be able to do anything but just wait to die. His forces attacked the last of World government officials while Helicarrier gave Leo the exact locations were Poneglyph which Autonomous unit copied and sent to him, with help of Hope and the probes which Leo had around the world, Hope quickly analyzed the information and found Leo''s guess to be correct, the final island at the end of the world contained the tear which Gold. D. Roger found but was unable to do anything about with feeling powerless he decided to make Poneglyph popular to tell the world the story about the tear and existence of gods. Due to his fear for his loved once he wasn''t able to personally announce the truth and left it written in stone in hope someone stronger and capable would find them later, with his plan in motion he announced the world regarding the One piece a treasure greatest in the world right before his death putting a bait for the entire world to fight over and dedicate their life for.


    Leo receiving the information smiled and ordered all his men to fall back, Arcnologia along with 3 elders and 80 members of the World government left Leo attacked them using chains from the golden circles in the sky. Under the constant attack of the chains, the 80 members of the world government died soon, leaving only elders and Arcnologia. seeing this Leo was confused as to why IM hasn''t shown himself up yet when the entire world government was about to end. Feeling something wrong, Leo throws out all the celestial dragons which he had collected in his dimension out, feeling that something was wrong with the situation Leo started attacking each celestial dragon with his chains which were made of sea stones and infused with Devil''s lover magic. Under the attack and lack of protection from anyone, most of the Celestial dragons either died or were badly injured but Leo continued to attack everyone regardless of their age size or s.e.x.


    His suspicion turned into reality when a small girl which if he had to guess was around 10 years old caught his chains and throw them back. Seeing this Leo stopped his attack while the Little girl jumped back in front of the elders and Arcnologia. The shape of the little girl started changing, the girl turned into a giant with 4 hands 5 eyes and a huge mouth, the body parts were made out of different races, a burst of small creepy laughter came from the giant: Seems like you knew about my existence hahaha then you should also know that you are about to die, don''t you?


    With that, a giant arm fully infused in Haki came forth and attacked Leo. Leo''s eyes started changing from EMS to Rinnegan at a fast speed, the arm which was about to bang into Leo stopped and then the entire body of the IM flew away and a low voice was heard all over the world: Shinra Tensei


    A huge skeleton arm came out of the ground and little by little the full skeleton body came into being Susano in full form colored completely purple stood in front of everyone and slowly the color started to change into dark red with Haki being completely infused into it. A huge crack appeared in the sky and a giant Gunbai came out. the Gunbai was made out of sea stone infused in devil''s lover and had a huge tail which ended with a scythe at the end. Meanwhile, a team of 20 seriously attacked each remaining individual, 2 of the 3 surviving elders members died quickly with the last remaining member saved by Arcnologia. Leo had already informed everyone about Arcnologia and his use in the final stage of the plan thus the fight between the Arcnologia and the force members was just for pretense where both didn''t go for the kill but prolonged the fight. Meanwhile, the giant which had been thrown away came back in the shape of a dragon itself, and attack Leo, who upon seeing the dragon form was delighted as that dragon form would mean that IM had eaten some form of DF to make it so.


    The dragon form of IM was unique as it consisted of all types of elements into it while also was fully coated in golden colored Haki. IM could not be harmed by any weapon or element as they would either be deflected from his body or just be absorbed by him, making all kinds of DF attacks useless and effective.


    Leo and the giant dragon battle raged on, Leo knowing the involvement of Haki which he considered was in it''s the purest form due to IM practicing it for more than 700 years throw away his Gunbai and took IM head-on and sent instructions to Arcnologia to use all his DF powers to reduce the size of Holy Land Genoise throwing IM into the ocean. Meanwhile, Arcnologia who fighting/ pretending to protect the last elder received the final plan took the last elder and jumped just behind IM, pretending to come under his protection.


    IM had 5 eyes all around his head giving him a complete view of all angles around his, seeing the elder and Arcnologia IM didn''t worry at all. and focused on fighting with Leo.


    Leo in his Haki infused Sunsano form was losing the fight with IM in Golden Haki infused dragon form, the golden Haki was very superior to the dark red colored Haki Leo had and was easily able to damage it, Leo instructed all his forces to back down for now then attack with everything when he signals.


    Arcnologia placed both his hands on the ground and focusing all his powers made the entire red line into a slope toward the new world. Surprising everyone, Leo taking this opportunity used everything from Shinra Tensei to his entire Haki clad Susano to throw IM into the sea, Leo along with IM both fell into the sea making IM immobilized while Leo continuously attacked IM''s body which turned back into a giant from his dragon form, various Sea king which Leo has strategically left behind also attacked IM who was still clad in his golden Haki form.


    Meanwhile, on the outside, everything happened so quickly that others couldn''t react, Arcnologia surprised attacked the elder who was supported himself by a sword cutting one of his arms, Meanwhile, the forces also attacked the elder and took him as a hostage, the rest of the world nobles which were left behind by the Leo were also seized and imprisoned by the force who then moved back into Helicarrier waiting for the signal.


    Underwater a battle raged on, sea kings who had been sleeping for centuries were wakened up and IM was continuously attacked Leo also used chains infused in devil''s lover to build him.


    Time went by soon after 4 months of continuous attack by Leo, the sea kings, the main battleship and sub-divisional battlesh.i.p.s which were modeled after Pluton the golden Haki on IM broke and thus finally allowing the alliance to injuring him. Leo and others seeing the opportunity increased the attacks turning IM body into the worse and worse state possible both the arms and legs of IM were ripped off by sea kings while Leo inserted various chains made out of sea stone in and out of his body, With IM finally under control Leo along with rest of the sea king forces started their journey toward the final island of Laugh Tale.

 Chapter 53 - The domain of beginning

    Sea King and the rest arrived at the vicinity close to the final island where Leo stayed behind and sea kings dragged the wounded body of IM into the tear.


    The middle of the sky was a singular tear with an arm made of light hanging from it various rays of light were binding the arm when IM was brought near the tear, rays of lights raced through the tear, tearing the body of the wounded IM, a ball made out of light was covered by various light rays from the tear and dragged back into the tear.


    The sea kings through the body of the IM directly into the tear while Leo signaled all his men to attack into the light hand at one making, to close the tear in sky removing the hand was necessary. Leo had various plans in place for this particular task. All his Helicarrier, force members and firework which he had built on his 7 island nation and in probe form charged themself.


    The IM soul ball on making contact with the tear started dissolving, a huge energy wave of air passed in the circle, Leo waved his hand all his forces started their attacked taking their nature, all the attacks dissolved or got absorbed by the hand, on seeing this Leo waved his non-DF personal to infuse their Haki and attack, but just as they got close to the tear a huge lighting wave came and attack them, Leo waved his hand again and the golden circles opened and chains came into being, the chains infused in devil''s loved directly repelled the white lighting wave and reaped around the light hand and slowly lifting the hand, seeing this Leo''s fasten the process of putting the hand back.


    Just as when the hand completely went in, a huge white light wave like lighting came and attacked Leo. Leo''s speed was high but not higher than Lightning thus the Light invaded his body taking one of his arms while also damaging his soul. Holding onto his entire will Leo with all his power throws back the entire arm back into the tear.


    The tear with a loud bang voice closed itself. Seeing this Leo closed his eyes, his soul was damaged he could connect to Hope his control over his body and powers were slowly failing. His forces quickly surrounded him but one by one they started felling on the ground. They were reuploaded back into the world seed on their own, Leo wasn''t able to control anything when suddenly he heard a low voice: Come into the tear.


    Leo very distinctively remembered this voice as this was the high god who gave him the reincarnation and the wish. Listening to the voice Leo gathered all his will throw away the Gunbai on his back and slowly started crawling toward space in the front once again torn, slowly with Gunbai support Leo walked into the tear.


    He found himself in front of the same ball of bright light he had previously met before he could speak anything space behind his started cracking again and an old man came out. Leo knew this person as death, he has previously met him in the world of Harry potter.


    White light started changing into a human form and turned into a child around the 6-8-year-old body. Space again cracked and a huge giant came in.


    The space in front started changing and three simple chairs came into being, Leo''s body to recover completely giving him enough stand to strength.


    Leo lying or more like floating in the mid-air state repositioned himself.


    The old man started talking first: You were near your death as death it was my role to reap your soul. You were one of the first who was allowed to reincarnate with memories so I have brought you here to listen about your adventures.


    The child while laughing asked: So how was your adventure? Did you enjoy yourself completely?


    Leo calmly without fear as he already knew he was dying answered: Yes lord I enjoyed my time on adventures very much I was able to find the love of my life thanks to that.


    Child: Good Good, I have seen the lesser god making you clean up after them and was very angry as the wish was meant for you to enjoy your life to the fullest not work for others. I''m as what can be best described as the God of Samsara in your human language, you have already met Death and this is God of Void. We are all three of the 4 primal Ancestral Gods after which the rest of the gods originated or were made to bring balance to the world. Death and I were interested in listening to your adventure.


    Leo kneeling and bowing: I thank the lord for the kind thoughts. My adventure is what can be described as nothing short of distraction after losing the love of my life. After losing Asuna, I just focused on gathering and working for the god. Hoping one day I will be able to meet her again.


    Death seeing Leo''s humbleness in front of their face and spouting lies started laughing loudly: I was right about you. You''re very interesting indeed. I can now see why he took an interest in you.


    The child also chuckled and continued: We can already read your mind, don''t you remember our last meeting you lied to me back then too. Hahaha


    The third man the giant just seat theirs without paying any attention to the conversation as if everything going on didn''t have any relation with him.


    Leo who was kneeling slowly stood up and cleaned his pants which were dirty from the earlier fight and replied: You used me as a Janitor to clean after the messes which your sub-ordinates the lesser gods made took away the love of my life. And now from what I understand is bring me here to make me beg you 3 to save me or something? Sorry to disappoint you but I have heard someone once that "You can die anytime, but living takes true courage". Living without freedom inside the clutches of your hands is no way acceptable to me. The lighting bolt which hit me is also a mystery to me as I was doing Heaven''s work so why would it attack me without reason after I have already completed my task.


    The boy stopped laughing and said in a serious voice: There are many worst fates a person can have then dying boy. We can do many things to you such as just erase you or more like take your beloved Asuna''s soul as a hostage and make you do our bidding or maybe making you into a mindless body of ours.


    Leo hearing this started laughing like crazy and replied: Do you all think I''m stupid or something? You can read my mind true, then don''t you already know that I know about you guys'' involvement in Asuna''s death? I secretly injected nanotech inside her body which should have changed her genetic structure but something prevented it. At first, I thought It was world laws that were preventing me so I decided on the long route and created a cure for Huntington''s disease but to my surprise, even that failed. Now you want to use her again to control me Good luck with that.


    Hearing this everyone including the giant started laughing loudly.


    This time the giant spoke: Truly interesting. Courageous, Smart, a big Liar and have a will of steel, I understand why he was interested in you. I''m Void, the leader of the primordial god''s court. Do you remember seeing this person?


    Different color beams come forth and collected forming an Imposing Eternal majestic figure with arrogance pride on his face with unparalleled power aura coming for it which gave anyone who looked at him a feeling that the entire world''s fate depends on his mood with one hand the figure and destroy the world or create a new one.


    Leo seeing this was confused. He looked very careful but wasn''t able to think of anyone.


    Seeing this, the giant who along with the rest were watching Leo carefully spoke: How about now?


    The light beam changed again. The figure turned from the majestic warrior into a common person and then finally into an old man.


    Seeing the appearance, the realization hit Leo the figure standing in front of him was his master. The only master he had in all the worlds he has been in. The one who taught him Devil''s lover.


    Death spoke this time: The one you''re looking at is God of Destruction, the last 4th member of Ancestral God''s court.


    Leo slowly realized something and moved his hand to access his dimension to bring out the enclosed seal space were he had kept the body of an old man along with his sculptor but it didn''t work. Confused he looked at the three old monsters who were giving him a creepy smile.


    The boy started speaking: Do you realize now?


    Leo still confused shake his head indicating no. The giant spoke this time: He, your master had decided to make you his successor before passing on. And this is the very reason we saved you.


    Leo went quiet and started understanding his situation. He was first given a wish through which he could travel the worlds and learn new things but later was forced into becoming a servant of the gods, and now he was selected as a successor of a god? and the god in question is also a god of beginning which by their very name "destruction" should become of the most powerful being. He became more confused after thinking about it.


    The giant seeing this waved his hand and a chair come forth for Leo to seat on.


    Leo patiently took the seat and waited for the storytime to begin.

 Chapter 54 - The domain of beginning Part. 2

    There were 3 main reasons why Leo was taking a seat and listening to the primal gods. First, He was completely powerless anyone of them could erase his memories and make him a servant of their again or better yet erase his existence. Second, Asuna was involved, Leo didn''t care about whether he died or not but with the hope to find answers to what happened to Asuna Leo decided to listen and lastly, the gods or entity seating in front of him were not entirely simple Void was an ever-expanding vortex not willing to wait for anyone, while Death ruled and judged everyone so if they wanted to take their precious times and talk to him he felt it was much better to listen to them.


    A table with tea and wine came out of nowhere in front of Leo. Death and the child drunk tea while Giant took wine for himself Leo wasn''t offered any so he chose to seat quietly.


    The Giant/void started talking: You as his successor were the reason we took an interest in you and were observing you. Let in begin by telling you the Story of the creation of Gods. In the beginning, there was nothing but energy, No one knows what kind of energy it was where it was held or where it originated from. The energy was is the origin of all energy Omniforce, Ki, Chakra everything. The concepts such as space-time, void death didn''t exist by then over time the energy which was present everywhere due to some reason started condensing into a singular point leaving behind the space it was in thus creating the very first concept of Void, leading to my birth. The energy which was slowly condensing into a ball was anything about a simple energy force it coalesced onto itself causing destruction which tore everything such as the space it was in and such thus leading to the creation of your Master God of Destruction. The energy ball over time became smaller and smaller giving birth to the real only True entity which can be regarded as creator and ruler of everything, you human also know about him and call him One above all. One above all over time gained consciousness and started created others being the first being he created was Death, God of creation. The power who One above all ruled with was the power of love which is the true source of all form of energy everyone.


    In the beginning, everything was at peace, God of destruction and God of creation worked as the two sides of a coin creating balance in everything but one day the balance changed God of creation trapped into the very primal source of One above all and created Lesser gods based on the divinity of ous indirectly trying to take over control of law on which the entire worlds of his were created on. Seeing this imbalance in the system one above all created him, God of Samsara. The god of samara was very special he had control over the matters of life and it''s creation thus directly putting a restriction on the God of creation removing the concept of true immortality from the lesser god. While what happened next was the reason why the conflict between the gods started, the god of creation using the primal source of love itself started creating souls, which were then used by the lesser gods to power themselves over. Your, old human world has a concept of Greek gods whose power was based on the worship, don''t you? Similarly like that. Using humans and other souls as a battery to drive more powers and enhance themself. God of destruction who at that time decided to visit the human world as a mortal saw their situation decided to wave a war on all beings. Creations were destroyed erased from their beings. Us the older primal gods were also dragged in the conflict, With his war hammer, God of destruction fought everyone. I being one of the first-ever beings had to intervene to save to reality from being erased thus an accord was created between the gods. 3 of us along with God of destruction would stay out of matters of lesser gods and won''t directly affect the world laws by which individual multiverse was ruled while on lesser gods and God of creation side they won''t affect the lives of common people giving them free will and removing the chains of oppression thus preventing any lesser gods from even entering into any Multiverse worlds. Do you understand so far?


    Leo was quietly listening to the tale and was wondering what does all this have to do with him and why did God of destruction make him his successor when God of destruction from the story was already an immoral and one of the most powerful beings.


    The giant continued: Yes this story has nothing to do with you but the next part is. You see God of destruction was one of those people who appeared cold on the outside but was warm-hearted from the inside. During his travel in the mortal world, he met a woman. He similarly loved her like you loved Asuna. Their feeling was natural and pure for each other earning the irk of one of the lesser gods of that world. God of destruction who was at that time was pretending to be a mortal seal all his powers and lived a simple life with the love of his life, what can guess what happened next can''t you?


    Leo: The lesser god took away his love?


    The giant smiling: Yes when one day God of destruction was away working, the lesser god along with his worshipers abducted the mortal girl r.a.p.ed and killed her. God of destruction who upon his return wasn''t able to find her thus released his divinity and rushed into the world of lesser gods.


    Death started talking at this point: I didn''t know the identity of the women nor her connection to the God of destruction put her in the cycle of reincarnation. By the time God of destruction came forth to claim her soul she was already gone, everything about her was destroyed and erased. Angry over himself and everything God of destruction started the war.


    The young boy: The war went on for many years, void only managed to stop the god of destruction by using her reality being erased fact as the argument. Thus finally ending the war.


    The giant: This is where you come in. Your soul was created by the god of samsara on a whip and request of a lesser god Gaia. With the blessing given to you, many of the lesser gods turned their eyes toward you because you could directly involve and change the world for them thus making you an exception to the balance rule which was settled but in your very first world lesser god found you to be problematic, you were willing to love only one being Asuna and live with her. You weren''t interested in power or conquering other beauties. You were loyal pure and most importantly a person who knew what is most precious to you. The lesser gods who were hoping for you to do their deed didn''t like that, thus they started enforcing more world law into your world thus indirectly influencing yourself. At fast they thought you would leave the world after Asuna was death but you were considering living in the digital world of your to be with Asuna. They saw their plan is failing and left you along. But Asuna surprised everyone she forced you to move on and let her die. With her death, the pathway to control you opened up. Then they started giving you missions controlling your actions indirectly. Have you ever considered why Hermione Granger from Harry Potter world who was in love with you would kiss Ron? Let me answer this for you, Lesser gods. They didn''t want you to tie down with her and move on so they little by little in 3 years you left her along changed influenced her. Thus making you move on from that world too.


    Leo hearing this was a stunt and started thinking he in Harry potter world had Veela bloodline while also many factors which should have made it impossible for Ron to do anything with Hermione only a dream, He after thinking a bit realized that he hadn''t thought about it. He at that time had already given up on Hermione and just moved on without paying much attention to this.


    Void started talking again: At first, we were uncertain whether or not about lesser gods influencing you thus decided to test it, death here went and gave you a task to collect his artifacts which he had left behind in the world. Which was the only reason you went to this world? After seeing the outcome with Hermione we all were certain of the involvement of the lesser god and their plan to control you. So God of destruction who seeing what happened with his love happened to you decided to meet you and test you. He went into the mortal world of fairy tail and started observing you. And finally decided to teach you which was surprising to all of us. He made you his successor and left behind his inheritance for you. But that''s why the story gets complicated. The lesser gods were already eyeing you and when they saw you meeting the God of destruction they decided to escalate their plans thus when you completed all the tasks of the world Dragon God gave you a new one. To kill all the dragons in any form. Yourself should know that the task was idiotic you could kill everyone on the planet easily much less the dragon slayers and such. But the reward which you got was Huge. Devil''s lover magic which God of destruction has taught you, lesser gods wanted nothing but to stop you from using it any further but couldn''t possibly deny your wish as it would seem suspicious decided to change your wish somehow, thus dragon god in addition to your wish of Devil''s lover also gave you his purest bloodline. Dragon God''s bloodline is one of the most precious things in the entire lesser gods domain so why would he give you something so important for free? It was to imprint your very soul itself. Do you remember the time you used the dragon god''s bloodline in the one-piece world? The pain wasn''t due to your bloodline changing or such but due to dragon god''s blood imprinting the slave seal onto your very soul itself. The seal was in such a form that it would only create a small portion of the actual seal each time you use the Dragon god''s bloodline coin. After 4 worlds you would have been under his direct control as a puppet, doing anything he asks of you thus the perfect variable.


    Leo listened to everything too much information was given to him, he couldn''t believe he was also made into a puppet from being a Janitor to the very people who have taken away his Asuna from him.


    Death: Seeing the seal we were decided to intervene before it was too late, it wasn''t because we liked or so such but because God of destruction had asked us too. We using our divinity started modifying the heavenly tribunal little by little after you had completed your task we used that modified tribunal lighting and destroyed the seal which was engraved into your very soul itself. After which you were brought here. Do you understand everything now?

 Chapter 55 - Sins of a lover

    Leo calmly through everything through and asked: Asuna, do they have Asuna?


    Child smiling replied: Yes and no everything depends on you.


    Leo: How?


    Child: When we sent the tribunal, we made one thing certain for the lesser gods to think you were already dead. We, after all, broke your very soul. But the reality we did something entirely different. We using the tribunal to not only destroy the seals but also world laws enforced and binding upon you, which in simple words you can understand it as erase each timeline you were in from the moment you started to change them except for the world of SAO in which using death''s shroud of invisibility which was gifted to you we hide and stopped the world itself before the entirety of the world can be erased.


    Leo: You said before the entirety of the world can be erased what does that mean?


    Child: Time, time started erasing itself from the movement you left the world. We managed to stop it somewhere around the time you were still in SAO.


    Leo: Does that mean I can be with Asuna again?


    Child: That''s what I mean it depends on you. If you right now chose to give up your journey and let your already degrading soul be destroyed you can be at peace or you can also choose to go and fight everyone, turn all the worlds you have already visited, the worlds you are going to visit upside down. Acc.u.mulate enough power to start your journey onto the path of godhood and inheritance of God of Destruction.


    Leo: If I chose first what will happen to Asuna?


    Child: Nothing, the world of SAO you were in is one of the billion copies of SAO in all reality. It will be erased and nothing will change.


    Leo: How can I trust any of you?


    Death: Why do we need your trust? Do whatever you want.


    Leo thought hard and long before answering: Okay 2nd choice for now.


    Giant/Void waved his hands and 3 bodies fell on the floor. They looked Identical to Leo except for Naruto who had yellow hair and naruto kind look from the series.


    The child continued: These are the only powers that were saved. With world law not binding upon you the powers you have collected are also gone. Hope will stay with you but now you won''t have world seed in it until the time you have powerful enough soul which can recreate it. To strengthen your soul you will need to go onto the path of cultivation. We have discussed among ourselves and think the best thing you can do right now is gone and get yourself a suitable weapon that can fight against a lesser god at least. The world you''re going to is named Bleach in your human world. Your powers which were in these bodies are already there but are preserved, you will need to revisit each world to connect with your powers like Naruto world you will restart your journey at the age of 3 when you first woke up the only difference will be your body would have all the powers it has when you left it such as complete genetic modification of all the bloodlines, 5 god tree powered Kurama and such. Your knowledge will also be preserved.


    Leo hearing this was confusing and started thinking of those MC who from the very beginning of the story get OPist person in the world and then go on to play with everyone while face slapping everyone and conquering everyone even rock if they are shaped like a girl.


    Child: Oh yes, you would also be able to bring your body into the next world and combine both their power once you reach the apex power of the secondary world. Meaning if you''re at the top of the food chain in Harry potter then you can bring your body from Naruto verse which you have already conquered and combined the too. You can also in a similar manner bring in people too thus building and expending your empire.


    Leo at this point only nodded and listened without saying anything.


    The child continued: Each world new world which you will go for the first time, you will only have black matter in your body from the Harry Potter world, one god tree energy which you absorbed from the lesser god Ankhseram during your battle in fairy tail world, Hope from SAO, your Rinnegan from the naruto world, and lastly from the one-piece world the three forms of Haki. The Haki and energy you will need to train yourself to connect with again and again. Devil''s lover is part of your godhood inheritance and will open to you when your journey into godhood starts for real. Arc of embodiment and copy magic both are low-grade magic of the God of creation, so if you use them you will be constantly targeted and monitored. The black matter will appear in the same manner as before, a black coin in your pocket. You''re free of world laws now, you can do whatever you want without fearing heaven from targetting you. For next world travel, when you''re at the apex of the world you can simply say it out loud and a tear will open for you.


    Leo understanding everything nodded when he hears death speaking: Whatever happens in the world of living doesn''t change anything from all three of us. We neither have time or reason to help you in any manner. It is only because of the responsibility we three feel toward your master that we have intervened. For the future, we won''t interfere. The best we can do for you is to keep your lover hidden from the lesser gods. You will hold the name of Destruction and will have to hold onto that so don''t expect us to fight in your battles.


    Leo nodded and stood up and kneeled on the ground: Just protect Asuna, I will always remember this help.


    Giant nodding: Okay then, we have done telling you everything, if you have any questions ask away or else be on your Journey onwards.


    A tear in space opened up at a distance from Leo, Leo looked at it and asked: Where would I be going? Soul Society, the Human world, or Hueco Mundo?


    The Child laughing loudly replied: Don''t worry I have personally had it so that you have a cool surprise entrance.


    Leo: Will I get to carry my weapon onto the next world?


    Void: Yes


    Leo bowed again once again and started walking toward the space tear when he hears the voice of Death: His name, His real name was Krotos, The God of destruction.


    Leo stopped momentarily but then continued going again without stopping.


    The tear sucked his soul leaving behind his body.


    Void waved his hand and the 4 bodies of Leo, One from Naruto, One-piece, Fairy tail, and harry potter all were sucked into Space.


    Void sighed and mumbled out loud: This is the last thing I can do for him, my friend.


    Death kept on drinking his tea while youth suddenly asked: What do you think he will do when he finds out we don''t have Asuna? That lesser god working for the God of creation directly took her away before we could do something?


    Death looked at the young boy and kept on drinking his tea.


    All three-seat in complete silence.


    Leo in the meantime was having the time of his life when he regains his consciousness Hope was already controlling his new foreign body and running in a completely dark tunnel where a huge black matter with yellow bright on top of it chasing after him. Leo realized he is in the Dangai and that Kototsu was chasing after him, he started running more faster but then he saw something more unbelievable an even larger ball of white matter behind Dangai which slowly consumed Dangai whole and started coming toward him, using every bit of his strength from this foreign body and rushed to toward the birth white light he saw in the distance.


    Just before the matter could catch him, Leo jumped into the bright light. Leo landed on a very hard and cold surface. Rubbing he kneels, Leo stood up and looked around him, when suddenly he was surrounded by people wearing completely white clothes with a white mask on their face. Leo knew neither the place he was in, who this people are or the type of body he was in. All he knew was this truly is a cool welcome.

 Chapter 57 - Soul Cloud

    Leo slowly stood up started reviewing all the memories of the body he was in but found that he didn''t have any, his mind was completely blank as a new baby. The people surrounding hold out their swords toward him without speaking anything.


    Leo after thinking about the situation a bit started to shook his head and seat down again on the ground and raised his hand and started talking: Mister is this soul society? An uncle with a sword wearing black cloths told me I will go to soul society now.


    The guard didn''t react at all, soon 3 people came out of the crowd, Leo seeing them was stunned Oetsu Nimaiya, the creator of Zanpakato, Kirio Hikifune the creator of artificial soul and lastly Ichibe Hyosube the monk who call the real name or something truly unique about him was that he was the first shinigami ever and from what Leo remember from the same era as the soul king. Hope already in action completely hid all his memories making it impossible for anyone to discover the real truth about him.


    Seeing the three royal guards the subordinated which were clad in completely black color cloth with a black color mask on their face back off giving them space to come forth.


    Ichibe Hyosube looked at the indifferent body who was giving emitting the same power wave as a very old entity that he remembers from the past but before he or anyone else could speak a wave of energy come forth from the palace of Soul kings knocking everyone down. Ichibe was confused as to why the soul king would react in any way, Soul King was first entity which was created by nature when the Hollows originated into the world of the living, Soul kings story was very sad, he helped and protected the humans and souls giving them the future possibility to develop and grow under the protective bubble of his but what the humans and souls did in return was extream, the ancestors of the 5 novel clans of the society at that time were just simple humans who have gotten special powers, all 5 ancestor''s of those clans came together and made a decision, they all combining their powers attacked the Soul King trapping him inside a crystal via which they controlled the power of the soul king created 4 verse, Soul Society, the Human world, Hell verse and lastly Hueco Mundo. Soul King was turned into a living battery but the clans were still not satisfied with this fearing that one-day Soul king will break out of the seal and destroy everything, they started their plans to make him powerless cutting both his hands and legs and ripping his heart out. Making the soul king completely powerless and defenseless the ultimate battery which can go on for eternity and maintain the balance. The soul king still thinking about well being of the lower form of life allowed them to do as they please, he didn''t stop anyone.


    Leo feeling the Powerwave was also confused as to why the soul king would release his power wave now because as per the story he remembers the soul king always stayed in deep sleep. Seeing this as an opportunity Leo repeated himself but this time he jumped onto Ichibe Hyosube while acting like a small child: Grandpa monk please save me, These people are trying to hurt me.


    Ichibe was still distracted by the power wave from the soul king when someone jumped on him, hearing the little kid in front of him speaking in such a manner he was very surprised. He laughed loudly and asked: Where did you come from brat?


    Leo still hugging the old monk: I don''t know. the last thing I knew was an old uncle wearing black clothes he touched me with his sword and then I was here.


    Ichibe after listening to them found it weird but then he hears a voice, a voice which was audible only to him: Bring him to me.


    Ichibe without wasting any time took the child hugging him and went into the soul king''s chamber. The Soul King still in his crystal opened his eyes a little and looked at Leo then reclosed them.


    Unlike Leo''s expectations, Soul King still had his heart with him not making his completely disabled.


    Soul King spoke out to Ichibe again: Train him, for the future depends on him.


    Ichibe hearing this was stunned but then regained his composure and looked at Leo carefully, other than the weird weak energy omission he didn''t see anything special about the boy. He has since the beginning knew the powers of the soul kings and have seen them so he knew that the 5 ancestor''s seal was anything but a joke against soul king but it was only because of soul king who chose to stay dormant and create a balance in the world, thus when Soul King today told him to train the boy and his prediction of a calamity he knew something big is going to happen.


    Ichibe nodded and bowed a little meanwhile, Leo who was staring at the soul king was talking to him in his head.


    Soul king: I am one of the generals who fought under your master, I was told that you have damaged your soul thus you were sent here. Don''t worry I have instructed him to teach you. Soul law is a fragile concept, Understand it and make a weapon for oneself is another. You must first understand the law of souls. Then you can on your own create your weapon. Learn from them and their experience. My time as we both know will come to end in the next 900 years more or less so you must complete your training by then and then absorb my powers to heal your soul completely. My energy is degrading slowly, I want to do one last act for my master before my time is up, Now go I must entire my slumber again or humans will fell fear from me again.


    Leo without saying anything just bowed toward Crystal of the old king and looked at Ichibe who was staring at him inspecting every single part of his body. Leo smiling said: Grandpa monk, this uncle said I can leave here with you. Sorry for the inconvenience.

 Chapter 58 - Shinigami ways

    Ichibe Hyosube decided to talk to other guards regarding Leo''s situation, Soul King orders were very clear, they all were meant to train Leo in everything but the problem was that no one knew about this origin or what the energy wave which Leo emitted was.


    At this moment Royal guard senior level only consisted of 4 members with 2 others in consideration. Kirio Hikifune with her recent work on the artificial soul has brought the attention of Soul king onto herself but the research was still incomplete thus her initiation was also not full. She was allowed to work in the Royal Place of Soul King but didn''t have much freedom. Another member was Senjumaru Shutara, she developed a method via which non-living things such as Skeleton of a person can be reused as a mean of offense and defense depending on the power an individual had. The non-living thing can be used as a foot soldier or perhaps a helping hand in a fight, all the capacity were unknown regarding the technique which is why she wasn''t completely integrated into the soul king''s royal guard.


    Ichibe took Leo who was pretending to have lost all his memories which usually happen to a soul when they cross the boundary of living and the dead thus Ichibe just called him Kiddo, for now, he took Leo to see Oetsu Nimaiya, Tenjo Kirinji and Renjiro Kimura the other 3 top members of the Royal guards. Oetsu Nimaiya was regarded as the King of the swords as he was the creator of all the Zanpakato, he forged all which existed and also knew the locations of all Zanpakato spirits. Renjiro Kirinji was regarded for his invention of the White bone hell - a sprit water pool that removed all the blood from an individual which was tainted by foreign Reiatsu, fastening the process of healing then came his second invention blood pool hell where an individual who has lost his blood will regain blood thus not weakening them for a longer period and reducing their recovery time. The last member was an only bit younger than Ichibe himself, him the original manga series which Leo had knowledge of the character simply didn''t exist, he held the title of Space wave as his powers were deemed to be special by the soul society when it was formed and he was made part of the royal guard following this. His power was such that he could redirect or transfer the position of anyone with himself thus changing the course of attack which was about to hit him onto someone else.


    Ichibe brought the boy in his place whereas sent orders to all three to come there.


    Leo stood in front of 4 people while they stared at every inch of his body trying to understand everything about him seeing this Leo laughed and stared giving them gestures. Ichibe broke the silence stating the order of the Soul king to teach Leo here. Oetsu laziest of the bunch said he is very right now and won''t be able to help and ran away but Tenjiro caught him and brought him back.


    Ichibe instructed Leo to go outside and wait for them. Leo simply smiled and left, Ichibe started talking stating that he will start teaching the boy first to learn more about him. Boy would be allowed to stay within the Soul Palace for now and monitored. No news regarding the boy must be leaked to the outside world.


    Leo in the meanwhile started testing his body, he first absorbed his black coin from the harry potter world. Second, he started testing Haki and his energy. About his energy and Haki depended on his will power so he went into meditative position and found he had very little control over either. Then he started checking Hope to see the damage which has happened to it during the tribunal. Hope reported that connection with World seed has been broken, the sealed consciousness of the people which were uploaded was erased and most likely sent back in time as if nothing ever happened. Kurama dimension is also sealed off and the host needs to revisit the naruto world to reconnect with the power. The machines left behind in One piece are still there, the timeline of that world wasn''t erased only his forces which re-uploaded into the world seed when the tribunal hit Leo. The rest of the timeline of the world was erased to the point when Leo first entered the world. All the information which was collected during his travel was also available.


    Leo started formulating new plans for each world, The last time he was in the world all he did was collect information and focused on the tasks this time he will start building the empire. For future battles, he will need soldiers now that Asuna is alive and waiting for him he will destroy all gods if that''s what it takes. With plan set in his mind. Leo waited for the Royal guards to be done with their talk.


    Soon Ichibe and others came out of the room and told Leo that he, for now, will be staying with Ichibe start learning from him.


    The monk who calls the real name was anything but kind in any manner, he was focused and wanted to draw out every little bit of information and power Leo had, the training begins with the theory parts of Reiatsu, the formation, usage, and most importantly control. Little by little with Leo started formulation his understanding of his bodily energy. His body consisted of different kinds of energies with Reiatsu only being a part of it thus not all boundaries applied to it. Leo with his understanding controlled his energy and didn''t let it omit any longer making him seem like a normal mortal. He started using the energy in different forms such as forming wings swords and others. Ichibe observed all this and classified that Leo was a once in a lifetime genius. Leo was named by Ichibe as Keiko from Kiddo. Within 10 years, Leo/Keiko learned all the theories from Ichibe, then begin his learning toward Zankensoki basic techniques, Ichibe being the oldest and most experienced taught him, Kido, Senjumaru who specialized in Hakuda was assigned to teach him that, Tenjiro whose renowned as "Lightning-Fast Tenjir¨­" was assigned to teach him Hoho, Oetsu Nimariya started teaching him basic Zanjutsu using wooden swords along with Ichibe. Renjiro started teaching Leo Hakuda, different methods to fight without a sword use, via arm surrounding and lastly space. Kirio was assigned to teach Keiko about the technological part of the soul society and it''s working basics started with Jigokucho which were used by the shinigami''s to travel from one plan to another from the world of soul society to the world of the living, and were also used as messengers in Soul society. Keiko was very interested in the technological aspects and using his understanding started paying more interest in Kirio work, who upon see Keiko''s mind and his brilliance was more than happy to teach him more, with the help of Keiko things such as Spiritual limiters were also improved giving more stability to the powers which were steeled and producing less stress on to the Shinigan''s body. Keiko also helped in the development of a new kind of Denreishink which came with an inbuild hollow graphic future which can be used to scout out the area first and identify hallows and their kind and strength thus decreasing the deaths of shinigami during a battle between the two. Keiko maintained a good relationship with everyone, with not getting attached to anyone but at the same time being on a close relationship with everyone.


    With the teaching and contributions made by Keiko in developing various new technology, Keiko was officially integrated into the royal guards under the division of Tenjiro Kirinji. With the integration, Keiko finally received the key to the royal place and finally the freedom to travel anywhere he wanted. Oetsu Nimaiya from time to time forged new Zanpakuto, Keiko from the side only observed the process of creation, Oetsu offered to create one of Keiko, but any swords Oetsu forged crumbled into ashes when Keiko touch it confusion both of them thus after thinking it over Keiko decided on learning how to create one on his own. Oetus with his close relationship with Keiko after gaining permission from Ichibe started teaching Keiko how to forge a Zanpakuto. Little by little is the understanding of forging improved. Keiko using Hope started acc.u.mulating the knowledge of one piece Wano country spirit and his world''s spirits, running various calculations and such.


    As Keiko learned everything 400 years went by Senjumara become the leader of the first division with Royal guards with control over her unit of royal soldiers. And after 50 or so years Kirio also succeeded in her research and created Artificial souls theory by the name of Gikon along with the Cage of life defense technique which absorbed all Reiatsu based attacks.


    Keiko with practice become a master Shunpo master being able to even be faster than his master Tenjiro, he also inherited the complete legacy of Renjiro regarding space manipulation and control. World laws did not apply to Keiko as they were on Renjiro thus making it easier and fluid for Keiko to do as he pleased. Keiko''s title was finally decided by Ichibe as the Swordless titan because even with the use of Zanpakuto, Keiko using speed and space as a medium was able to keep up with any one of the royal guards. Fighting them on the equal ground regardless of the opponent using their bankai or any other technique


    With everything learned about the soul society world of Shinigami, Leo decided to visit Hollow world, the Hueco Mundo was a world full of white sand and nothing more, Keiko was interested in the formation of Hogyoku, the likes of Sosuke Aizen and Kisuke Urahara were able to create one, thus he was also somewhat confident he will be able to form one like them, Keiko collected various kinds of Hollows one at a time while leaving the 3 so-called kings not wanting to interfere with the timeline of Ichigo and his adventures, with thousand of hollows it was easier for Keiko to get experimental subjects.


    With discussion to Kirio and Ichibe, a specialized branch was created inside the royal guard unit to study Hollows separate from the soul society one. Keiko alone worked on the Hollows and started his expriments, his first conclusion was correct, the gods have made his body in the same manner as that of Ichigo which consisted of both kind of energy, but it was also a very small part of his total energy thus Keiko begins suspecting that he also have Quincy power too. Leaving that thought, for now, Keiko started learning hollow and about Hollowfication. Little by little learning about hollows their powers and techniques such as moment technique Sonido which equally powerful to Shinigami Shunpo, Acidic Touch an offensive attack via which Hollow''s Reiatsu to seep into the person causing great pain to the victim with great control can also be used against Shinigami, Cero offensive swift energy blast technique and lastly their travel technique Garganta tearing the fabrics of the space itself thus creating a medium of pathway between worlds.

 Chapter 59 - Hollows howl

    Hollow''s were a very unique subject for Keiko who first started understanding their powers and then their pain endurability before they are harmed, he started practicing different methods via which a Hollow can be destroyed. What Shinigami did with their swords was purify the darkness within hollow''s and convert them into the soul which were then reincarnated in soul society as soul and later either as humans or shinigami if they were found to contain a high level of Reiatsu.


    Keiko was very fascinated by them how their lost heart converts into their mask giving them a specialized appearance of sort within the Hollow class itself.


    Using various method Keiko identified a method by which a hollow''s very soul can be extracted from their being while destroying their very Reiatsu network thus giving Keiko the very precious soul which according to what he has heard can give power to lesser gods, using this model, Keiko started his experiments on how to gain control over the very soul of this kind thus making them his indirect servents.


    With years of research and using the theory of Gikon which Kirio Hikifune had developed as an argument bases, Keiko developed his theory of Hollow soul and how to control them directly. The method was such that which containing his Reiatsu which had Hollow energy directly into the Hollow''s very soul without destroying the Hollow''s Reiatsu network which formed the body of a hollow. Using Hope to do the calculation, Keiko was finally able to control over Hollows which were of lower Reiatsu level them him.


    Around 420 years had passed by since Keiko coming the Royal guard unit, trained under everyone, and finally, become part of it. In the beginning, he was placed under the division of Tenjiro Kirinji unit but was later placed under Kirio Hikifune because of his interest and contributions to developing various items. Keiko was given his own King''s key which only given to the Royal Guards who were at most trusted. 420 years later he had both Shinigami and Hollow''s fighting techniques with addition to Hollow under control to behave and follow his command. During this time Keiko also started practicing his Reiatsu regulation technique which he created using both Shinigami and hollow as an example while also practicing Haki. By the end of 420 years, he had achieved light golden Haki or which Keiko named as God''s Haki using IM as an example.


    With Hollow''s under his control, Keiko started his next research, Hogyoku for which he needed Shinigami. Using Hollow''s under his control he attacked the nearby parameter of the soul society which was a regular thing for Hollow''s to do. Soul society seeing this dispatched their division 2 members who specialized in speedy execution. The captain leading them was Sui Feng. Keiko gathered around 200 Hollows to attack but after observing that it was Sui Feng''s unit, Keiko decided to take part in the capture himself too. The attack started as usual but unlike usual Hollow''s didn''t kill the injured Shinigami''s but took them back with them, Keiko collected everyone within his dimension. After destroying the first wave of enemies and collecting about 15 people, Keiko retrieved. Leaving some Hollow behind making it less suspicious and giving a target to upcoming shinigami to kill and blam.


    15 people he took were brought back into Hueco Mundo, by this time Aizen had already outed Kirsuke Urahara and others as part of the blame for Hollowfication and started his plans into the Hueco Mundo itself. Keiko using his Hollow''s also infiltrated into his gang while observing his moves. He created an underground research center for himself where he could play with Shinigami as if he did this in soul king''s place he would have to answer to Orihine and others which he wanted to avoid for now. He started with understanding their soul formation, basically how the souls were classified as good and bad into Hueco Mundo and Soul society.


    It took about 20 years into the soul when Keiko finally had the understanding and the means to manipulate a soul into transforming from one into another. What Aizen and Urahara did while forming the Hogyoku was just try to merge the power of the two without understanding the base of the two and the reason thus creating an unperfect Hogyoku which had a consciousness of its own while not being under their control.


    Keiko''s approach yields him different results while giving him perfect control. Soul used as a means to fuel increase the power of a Hogyoku by which it could change the reality itself thus giving it god likeability which made Aizen crazy believing it to God''s true power which he will gain if he merges with the Hogyoku.


    Keiko using different Hollow''s and Shinigami which he started capturing started fueling different Hogyoku with different Output. He also started with the experiments on how to merge the two without letting it form a consciousness of its own.


    Meanwhile, in the outer world, Aizen started experimenting with his own Hogyoku and realized that the power outlet of his Hogyoku had started decreasing thus tried to feed it by using different methods such as killing residents of the villages nearby, Hollows which he captured and the Shinigami''s he lured but the power still didn''t increase or was regained by his Hogyoku thus he decides on two plans first to merge the Hogyoku which Urahara had created. The second was to involve the individual known as Swordless titan who was famous for being one upon a lifetime genius who was rumored to have helped Kirio Hikifune in her theory of Gakai. Usually, no one can control the royal guards or their selection and duties but the rumored Swordless titan was different, he was said to have been grown up with the soul palace under the watch of Royal guards but was not one of them fully but working under them thus, using Central 46 he could make the individual in question a suspect of the disappearing Shinigamis and bring him to soul society under the pretense of keeping him under observation. He could influence the individual into working for him. After some thinking,


    he decided to enact both his plans, thinking if that if anything went wrong he could always use the center 46 to send back the Soul palace or depend on Rogyoku.


    But a problem arose in his second plan, no one has ever seen what the Swordless titan looks like, about 400 years had passed since he had been in Royal palace which Aizen didn''t have any connections with. After some thinking, Aizen using other captains into a rush that had connections with the Royal family started collecting information about Swordless Titan.


    And finally got a photo, A man wearing completely white from head to toe, with both arms behind him, eyes of blue color with an expressionless Handsome face, body towering around 6''4 in height a lean muscular body, completely white-colored short hair as if he had just gotten out of bed looking directly into the camera with a small smile on his face.


    Aizen who was very confident his looks was also impressed. He used this as an example started creating illusions around the areas where Shinigami go missing people seeing someone like Keiko. Soon a photo of Keiko was made using various eyewitnesses, the person who Aizen had manipulated into getting the photo had already seen the photo and thus identified Keiko intently. Thus, starting the conflict of power with Center 46 and the royal palace who were certain that Keiko wasn''t in any manner involved specially Ichibe. Keiko was also instructed to come back out in the open to discuss the event.


    When Icibie asked Keiko about his involvement and informed him regarding the whole matter, Keiko instantly knew he was dragged into a trap by someone. Keiko denied any involvement in the matter. Icibie also informed him about the decision which Center 46 had decided. To have him serve as a Lieutenant under a captain of Gotei 13 the entire matter is clear. Keiko hearing just smiled and agreed.

 Chapter 60 - The monster

    Icibie and the rest who have watched Keiko grow up in front of them completely believed in Kekio and thus refused to believe that Keiko was involved with anything like what was said about him. Icibie leading the royal guards have even refused the orders of the center 46 stating that center 46 was under the authority of Soul king, not the other way around. The debate went on and finally, the decision was left to the soul king himself. Soul king simply said to follow whatever Keiko decides thus knowing Keiko''s playful nature Icibie and others started worrying that Keiko will accept the punishments. Everyone with Ichibie, in particular, was very fond of Keiko, Ichibie even offered Keiko to take his last name along with Keiko but Keiko refused it.


    They after getting instructions from the Soul King he invited Keiko who was foreign to the whole matter to discuss his opinion. Ichibie took Keiko the entire matter who laughed very loudly and instantly agreed to go to the soul society, Ichibe and other seeing this started explaining to Keiko that he can also refuse, center 46 can''t force him in any manner but Keiko just smiled and went back not giving time to anyone to argue back.


    Ichibe and others seeing this were hurtful. Their student and little kiddo was being taken away from them. Ichibe thus finally decided to let Keiko go to the soul society for now, but also stated that he will make a trip to escort Keiko into the soul society.


    After 2 days Keiko stored all his things within his dimension and with Ichibe as escort went to Soul society.


    Meanwhile, Captain-Commander Yamamoto received a report that Royal guards had accepted the decision of Center 46 and agreed to send the individual known as the Swordless titan in soul society to serve as a Lieutenant. After two days both the swordless titan and Monk who calls the real name will arrive within the soul society. Yamamoto knew the monster Ichibe thus knew the visit is not simple, thus ordered all the captain to report in at the moment both arrive with their Lieutenant.


    2 days went by, the portal of the soul society open up and Keiko with a smile on his face stepped out, a huge pressure fell on the entire soul society, hundreds of Shinigami fell were the people ranked Lieutenant went on their knees.


    Yamamoto seating in him chair seeing all the chaos tried to sense the source where the pressure was coming from but felt a bloodl.u.s.t of a monster standing behind him during his time as a Shinigami he was called a monster but the person standing behind him was on another level, fear slowly started taking over his body one by one the Lieutenant started passing out while some Captains went their knees, feeling powerless and disturbed Yamamoto channeled his Reiatsu and was about to release his Sword when he hears the voice of a devil: Are you ready to dance old man?


    Yamamoto released a heavy breath and finally using everything he had turned back but saw there was no one so turned straight and saw in front of himself was Ichibe the monk who call the real men standing there along with a young man while resting of the captain and Lieutenant were staring at him. He first looked at Ichibe and then the young man who slowly said: I will ask again Are you ready to dance old man?. This time Yamamoto didn''t felt the bloodl.u.s.t like the last time, not even a little bit but knew the young man stand-in front of him was anything but simple. The smile on his face said it all. It felt he knew everything there was and there will be if he wanted the world to exist it will if not he will just change it with the flip of his hand. Ichibe''s voice interrupted his thoughts.


    Ichibe: We know he was dragged here without sufficient evidence, so if anything happens to him while he is here entire soul society will have to answer.


    Yamamoto regained himself and answer: He will serve as a Shinigami, dangers are associated with his life in everything.


    this time young man replied: Don''t worry old man, what I wanted to know is, is it true that I can become a captain if I defeat a captain here?


    Hearing this Yamamoto felt the bloodl.u.s.t in Young man with a smile on his face raging once again and quickly replied: No you''re only here till the matter is cleared after it is concluded you can either leave or stay behind at that time if you want you can envoke the rule.


    The young man didn''t reply just smiled.


    Yamamoto looked at his captain''s and asked: Which of you want him?


    Sei Feng stepped up: I heard your basic fighting technique involves speed so I have decided to take you.


    Aizen interrupted her: But I have heard that he likes research so I suggest we place him under division and utilize his brain.


    Ichibe nodding his head as he knew Keiko was very interested in technology and transferred under Kirio due to this.


    But Keiko replied: No I''m very interested in Division 4 the relief squard. So possible can you kindly place me in that Captain-Commander Yamamoto?


    Ichibe and everyone were very suprised. Ichibe asked Keiko: Kiddo are you sure? Knowing your personality I think other units will be better for you.


    Keiko replied with the same smiling face: I think I should expend the knowledge spare, I already have learned about Healing from Master Tenjiro as will use this trip as an opportunity to gain more experience in it.


    Ichibe knowing the Keiko is moody just sighed and looked at Yamamoto.


    Yamamoto hears a whisper in his ear: Don''t you think I should stay out of conflict old man? Who knows maybe If I am made to fight soul society gets destroyed.


    Yamamoto looking at the smiling monster in front of him who looked nothing but a man in his youthful twenties nodded and said: Okay, Keiko, the swordless titan will be enrolled in the 4th division and if work is found to be satisfactory be made Lieutenant or co-Lieutenant depending on the circ.u.mstance and availability of the seat. The meeting is over, other then the young man rest will leave.

 Chapter 61 - Reporting for Duty

    Keiko initially wasn''t much interested in the soul society and its aspects of the storyline which involved Ichigo and his adventure but after discovering Hogyoku and it''s a reality-warping ability which could make that a person desires into a reality, he was very interested in seeing Ichigo group, Ichigo in his Hollow form and how much control would he have hollow''s in that form, Yasutora Sado in seeing that if his powers are taken away how much the exposer to him a normal human would change him, and lastly and very importantly Orihime Inoue her powers were very unique and if utilize could be very useful in any world.


    The secrets hidden behind Orihime''s powers were also one of the reason''s why Keiko knowing the real storyline was utterly disappointed in Aizen, he simply user her powers and didn''t even try to understand the basic concepts behind it.


    The suspicion which Keiko was under would automatically go away once the plot of Aizen and his Hogyoku are revealed in front of everyone, after which he will be completely free and resume his activities. He had already decided that he will create his Bankai after getting a certain Item from a certain world which he will use base while adding different items of his own.


    Right now, Keiko finds himself in front of Captain-Commander Yamamoto who asks him: Why are you here? No need to pretend everyone has already left.


    Keiko smiling replied: You should know, I can simply kill my way into the soul society and take as many Shinigami I want if that''s what I desire. But now I''m brought here against my will in regards to something I didn''t do so you can understand If I''m bit pissed right now don''t you dear old man?


    Captain-Commander Yamamoto: So you think someone has deliberately brought you here. What will you do next?


    Keiko: I already know who wants what from me, All I will tell you is that old man you need to be careful. Someone is pulling from right under your nose.


    Captain-Commander Yamamoto: Someone is a traitor upon my ranks? Who is it?


    Keiko simply smiled at him and turned around to leave.


    Yamamoto understood that Keiko is simply here to play and nothing else and asked: Call it a curiosity of sort but I wonder why you chose division 4?


    Keiko stopped and without looking back answered: I learned how to heal myself only because I want to fight for a longer time.


    Without exchanging any more words, Keiko simply left Yamamoto in his thought process and went to meet Ichibe who was talking to one of the longest-serving captains in Gotei 13 and Keiko''s new captain Retsu Unohana.


    Keiko first greeted Ichibe then Retsu who gave him directions to the 4th division and left to let Keiko and Ichibie talk alone.


    Ichibe: Kid what is your angle here? I don''t understand why you chose to come here. If you want we can leave right now I will handle the rest.


    Keiko: Don''t worry I have taught it through, I come here to prevent conflict from escalating we both know the struggle between Royal guards and Center 46 would have been bad for us in the long run so I came here just as insurance it''s not like I don''t have the king''s key and can''t return immediately in case of emergency right? And you should know better than anyone else that they are very few people who can fight against me and almost no one who can catch me so Don''t worry it will only take few years I think, in the meantime, I suggest you start strengthening the royal guard in case something big happens here. I will keep on sending reports every week regarding the situation here. For now, I need a small piece of cloth from you with a seal on it.


    Ichibe: I understand your point of view but if you were their main target then you have just walked in the mouth of the tiger. I will work on the royal guards and be ready for everything I will also let others know of your concerns. Why do you need a cloth with a seal on it?


    Keiko: I have always told you to keep your friends close but your enemies even closer thus I came here but immediately joined division 4 which I don''t think anyone could have anticipated and by know would have probably started rethinking their plan. I want to seal my eyes to train my other senses life is boring with eyes.


    Ichibe listening to Keiko felt that there was much logic behind his words and felt Keiko has decided after a lot of thinking thus decided to leave it at that, ripped a small piece of cloth from his white clock and activated his Bankai to form a seal on it, instructing Keiko to supply some of his Reiatsu into the seal so that seal follow his command gave the seal cloth piece to Keiko who smiled and covered his eyes sealing them while activation his observation Haki.


    Ichibe seeing Keiko fine said goodbyes and left for Soul King palace again.


    Keiko smiling disappeared and appeared again in front of the Division 4 headquarters. He went in, seeing different people getting treated using Kiado methods smiling he raised his left hand from which around 60 rays shot out targetting all the sick people waiting for treatment closely the sick people started healing their condition started improving at one. Retsu Unohana along with her lieutenant Isane Kotetsu was surprised at the sudden ray of light but then they saw the condition of the patients improve at a visual rate regardless of their condition or state. Retsu moved back and show Keiko standing there with only one hand in the air and seeing him healing people didn''t interrupt the process but watched everything from the sidelines. After 3 minutes everyone in which the ray consumed were healed completely. Keiko lowed his left hand while raising his right hand and rubbed his back hair while introducing himself: Keiko, the Swordless titan the newly added member of division 4 reporting for duty.

 Chapter 62 - Old Monsters.

    Retsu Unohana was thoroughly impressed by Keiko''s work.


    Keiko was punctual, thorough, and extremely skilled making a name for himself quickly throughout the soul society. He even insisted on staying outside members without taking anyone''s seat and work as a regular member thus earning praise from everyone who would have lost their seat because of him. Retsu being one of the oldest members within the captain squad and also being the most trusted by the captain-commander Yamamoto knew the truth about Keiko and his power thus never interfered with anything but acted as an overseer to look into Keiko''s activities.


    Keiko in the meantime started trying to create new Kidos for himself. He was very bored in his wait for Ichigo and his friends. Aizen had visited division 4 using his injured squad members as an excuse and tried to talk to him about various things. Keiko knowing his intension just gave Aizen a sweet smile and then ignored him completely to not let his actions seem weird he did the same thing with every other captain too other then Unohana and Yamamoto.


    Keiko also started working on his bankai and started making a list of things he should collect before making one himself. Gunbai was a good weapon but he ever hardly ever used it in any world other than to deflect an upcoming attack thus he wanted to create a new weapon for himself. He had decided on creating a sword based on either a claymore blade model or a Nandao blade which he had used a lot in SAO world.


    Aizen''s original plan was to integrate Keiko into Division 12 which Urahara was in charge of before being outed out as a traitor in the human world. He wanted to use the same method he used with Urahara, he would first let Keiko work and develop himself before he introduces his bankai to him thus trapping him under his illusion, thus making him under his control. After Keiko had come under his control he would introduce the topic of Hollow and Shinigami power combination to Keiko and then watch him dance around his palm while he would observe all his development and progress as he did with Urahara, after realizing that he was slowly losing power from Hogyoku.


    But everything went to hell on the very first step, the rumored Swordless titan outdid everyone and chose to enter division 4 and going even further by sealing his very own eyes. Aizen seeing this started forming new plan about how to get Keiko thrown out of the division on ground of not being suitable for it but then again failed when he started hearing stories from people from his division along with others about how amazing and flawless Keiko''s work is, more and more rumors about his friendly behavior and work ethics started to come. Seeing this Aizen decided to visit the division 4 relief squad under the pretense of visiting his injured division members to look closely at the rumored Swordless titan and get familiar with him but then again failed as the rumored individual only smiled at him and completely ignored him. Pissed and completely angry Aizen knew this time he had bitten more than he could chew, decided to follow his second plan about looking into Urahara''s Hogyoku while also starting a plan to send back this useless titan back to the royal palace to lessen the number of people who could interfere with his plan.


    His plans worked like a charm, he using manipulation used Center 46 to renquilish the order against Keiko by painting Hollows as the party behind all this.


    Keiko from time to time sends reports back to Ichibe and others informing them regarding the degrading conditions of the soul society and how they are becoming weak and weak by each passing year. In one of the reports he received back from Ichibe, the news of Renjiro Kimura resigning from his duties as the royal guard came, due to his extream old age and instability with the space element his body, couldn''t process more Reiatsu thus making him insufficient to fight for a longer time thus this decision was taken by Ichibe being the head of the Royal guard unit meanwhile, Keiko was selected to take his as a head of a division after he completed his time in the soul society which was already approved by the Soul King.


    A few months went back when the news of Hollows being the real parties being responsible for the missing Shinigami''s and village residence started circulating throughout the Soul society. Soon a meeting of Gotei 13 was called in action and the verdict of freeing Keiko from his punishment was announced to the entire soul society, Many people were sad, while Aizen was happy as one can be something was finally going his way. Keiko along with his division captain was invited by the Captain-commander Yamamoto to meet him where he would be freed, official.


    Yamamoto: So what do you want to do now?


    Keiko smiling removed his blindfold seal and looked at Urahara: What can old monsters like us want other then somethings to play with?


    Urahara: Seems like they have told you who I am huh?


    Keiko laughing out loud replied: Nope, But I could smell death over you that''s why I chose you.


    Urahara with an ever-smiling face replied: Don''t you ever feared I could kill you?


    Keiko laughed more loudly and replied: You, that old bag of bones and all the other captain''s combined can''t even make me sweat. If you feel like I''m exaggerating asked the old man himself.


    Keiko without waiting for Urahara to reply looked at Yamamoto and asked: So what do you want?


    Yamamoto: You''re free to go now, so leave.


    Keiko: You know, old man just because I enjoyed my time here I will tell you two things, more than one of your captains has already betrayed soul society and were responsible for this whole fiasco of missing people and second, he, your greatest enemy is not dead but is acc.u.mulating his powers and if you ask me right now, he can single hand destroy the soul society completely, of course, that is after you fall which I think will happen soon. Don''t worry I will kill him after soul society falls and he returns home.


    Without waiting for their questions or reply, Keiko started walking away but stopped in front of the gate and said: Oh, I will be staying in soul society for some time of course, not in division 4 but just here and there. Now that I''m here I might as well enjoy myself a little bit don''t you agree?

 Chapter 63 - Opinion and options

    Hello everyone


    Do you guys want me to take retake all the world slowly or just at a fast rate, someone said the story is going too fast sometimes which I saw as a constructive criticism thus am asking opinion regarding this,


    Naruto world - following the original timeline of Naruto becoming a symbol of peace and creating an empire or simply the dark route which I used during the first part of the novel it will be different this time.


    Harry Potter world will be the main base this time and we will take the story very slowly, a lot to be done in this world. So I have decided to write this one without taking many suggestions. This is also the world from which 2nd partner of MC will be added.


    Fairy tail - What route do you want me to take? I''m open to all ideas except Harem once as MC nature is not to build Harem.


    The one-piece arc will be small and only of 2-4 chapters at most so if you have any suggestions kindly address.


    Marvel is the world were MC will create his own Zanpakuto, I have some ideas I think and hope you all will like it.


    Regards


    Kazru

 Chapter 64 - Little army

    The reason why Keiko decided to take up a job in division 4 was not as simple as everyone thought other than working on his new Kido skills, Keiko also used this as an opportunity to collect souls of shinigami for himself. By making a name for himself, he could get involved in more cases many of whom were critical and didn''t have many chances of recovery and death as a result, using this most he started feeding his Hogyoku''s which he had created, in the beginning, he only feed one Hogyoku out of 13 which he had and started powering it. After a few days of experimentations, he understood there was no upper limit to how much an Hogyoku can be feed and charged, unlike reality stone from marvel which consisted of unlimited power. Using this as a base he started feeding other Hogyoku''s too, with a new mindset to create an even better version of Hogyoku which could provide unlimited reality wrapping ability like reality stone.


    With his dismissal from division 4th, Keiko went back to Royal palace and reported in the situation while also stating all his observations in regards to defense, attack power and other things related to soul society. Soul society, in general, served as the first layer of defense for the soul king thus were an important part of the system thus Ichibe and others indirectly paid attention to its activities without directly being involved in it. Ichibe and others were familiar with the situation but after hearing Keiko''s they knew that soul society is weakening by the day and decided to follow Keiko''s plan to let the next major thing happen out to test the overall strength while also letting Keiko sit back and observe the situation thus permitting him to stay for more longer time within the soul society.


    Keiko, after completing all his duties and gaining the permission, resumed all his operations again which he midway when he was called into the soul society, he started with collecting Hollow for his collections and started using various methods to envolving from simple Hollows into Menos, which was formed by the collection of hundreds of normal Hollows, he was truly interested in the their evolutions, first, to be created were Menos Grande also known as Gillian, the likes of which was Ichigo and Rukai fought will fight in the human world, Keiko''s interest was within the ability of Negacion which they were able to produce by which they could rescue their comrades. Keiko made them use this ability while trying to penetrate the light square in various ways, he first used his eye ability of Kamui by which he easily was able to enter and exit the square while harming the Hollow inside which under the Menos protection, then he started using the space fluidity but failed to either repeal the beam or crack the space in it to enter, thirdly he tried to use speed to already inside the space where the person to be protected was already in but felt that the energy was pushing him out while making a protective space around the person meant to protect. Lastly, he tried to use Kido art he had created but still failed which fascinated him even more. Then he started with the creation of Adjuchas who had to be feed regularly or would lose their mind, Keiko using his seal method found a way to make this losing mind process nullified while also adding more spiritual energy into them, each Adjuchas had unique individual powers and Abilities which ranged from extream speed, strength mind control to other things. Keiko wasn''t much interested in this as these types of Hollows only were interested in hunting not developing their ability.


    He started the final phase to create the highest grade of Hollow their was Vasto Lorde which no one knew how were created. Keiko first started by feeding the Adjuchas normal hollows but didn''t get any result thus decided to much the matter more and started feeding Adjuchas to Adjuchas after sacrificing thousands of Adjuchas 2 out of 10 Adjuchas which Keiko was feeding developed and changed into Vasto Lorde, part hollow appearance while having Part human appearance too. Keiko decided to look more closely into what makes those individual specials, he first started with the type and nature of the soul in question and also the type and level of energy which both had. One Vasto Lorde being more powerful than others while both having more consciousness to make sensible reasonable decisions. The unique evolution process was involved which lead to their coming into being, Keiko with his deep research started modifying the souls of the other 8 subjects which he had been feeding, little by little he had 10 Vasto Lorde for himself.


    Happy with his work and knowledge, Keiko decided to go even further and change/evolve Vasto Lorde further. He started by creating more Vasto Lorde in the beginning and created more than 50 for himself. Then he chose the Vasto Lorde which showed the most promise depending on both their power level and soul strength he introduced the power of Hogyoku to the selected few. Slowly changing them and making an envolved Arrancar from Vasto Lorde for himself.


    He continued his practice and created around 20 envolved Arrancar with Captain commander strength while 50 Vasto Lorde with above captain level.


    With his little army in place, he started another project, humans. One of his Arrancar who specialized in spying informed Keiko that Rukai Kuchiki has left the soul society and has been sported in the area near Ichigo Kurosaki''s home.


    Keiko amused at the information decided to take some time off, ordered his Arrancar to go and kidnap some humans of different, ages, nature while also bringing animals of one kind each.


    Keiko prepared to visit the human world for himself, he wanted to watch the entire process of which the Hogyoku which Urahara embedded in Rukia gives power to Sado and Orihime. He also had the option of just going and taking the said Hogyoku for himself but he was more interested in the progress of the story.


    Keiko started stalking Rukia as she did her duty to investigate unusual Hollow activities in the area and finally show her meeting the weird Shinigami seeing kind Ichigo Kurosaki.

 Chapter 65 - Act II

    Seeing that the story arc is beginning and that he is already in the Human world, Keiko decided to begin his Human world phase, He firstly using the theory of Gigai made by Urahara created one artificial body for himself.


    After gaining a physical medium to interact with the human world he decided to play a visit to the nearby hardware store where he used his EMS to manipulate the human in charge of giving a laptop free of charge, after taking the laptop Keiko went into a good 5-star hotel which had a good enough wifi of that time and stayed in a room using EMS free of charge. Keiko with laptop started robbing people online from other countries and such making himself more richer in human terms, the world of SAO was way more advanced than the bleach world thus, Keiko even without using Hope acc.u.mulated a large sum, and created himself a fake id along with all the necessary doc.u.ments and purchased a large house for himself along with many other items.


    He used the property as a base started expending his Human world empire and started building a new Hope AI, SAO world virtual world, and world seed for himself. He slowly and gradually without giving a damn about Ichigo and Rukia''s adventures started gathering talented people from all over the Human world under himself. He also started teaching his Arrancar regarding technology and various other subjects slowly making them more intellectually capable too.


    He also started modifying Gagai Technology to make it suitable to his Arrancar too. Slowly working toward everything creating a base for himself months went by.


    One of Arrancar who was responsible for keeping an eye on Rukia reported the Rukia being captured and taken back while Ichigo blade being broken by Byakuya. Seeing that it''s time, Keiko left the newly constructed Hope AI which was in physical form in the human world to complete Virtual Reality and World seed while retreating all the Arrancar back into his personal space along with Vasto Lorde.


    Keiko traveled back to the Royal Palace and meet with other members informing them that of his speculation of a war happening with the soul society soon. Ichibe and other members didn''t care about the wars that Soul society was involved in but due to Keiko being dragged into it earlier paid attention to it.


    Soon, the news of the execution of Rukia made it waves through the entire soul society, Keiko took his leave with the excuse of monitoring the situation closely and left for Soul society.


    In the soul society, he seats back and watched the situation, Aizen with Center 46 under his control running wild, Captain-commander Yamamoto checking every captain and their activity carefully trying to identify the traitor which Keiko has informed him about while Byakuya struggle between his chose of duty and family with his promise.


    Yamamoto with the help of Unohana at the moment suspected Sei Feng, Gin and lastly Toshiro Hitsugaya. Sei Feng due to her connection with the exiled Shinigami Yoruichi Shihoin, Gin due to his suspicious and secretive nature while Hitsugaya due to his friend''s death due to Zanpakuto decision made by the center 46. All of them were kept under close observation by Unohana along with the first lieutenant of division 1 under Yamamoto Ch¨­jir¨­ Sasakibe.


    Keiko simply watched the situation go on, beginning with the Invasion of Ichigo starting, he was mostly interested in Sado and Orihime''s power and much later in Ichigo when he fights Byakuya and turn into human thus decided to stalk Sado fight, he was a fullbringer who according to Aizen was given power by Hogyoku, Keiko followed Sado around and watched him fight, all the data was directly uploaded into Hope via which he could rewatch and analysis the situation more closely. Orihime''s potential only came out much later in the story thus he decided to focus on Sado for now. Finally, Sado runs into Shunsui Kyoraku who instantly defeats Sado thus ending Keiko''s fun. With this part of the story ending Keiko decided to visit Ichigo and watch his beat all the odd like every Show MC does to save the girl.


    Ichigo was fighting against one and only Zaraki Kenpachi, Keiko decided to join Yachiru Kusajishi who was watching the fight from the roof. Yachiru seeing Keiko simply ignored him and continued watching the fight with both people falling down Yachiru jumped near them, Yachiru simply looked at Ichigo and smiling said: Thanks for fighting Kenny.


    then she picked up Kenpachi and smilingly said again: It''s been a long time since Kenny chan had so much fun. Ichigo if you can don''t die okay, and if you can play with Ken-chan once again okay?


    Keiko jumped off the building too and slowly lifted Ichigo in the air by the neck like a lamp and watched him more closely, there was nothing too special so to speak about Ichigo or his power, Ichigo had some consciousness and was able to see him and thought that another enemy is here and slowly closed his eyes waiting to either be taken prisoner or killed. Keiko slowly said: Boy it''s not time for you to die yet, You still have to dance a little longer and entertain me. Here you can take him cat, I''m simply an observer here. I have worked on his wounds a little rest is up to you and him if he wants to save that little girl.


    Keiko throw Ichigo into an upcoming cat shadow and disappeared from there to appear again on top of prison tower where Rukia was kept and Ganju along with Hanataro appeared and opened the gate of her cell to let Rukia out but then started their emotional drama due to Ganju identifying Rukia to be the killer of his elder brother which was interrupted by the arrival of Byakuya who after more emotional crap Ganju tries to fight but is taken out in a single attack, and is saved by Rukia''s captain Ukitake and just as they were talking, Ichigo rush in from below making an entrance for himself. With emotional crap being thrown left and right, Ichigo challenges Byakuya to a fight and almost matches him in turn of speed but just as Byakuya is about to release his Shikai, Yoruichi Shihoin arrive sealing his Shikai surprising everyone.


    Youichi and Byakuya get ready to fight each other but just as they are about to start Youichi attacked Ichigo but before she could harm him, I huge pressure fall on everyone bringing everyone including Byakuya and Ukitake to their knees. Keiko jumped down from the tower revealing himself to everyone.


    Keiko lifted Rukia by the neck with one arm and carefully looked at her trying to understand why the Hogyoku have done anything to fulfill any of her wishes but just shrugged his shoulders and throw her back into prison, Byakuya used all his power to try and stand up but more he tried the more pressure fell on him. Keiko calmly walked past Byakuya and Yoruichi and lifted Ichigo by the neck and said in a cold voice: Boy this is the last time I''m letting you live, 3 days I will give you three days to gain Bankai and defeat Byakuya if you fail I will kill Rukia and all your other companion in front of you. Then throw Ichigo back to Yoruichi and said: Run along little cat I''m here as an observer only or you all would have been death before even knowing about me.


    Yoruichi taking this opportunity to run away with everything she had. Keiko simply smiled at the kneeling Ukitake and disappeared along with his pressure.


    Keiko with 3 days to do nothing left-back for the human world to check progress regarding everything. Virtual reality project was ready and can be launched into the world everywhere, meanwhile, World seed was slowly being created within the virtual world itself. Calculations regarding the Gagai body for Arrancar being done and the test is started. Due to too much power within each Arrancar, Keiko also decided to build something like Spiritual limiters so to not decompose the Gagai which they are in. Another project for Vesto Lorde and their human artificial body also started with 3 days up. Keiko decided to went back to the soul society just in time for various captains to gather on top of the S¨­kyoku ground. Keiko also arrived then and took a chair from his dimension to seat on and watch the show while eating popcorn.


    Captain-Commander Yamamoto and others sensed someone seating behind them and looked to find an every smiling Keiko seating there while eating something. Yamamoto knew Keiko''s involvement and was ready for any kind of attack but saw Keiko simply waiting for something to give, out the order to start the execution. Keiko smiling watched the S¨­kyoku being released from its binding and ready to attack Rukia, Ichigo rushing in front of the S¨­kyoku to stop it with only one arm with blade behind his back.


    Yamamoto seeing this jumped out gave the order to attack and kill the intruder but before he or anyone could do anything Ukitake and 8th Division Captain Shunsui Ky¨­raku seal and destroy S¨­kyoku surprising everyone, Ichigo while holding Rukia in one hand removed the blade from his back with another and was about to stab the S¨­kyoku stand when Keiko appears next to him and stopped his blade. Ichigo surprised put more pressure in it but the blade didn''t move at all then he heard the voice of the smiling monster in front of him: Did I gave you permission to destroy this little boy?

 Chapter 66 - Aizens plan

    Keiko stopped Ichigo from destroying Sokyoku as he was interested in testing various things with it. Keiko smiled looking at Ichigo and said: Go on do your thing. I''m only here as an observer.


    Yamamoto ignoring Keiko and Ichigo looked at the two captains who have sealed and destroyed Sokyoku. Thinking these were the people Keiko has warned his about began his chase after giving instructions to kill or capture all the intruders. With both Ukitake and Shunsui taking Yamamoto away, arrived cat who took Sei Feng away with her. Ichigo looked at the smiling monster next to him who waved his hand indicating him to continue his plan. Ichigo throws Rukia to Renji and jumped down to get ready to fight completely ignoring Keiko, who just took out his chair again and seat down eating popcorn.


    One by one Ichigo knocks out Lieutenants and begins his fight with Byakuya. As the fight was going on, Keiko heard someone taking beside him: So did you enjoy the fight so far?


    Keiko without moving: Well I had to do something ease my boredom after you dragged me here.


    Aizen: When did you know it was me?


    Keiko: The moment I hear I was dragged into the matter. I knew about your little interest in Hogyoku and hand behind the incident behind the exile shinigami.


    Aizen: Are you interested in it? We can have everything in the world if we work together.


    Keiko laughed out loud: You still don''t get it, do you little birdy? I already have everything in the world in my hand.


    Aizen stunt after hearing this recovered and calm himself down and asked: Have you seen my bankai? It''s very unique.


    Keiko laughed again: Yes, yes go on. I don''t want you to feel I was being unreasonable to you.


    Keiko turned his face back but this time his eyes weren''t sealed like the times Aizen had seen Keiko but his eyes were completely red with weird yet beautiful and elegant black design in them, Aizen then heard a low cold voice: Kotoamatsukami


    Keiko started rewriting Aizen''s memories for him, the first thing he did was to make Aizen believe that Keiko was under the illusion like everyone else secondly, making him realize the existence of Wandenreich and mission to fight off and destroy them before Yhwach their leader regain his powers. Keiko knew Aizen would be useless against Yhwach but still wanted to pit both against each other. Knowing Aizen''s personality Keiko knew there was also a possibility of both of them combining their powers and turn against soul society and Royal palace thus made sure that Aizen under all circ.u.mstances betray Yhwach and commence in fighting the Quincy hidden forces.


    Smilingly, Keiko ignored Aizen who too ignored him and watched the ongoing fight below where Ichigo has released his Bankai. Real battle started between the two with Byakuya also releasing the final form of his bankai, finally, the hollow form of Ichigo came forth for a brief moment before he suppressed it and continue fighting Byakuya.


    Finally, the battle ending with Ichigo winning the fight by an inch, Byakuya leaving and Ichigo being collected by his friends who then started to ran away as they thought about how they have completed their mission of rescue.


    Keiko waited out waiting for the real show to begin, Aizen jumped down and Rukia along with Renju appeared on the hill followed by Tosen and Gin. Aizen starts describing his plan and whole plot like some mastermind slowly and calmly and almost took out Renji just in time to be rescued by Ichigo who along with everyone was informed about Aizen''s plot by the Lieutenant of Division 4 Isane Kotetsu on the instruction of her captain Unohana. Aizen goes on to trash both of them while also telling them the truth about Urahara and his involvement. After trashing both of them and Sajin Komamura who tried to surprise attack Aizen. Aizen goes on to collect Hogyoku from Rukia''s chest using Urahara''s technology.


    After collecting it, Aizen gives light to Gin to kill Rukia and the rest when Byakuya appears and saves Rukia, One by one all the people arrive surrounding all three traitor captains.


    Aizen seeing this simply smiles when the space in the sky broke and three pillar square of light surround all three captains, everyone identifies them as Negacion created by Gillian Menos. Seeing this Aizen slowly says his goodbyes to everyone and promises to meet everyone soon but suddenly a pressure breaks apart the touching goodbyes. Making everyone on their knees including the Captain-Commander Yamamoto, Keiko slowly walks through the air toward Aizen who seeing him was confused as he using his bankai to make it so that Keiko would leave the area after the battle of Ichigo and Byakuya is over. Slowly the pressure begins to increase stopping the moving pieces which were going toward the sky midway. Keiko laughing out loud: Do you think that little bankai worked on me? Do you know why they call me the Swordless titan? You idiot Zanpakuto are useless against me, no Zanpakuto can harm me. hahahahahaha


    Without waiting for Aizen''s response, Keiko enters the light Negacion and grab Aizen by the neck and lift him midair by his right hand while taking Hogyoku from Aizen''s hand using his left hand. Aizen expressing the complete brutal force of suppression from Keiko at very close range wasn''t able to move even a little bit, Keiko raised his left hand looked closely at the Hogyoku it was very small in shape compared to his own Hogyokus, Keiko with his deep research imprinted his seal into the Hogyoku and smiling returned Hogyoku to Aizen and said: Here you can take it, consider this your reward for doing and planning so much work. I like to watch you dance and think you''re in control. But remember Next time I simply kill you.


    Putting the Hogyoku back into Aizen''s pocket, Keiko moved back out of the Negacion and removed his pressure to let Menos take away all three captains.


    After the show was over Keiko turned around to see the O shaped face of everyone. Ever smilingly Keiko replied: I told you from the beginning I''m only here as an observer.


    Yamamoto seeing this sighted and ordered everyone to look after the injured once and report in on the damage. Keiko smiling said his byes and disappeared too after looking at Orihime and Ichigo his future test subjects one more time.

 Chapter 67 - New Duties

    Keiko inside the Royal palace starts explaining the entire incident and Aizen''s involvement in it along with his plans for him in the future.


    Keiko''s main goal was to get a new system in place to help soul society deal with Yhwach when the time comes as he had very special plans for him. Thus Keiko started manipulating the truth adding on the involvement and helping hand of Yhwach''s followers who have supported Aizen from behind the scene, Ichibe and other also believe him regarding Yhwach involvement due to two reasons, one simply because they thought that a single man can''t plan and execute everything alone, second being Keiko himself, he had using this incident also proved himself as a loyal and trustful in eyes of everyone.


    Ichibe and others started debating what next should be done in preparation for Yhwach if he truly was involved behind the incident. With everyone presenting their Ideas, Kirio asked Keiko regarding his vision, Keiko smilingly started explaining that they should use soul society as a shield under the command of Captain-commander Yamamoto, they should start working on making each captain more powerful so to create a safe ally and also a mean to decrease their opponent''s powers. Keiko also started describing Hogyoku and the possibilities it would open if completely unlocked, thus suggesting a complete change in the leadership.


    Ichibe and others too thought that using soul society as a shield and cancel out the power of enemies is an efficient method thus after discussing a bit asked Keiko if he had any idea about how to bring about the new changes. Keiko started the plan by pointing out that currently center 46 is nothing but a graveyard thus all the authority and power are within soul kings hands, he can introduce a completely new system with someone among the Royal guard as Adviser or something along the line using which we the royal guard will be able to, directly and indirectly, control soul society and use it when it is deemed necessary.


    Ichibe and others pounded on these ideas, with finally Ichibe adjoining the meeting to think more about the idea and the approach to be taken.


    Ichibe after the meeting was over told Keiko to come and meet him.


    Keiko knowing what Ichibe wanted to discuss with him, decided to first go and visit Oetsu Nimaiya. His purpose was to put in a request of meeting each spirit in their real form. Oetsu had already taught Keiko how to forge a Zanpakuto didn''t saw any harm in taking Keiko agreed. Keiko with a good mind left to meet Ichibe.


    Ichibe wanted to discuss the details regarding his new system idea, Keiko knowing that Ochibe might be suspecting him of doing something behind the scene if he chose not to go to soul society still recommended Semjumaru Shutara for the adviser while stating that she was well versed in training other with her experience with first division, and further explained to Ochibe that his plan is depended upon making the Soul society as in Gotei 13 more stronger then it is right now when one squad captain Zaraki Kenpachi doesn''t even know the name of his sword thus Semjumaru being the perfect candidate for the job.


    Leaving Ichibe alone in his thoughts Keiko left to meet Oetsu who completed his preparation, started their journey to visit each spirit of Zanpakuto who lived in the wild. There were tens and thousands of spirits of all Zanpakuto along with each having their unique powers and nature. Oetsu and Keiko visited them with Keiko being introduced as the new blacksmith of forging Zanpakuto. With Oetsu''s recommendation and will Keiko became familiar with spirit easily.


    Meanwhile, Ichibe decided to seek the opinion of the soul king who simply stated to go along with the plan thus with the blessing of the soul king Ichibe along with Kirio and Senjumaru decided to visit the Soul society himself and look at the situation closely while the center 46 was still a headless body.


    Ichibe met with Yamamoto who described the situation in his own words and explained the whole debacle. Seeing the reports to be true, Ichibe asked Yamamoto to gather all his captain together to assure Keiko''s assessment over them. Kirio went separately and looked into the research and other aspects of both Aizen and Hogyoku understanding the situation more clearly for herself while Senjumaru looked into the new center 46 which will be formed and who will be selected.


    Ichibe after meeting the captains knew that Keiko''s assessment was clear and just, soul society has depleted since the last thousand years and right now if Yhwach returns now as Keiko suspects then even the royal palace will be harmed badly decided to follow along with Keiko''s plan along with his suggestion thus Senjumaru was introduced as the new advisor of the Gotei 13 which will oversee that every squad have enough strength. Ichibe knew that Keiko was planning on doing something else which is why he didn''t want to take the advisor role himself, placed him directly under the command of Senjumaru thus bringing both clarities to the goal of increasing the power of Gotei 13 and also keeping Keiko under watchful observation of Senjumaru to make sure he stays out of trouble.


    In the name of Soul king, Ichibe introduced the direct involvement of Royal guards into Soul society stating that 3 of its captains have deflected while one can''t even use his bankai thus disappointing soul king to no limit thus this step has been taken to ensure the quality over quantity within Gotei 13. Yamamoto knowing that with Soul king''s name he can''t ignore or fight off this command felt that someone was manipulating the whole field again decided to meet and discuss privately with Ichibe to confirm his suspicion regarding a certain ever-smiling friendliest monster''s involvement.


    Meanwhile message of Keiko also being selected to serve again in soul society was delivered to Royal guards and Gotei 13 captains too. Oetsu and Keiko too received the message cutting their trip short and coming back.


    With Ichibe directly in command, Keiko didn''t argue against the order, he started hatching his plans especially regarding Ichigo and Orihmei who have now been simply handed to him under the pretense of training.

 Chapter 68 - Life in soul society

    Keiko and Senjumaru both started their life in the soul society, Senjumaru fully focused on completing her mission of making each squad more powerful decided to take the heavy load and train all the divisions Lieutenant and other members while leaving Captain''s for Keiko to train. She also gave Keiko 6 months to improve everyone so she would punish him personally.


    Keiko being both irritated and bored went to meet Yamamoto asking him to call all the captains.


    Yamamoto seeing no harm did that, Keiko took out a chair for himself and seat next to Yamamoto in the meantime. Soon all remaining captains came together.


    Seeing all of them here Keiko pointed at Byakuya and said: You over there tell me why are you so weak?


    Byakuya and other captains looked around and made sure the finger was pointed at Byakuya, Byakuya raised his hand and pointed toward himself as if still confused.


    Keiko annoyed screamed: Yes you, I''m the head of this clan and whatnot. Why are you so useless? You weren''t even able to protect your sister.


    Byakuya would have probably gotten angry at someone else but the person seating in front of him was both Older than him and more powerful than even the Captain-commander himself so he just lowered his head and listened.


    Keiko pointed at Sui Feng next and asked: If I brake both of your legs without you running around what can that useless Bankai of your do?


    Without waiting for anyone Keiko pointed at Zanpachi: You are so useless that you don''t even know your Shikai''s name.


    Keiko acting frustrated stood up and walked toward the window of the assembly Hall and started laughing loudly and acting like a crazy person: hehehehehe yes yes why didn''t I think this before. I will train all of you for 5 months after that if you''re not as strong as I want I will simply kill you and blame it on harsh training or something. Hehehehehe Then I will be free from babysitting idiots again hehehehehe.


    Keiko pointed at Yamamoto and moving toward all the captains said: Yes you all let''s start with training. In this Phase I will try to kill you all you have to do is survive.


    Keiko with a smile on his face simply disappeared from his position, Yamamoto screamed for everyone to draw out their Zanpakuto''s and shield each other but just as Mayuri Kurotsuchi started moving Keiko appeared in front of him ripping out his head from his body and disappearing again and a low cold voice rang in everyone''s ears: One down


    What none of the captains including captain-commander realized was that Keiko had trapped them all in a Genjutsu using his Sharingan when he first started asking them questions and humiliating them.


    Keiko wanted to let them build up a healthy fear of what a strong person can do to them and their loved ones before they begin working and begging for more power. Keiko let them continue getting buried deeper and deeper into Genjutsu.


    In Byakuya''s version, Keiko after ripping Mayuri''s head appeared in front of everyone, blood from Mayuri''s body showed on all of them painting their face and clothes red but as all of them were extremely skilled and experienced they didn''t get distracted and understood Keiko was trying to kill them. Keiko disappeared again this time appeared in front of Zaraki who was standing in front of Byakuya, Keiko punched through the chest of Zaraki, passing his complete hand through his chest and took Byakuya''s head in his hand and started pressing it. Byakuya felt extream pain of his skull being crushed when the doors of the assembly hall opened completely with Rukia and Renji along with other division 6 members rushing in, Byakuya at this moment forgot about the pain and started moving his hands to tell Rukia and others to run away but then he heard a low voice in his ear: My my your sister came herself to me. I should play with her a little bit too. don''t you think so too little Byakuya?. Byakuya''s eyes widened he tried to move by the hand on his face already disappeared. He looked around and saw, his fellow captain''s swords broken and injured all over even his face disfigured a bit. He ignoring his fellow captain''s plea for help and rushed toward Rukia who was running toward him. He saw that behind Rukia, Keiko appeared just behind members of his division 6 squad and ripped their head out. Using all his strength, Byakuya rushed toward Rukia but he saw himself moving extremely slowly along with Rukia, meanwhile, Keiko calmly walking next to each member and killing them one by one finally reaching Renji who was just behind Rukia, With a smile on his face Keiko looked at the terrified and disfigured face of Byakuya and gave him and ever charming smile before ripping out the head of Renji along with his spin from his body. Byakuya watched as Rukia looked back as blood fall all over her as she tried to scream but Keiko appearing right in front of her with a smile on his face completely covered in the blood slowly lifting Rukia in the air and giving another smile to Byakuya who using everything he had screamed to let her go before he watched Keiko break her neck in two. Byakuya broke down crying went straight to the floor on his knees.


    Byakuya opened his eyes once again to see Rukia one last time before dying but found himself seated on the floor with everything alright with his body, and fellow captain''s who appeared to be in similar condition as him completely baffled. He looked around and saw Keiko still seating in his chair giving his ever-charming smile. Byakuya took a deep breath to calm himself down before he heard the voice of the monster once again: Now shall we start again?


    Keiko used the same tactic with each captain other than Mayuri who using his other brain believed himself to be semi-immortal. Keiko started twisting his mind making him believe that Keiko is slowly destroying his very soul thus erasing his very existence which finally worked like a charm with Mayuri. Different captain''s believed and wanted different things thus using them became simple and efficient for Keiko.


    Using Genjutsu, Keiko also lets them face their inter demon thus making them adopt to their bankai and nature more clearly. Knowing that the Bount arc will start soon in the human world, Keiko sends orders to his Arrancar to look out for the soul collecting bees which will be created using the only female Bount who can reproduce as sacrifices. Keiko was no saint, he was human and selfish he always thought that the MC of fanfiction who tried to fix everything and make everyone happy was very idiotic, power leads to conflict and conflict leads to chaos which then leads to pain suffering and destruction thus no matter how much one try society can''t be fixed a balance can be created but it will be broken sooner or later if there is no end goal for the people to work toward.


    Bounts were sad people with sad stories which Keiko was sad about but he was more interested in cutting them open and finding what makes and gives each doll it''s unique ability then finds justice for them.


    Keiko after torture..... I mean training them for 3 rounds let them out of the Genjutsu, with everyone on their knees Keiko smiled and laughing loud said: First round of training done for the day, I''m newly assigned assistant Advisor to improve and train all of you. What you all experienced today was something that is similar to Aizen''s power. We will continue this for the next two days until I have crushed all your hopes and Wills. After that, we will begin the real training to make you a proper shinigami.


    Keiko finishing his speech disappeared from his seat along with his seat.

 Chapter 69 - Training with the Ever-smiling young boy

    Thus begin the daily practice of Keiko with Everyone else. Keiko first taught everyone something he was specialized in, fighting without a Zanpakuto for which he was famous for and titled as. Secondary came the use of Kido art completely to measure the strength of your opponents. Likes of Zaraki and Yamamoto preferred to fight with their Zanpakuto so Keiko tortured them, even more, forcing them to change their ways of fighting. With Yamamoto, he taught him how to preserve his energy without showing off and wasting power while fighting. Zaraki was a special case, Keiko first took away his Zanpakuto itself and forcing him to fight using different means.


    After 4 months of training everyone, Keiko announced that a tournament will be held between captains, lieutenants, and others seaters among their grade, those who are deemed too weak will be severely punished by him and those who win the tournament will be given a free change to attack him in any manner they want, he won''t retaliate or block the attack in any manner.


    The tournament had different categories such as the use of different art forms: Hakuda using one''s own body to fight the opponent, Hoho race to motivate each other and decrease the gap between the speed of an individual regardless of their ranks, Kido which Keiko has personally taught and finally full-on fight with Zanpakuto and everything people were free to use any form of their sword they want Shikai bankai or whatever. Yamamoto was prohibited from using his Zanpakuto in the final event and have to fight off opponents using other means with a simple training sword.


    Keiko smilingly announced all everything to the entire soul society while also putting in a request to bring back the 5 individual humans who invaded soul society at Rukia''s trail explaining that he saw potential in some of them while also demanding that the soul society should bring back Urahara back into the soul society so that all the information regarding Hogyoku is extracted from him, helping them understand the situation much better. Senjumaru seeing that Keiko is completely focused on the task like her also approved his actions, both she and Keiko sent a weekly report back to Ichibe regarding the progress.


    In the meantime, after Keiko has given out the order to look for soul-sucking bees of bounts in the human world to Arrancar. Arrancar using Hope AI which has already integrated with the human world technology easily found them and reported back that the bounts capable to reproduction has not been taken yet and is moving toward the Karakura Town, Keiko seeing this ordered his Arrancar''s to kidnap both the female bount and everyone else which are found to be a bounts with her.


    Keiko''s thinking was clear, why bother only get the egg when you can get the chicken and later resume the process of chicken make the egg after you are done understanding the chicken completely. Bounts were immortal as long as they are feed souls anyway thus he wasn''t worried about the time this is going to take or the development of character it is going to make. Yhwach will return in recovered in the end and attack both the soul society and royal palace in the end anyway.


    The tournament was interesting as each captain wanted nothing more than kick Keiko in the ass once, everyone tried their best. Keiko with his ever smiling face smiled, even more, every time someone made some kind of stupid mistake or something. While the tournament was going on Keiko also put in a request to the center 46 regarding the restoration of S¨­kyoku if possible, he wanted to understand the process of how the S¨­kyoku was made by combining the force of million Zanpakuto''s. Kido tournament winner was Byakuya Kuchiki while Hakuda was won by Zaraki, Hoho using Shunpo art went to Yamamoto while Muyari won the all-out fight using different techniques and strategies against his opponents.


    Keiko prepared to give out the rewards stood in front of everyone with both hands behind his back looked at the four winners and asked: Do you want to attack me together or one at a time? You all can use all your powers including Bankai.


    Yamamoto looked at the smiling monster in front of him and knew this is not as simple as it seems looked at his captain''s who also looked at him and nodded all four of them shouted: Bankai except Zaraki who still hadn''t unlocked his bankai he simply removed his eye patch thus increasing his power to another level.


    Keiko yawn seeing all of this and slowly said: Haki active.


    His body without changing color to the n.a.k.e.d eyes started shining a little. One after other attacks landed on him, starting with a fully powered attack from Zaraki cutting him in half but the blade failed to even harm the hair on his head next came Byakuya who used his Bankai''s billion blades and tried to cut Keiko but the petal''s simply bounced off Keiko, Muyari using his bankai released acid directly onto Keiko trying to melt him but Acid just slid off his body not even harming his cloths. Yamamoto controlling his Reiatsu used his entire power and tried to cut Keiko into two half. Keiko under Yamamoto bounced from places to places breaking various walls and such before finally stopping with only a burning slash cutting his cloth with a black mark on his skin.


    Keiko with a smile cleaned his clothes while everyone looked at him with O shape and said: Well looks like I haven''t been training you all hard enough, only a scratch on me?


    Keiko along with everything trained his Haki to the limit and started making different versions Golden was peculiar of Haki which IM had what Keiko did was cast an illusion onto each of them making them believe he was just standing there when he was completely covered in Haki.


    Ichigo, Orihime, and Sado decided to join in the journey to soul society along with Urahara and Yoruichi.


    All of them were taken straight to the Assembly hall of captain, Yamamoto along with the rest were waiting for them meanwhile Keiko was sleeping in his chair smilingly. Seeing that everyone was here Yamamoto banged on the head of Keiko who was sleeping in the chair next to Yamamoto. Keiko wakes up and yawned and saw Ichigo and others standing in front of him. Keiko seeing Ichigo looked at Zaraki and said: You will refight with this human if you lose the fight then I will kill you.


    Ichigo and his party weren''t able to understand what was happening when suddenly Zaraki removing his Eye patch attacked Ichigo using Kido art. Urahara and Yoruichi jumped in front to block the attack when Muyari and Sei Feng attacked them and blocked them from protecting Ichigo. Ichigo quickly took his Zanpakuto and tried to dodge the attack and attack back Zaraki when the Kido art tuned back and attacked Ichigo midair leaving him no room to dodge, Ichigo using his fighting instinct used his Zanpakuto''s weight turned to the side. Orihime was blocked by Unohana while Sado faced his old opponent Shunsui who didn''t injure him just stopped him from helping Ichigo. Zaraki seeing Ichigo moved waved his hand forming another Kido art form ground-based where Ichigo would land and went on the offense, Using his own Zanpakuto, Zaraki deflected Ichigo''s Zanpakuto while planting a heavy high concentrated Reiatsu punch on his stomach making Ichigo land on the spot where Kido trap was set up. Keiko seeing this smiled brightly. Finally, the pain taking narcissist was fighting using his head, he remembers in the first fight Zaraki had let Ichigo hit him and injure him.


    Keiko didn''t stop the fight as he wanted to see if Zaraki can respond to Ichigo''s speed in his bankai form.


    Ichigo landed, different pikes came from the ground injuring his body from different parts. Seeing that all his allies and friends are being pushed around Ichigo decided to go all in and started concentrating his Reiatsu and screamed: BANKAI


    Zaraki seeing the situation looked at Keiko who just watched everything with a smile. Zaraki too smiled like crazy seeing this and concentrated all his powers in a single point to make a protective layer around his body.


    Ichigo rushed to Zaraki moving fast behind his back and attacked his arm in hope to injure it, but his blade just deflected from the shoulder he wasn''t able to pierce it, Zaraki moved back using Hoho art Keiko have beaten into him with his natural wild instinct turned around fast and cut Ichigo in half. Ichigo using his speed escape in the blink of an eye and start attacking Zaraki from different angles. Zaraki not losing his cool in a fight, maintained his concentration and the Reiatsu around his body moved away from Ichigo and tried to create some distance, Ichigo thinking that this is the limit of Zaraki continued rushing with him, Zaraki seeing this creates various traps around him using the battleground for advantage which Keiko has taught him.


    Ichigo rushed into one of the traps injuring himself further, created distance from Zaraki understanding that the back away was also part of a strategy decided to use Getsuga Tensh¨­.


    Seeing this Keiko decides to intervean blocking Getsuga Tensho with just a single figure clade in golden Haki just as it was about to be fired, stopping the motion of the Sword midways.

 Chapter 70 - The abomination

    Ichigo couldn''t believe his eye. after his miserable defeat with Aizen and seeing the power of the boy standing in front of him he has started training with Urahara in the real world, preparing in case something big happens in advance. But now the young boy just stopped his attack with nothing by a finger-like Aizen last time.


    Before Ichigo could muster all his throughts, Keiko after blocking Ichigo by his finger took him by the neck and started using his Reiatsu which invaded Ichigo''s body and check the type of Soul Ichigo has. Smilingly Keiko tuned and looked toward Yamamoto and said: Old man, what you see before you is an abomination, from my observation his boy has Shinigami, hollow, and lastly Quincy powers all in him. All his powers have manifested in two, entities One holding his Hollow and Shinigami powers while another holding Quincy powers. His Zanpakuto right now which we see is not a Zanpakuto but his Quincy powers which he hasn''t completely activated.


    Yamamoto and all the captain hearing this stared at Ichigo as if he was somekind of monster. Yamamoto himself stood up and moved toward Ichigo to inspect him more clearly. Keiko in the meantime started slowly leaking his black mass into Ichigo''s body which mixed in with his muscles and such making it harder for him to move his body. After incapacitating Ichigo, Keiko throws his in front of Yamamoto and started walking toward Orihime and Sado who along with Unohana was being stopped by the three captains.


    Keiko simply stood in front of both of them and nodded his head smilingly and went back to his seat.


    Keiko taking his seat started increasing his pressure making everyone kneel except Yamamoto said: As I have suspected the boy and the girl along with him have gotten their powers from Hogyoku which was present in Rukia Kuchiki''s body. I hereby order division 6 and 10 captains to go into the Human world and investigate the scope of exposer other people had with the Hogyoku. Kisuke Urahara and Yoruichi Shihoin both will remain with Divison 12 and provide all the information they had on Hogyoku other than the process of its creation which will be deemed as a High rank which can be known to no-one other than Captain commander Yamamoto. Ichigo Kurosaki, Orihime Inoue, and Yasutora Sado will remain in the soul society under the watch of division 13 till all matter is investigated. An entity like Ichigo who an use the power of all 3 beings is often deemed too powerful thus Ichigo will be restricted from using any more of his power of any kind while his companions Orihime Inoue and Yasutora Sado will be examined to understand their powers and if they are too powerful. All material and information regarding all kinds of findings will any be shared with Captain-Commander Yamamoto and Ichibe Hyosube only no information shall be recorded in any manner to prevent the leak.


    Finishing his "Order" Keiko smilingly disappeared and went to meet Senjumaru to report in on everything. Senjumaru was proficient in running an entire division which she did in the soul society, each division specialized in something special like Division 4 was a relief team which would heal and look after the sick people, Senjurmaru using Keiko idea formulated a time system which would provide less stress on individuals who work their while also making sure people are being treated efficiently. New Kido art made by Keiko which used less Reiatsu and healed people faster was also taught to everyone regardless of their seat within the squad.


    Similarly, Other divisions were also powered and improved. Many time divisions were influenced by their captain''s personality and lost track of their style thus making it harder for them to grow individually. Senjumaru after carefully observing everything started changing the divisions itself. If a person''s power and nature were more compatible with the other division then Senjumaru would note it down and after every month the teams will change from within thus insuring that no to less manpower is wasted within the division itself.


    Keiko had already spent around 6 months working on improving powers of the captain''s was nowhere near his goal of making Soul society a knife to weaken Yhwach decided to drag Royal guards too into the mix to fight for him. Yhwach was the son of the Soul King meaning the son of a lesser god which meant an extremely excellent test subject. He never actually believed any crap which those Primal or whatever god said for all he knew they were the once trying to use him, thus when he was talking to them he let Hope take over his body enclosing his mind completely making himself unable to think anything to not let any of his thought loud out as he knew they can read his mind while letting Hope record all the converstion. In the beginning Soul King was also very suspicious, why would he come into this world and live like this, Keiko finally got his answer when he visited 3 of the 4 domains of the world and looked into souls of each being Hollow, Shinigami, and Humans. According to Hope and his analysis what soul king was doing was somewhat similar to what Beyonder in marvel did to Asgardians, creating an endless cycle of reincarnation from one world to another thus using them as an endless battery to recharge his powers in. Keiko knew that he currently didn''t either had the means to do anything regarding the Soul king thus started Hatching a new plan for himself. He already decided to go to the Marvel world next after collecting certain things from the previous worlds and look for One above all himself.


    Keiko''s research has to lead him to look at the complete story behind the origin of all three worlds. In the beginning, there was only one world in the original human world were Souls and humans both resided. Then came the Hollow who would eat the souls and kill humans to turn them into Soul and then eat it too. After the arrival of the Hollows came Soul king who would use his powers to destroy the very soul of Hollows itself. All the Hollows at that time seeing the danger merged into a single entity the first Menos, it is said that the soul king using his powers slay the Grand Menos and thus creating the Hueco Mundo were Hollows would stay. Then came the sealing done by 5 clans who somehow already knew how to channel the power of Soul King thus dividing the worlds thus creating 4 parts Soul Society, Human world, Hueco Mundo, and hell.


    Keiko didn''t know the entire picture but knew that this is a beautiful trap laid out by soul king to feed himself constantly thus wanted to take Yhwach and leave this world before gaining more power and getting myself a Lesser god''s body to experiment on.


    With the involvement of Ichibe, other royal guards will also be involved such as the matter regarding Ichigo''s Bankai. Oetsu the creator of Bankai would certainly be interested in knowing how the powers of a Quincy can manifest into a Zanpakuto spirit thus will come looking for answers here while Kirio will look into Orihime''s power which can revert one''s condition into its original state making a unique test subject.


    He had already created himself an army to fight off Yhwach and his forces when they are weakened by the Soul society and Royal guards. He was unsure about the leak between Yhwach and Soul king thus wanted to stay away from direct concentration for now and watch as Chess pieces on his board dance around for him.

 Chapter 71 - Titled Part. I

    Ichibe after receiving the report that Senjumaru and Keiko sent decided to come to Soul society to come and look at Ichigo and his friends himself. Keiko in his report made Ichigo look like the next Soul King himself, stating that if Ichigo reaches his full potential he can take place of Soul King himself and bring a balance to the worlds.


    Meanwhile, Byakuya and Hitsugaya reported back on the condition of Ichigo''s family starting with his father Isshin who was suspected to be an exiled Shinigami while his sister also had high Reiatsu within their souls making them able to feel the presence of Hollows. Isshin was the formal commander of division 10 and captain of Hitsugaya when he was within the division as a normal member itself, thus leading Hitsugaya to recognize Isshin immediately. Keiko had sent both Hitsugaya and Byakuya with specific instructions to only observe and report back, not to personally take any action until the Human world is any kind of danger. Thus after collecting all the information, both reported back to Yamamoto about Ichigo''s family and classmates.


    On another front, the research regarding the Gagai artificial body of Arrancar and Vasto Lorde completed, and his whole army was mixed in within the Human World where the formally exiled captains and other members of Aizen''s failed experiments of Hollowfication which were now known as Visored lived. Using Thousands of Hollows and Shinigami souls, Keiko has powered his Hogyoku to make a more perfect form out of his Arrancar and Vasto Lorde. There were around 20 Arrancar who were above or at least at Yamamoto''s power level while 50 of Vasto Lorde just bit less powerful them him. He ordered his Vasto Lorde''s to go and capture Visored for experiment purposes.


    Bounts which he had captured were taken into his dimension, he began his experimentation by ripping on to the soul of one of the member Sawatari who''s doll was Baura, who''s power mainly focused on Space which was completely useless for Keiko who had Kumai which was pretty much a more stronger version of this ability. Keiko first took Sawatari to Hueco Mundo out layer and let him there to observe from a faraway distance, Bounts due to having High Reiatsu within Human form were mostly hunted down by Hollows all over the world thus Sawatari quickly attracted all the small weak and few middle-range powered Hollows to himself.


    Sawatari''s Reiatsu slowly degraded while fighting, He lost an arm and a lot of blood but the wave of Hollows didn''t stop, weakening and injuring him over and over and finally killing him. Seeing this Keiko was disappointed and decided to use another Bount this time he didn''t throw the bount into Hueco Mendo but used one of his Hogyoku to experiment with him, He slowly using the same method as Arrancar''s creation started Upgrading them giving them power of Hollow in the beginning, but experiment failed to make the bount a complete Hollow and erasing his Bount nature leading to Keiko losing Ryo Utagawa one of his another Bount who Keiko didn''t kill but decided to use it as distraction if deemed necessary in the future, same happened with Shinigami power which this time simply destroyed the Reiatsu network of the Bount burning their very soul to ashes thus ending Mabashi. Leaving Keiko with 8 Bounts.


    Keiko took out another one and ripped out his soul out to understand it. Research and comparison with other types of souls such as humans, Shinigami, and Hollow developed a theory regarding the concept of the soul''s consumption and immortality. After more understanding behind the concept, Keiko decided to try consuming one himself. The soul which were brought into the soul society right after their death were purest and freshest without any identify memory or nature thus Keiko decided to raid those souls.


    Keiko first waited for the soul to arrive before taking over it with his Reiatsu erasing it from the system of Reincarnation which Soul kings had going on for himself. Before taking it himself, Keiko feeds it to Bounts under him, this time the test subject was Ugaki who in the storyline died pathetically by his doll. The soul changed the very nature of Ugaki himself giving him a Reiatsu of the level of Lieutient to lower class captain from someone who needed to be constantly fed, Interested in the Changes Keiko stopped experimenting and started the starvation game with Ugaki. Usually due to the low-level constant leak of Reiatsu for Bounts forced them to feed to sustain their powers. Keiko wanted to see how much power would Ugaki lose over time and will be the regular soul of a living Human which was impure due to human nature and such.


    As Keiko was waiting for the results he turned his attention toward another thing, While Ichibe along with Oetsu decided to come to Soul society he decided to visit Soul king himself. Turning his brain completely off, activating Hope mode which was Hope who has been with his since the beginning acting like him.


    Keiko arrived in front of Soul King who had his eyes close within the crystal


    Keiko in front of Soul King: I''m planning on leaving for a while, I have learned everything I can from this world.


    Soul King: I see, but still don''t have your Zanpakuto. Is their some assistance you need from me regarding this.


    Keiko: Thanks but I have decided to collect a few Items myself before making one myself.


    Soul King: Okay, Few things I should tell you is that to go to the next world you will need to defeat the strongest person who is not a lesser god in the world.


    Keiko: I''m already more powerful then Yamamoto and Ichibe while Yhwach your son is still sealed so, I think I can already go.


    Soul King: Yes you''re stronger than them but still you can''t leave without defeating Yhwach.This is your mission in this world.


    Keiko: If I remember correctly, I''m the God of Destruction''s successor while you''re just a subordinate. So I don''t think you can give me missions or tell me what to do.


    Soul King: Yes that''s correct but this was something which was decided by the primal gods themself along with your pathway into the journey of divinity.


    Keiko: I think you''re forgetting who''s subordinate you are. My actions won''t be controlled by anyone, and certainly not by you or those Primal gods.


    Soul King: I''m merely stating what I was told. Slay Yhwach and you can leave.


    Keiko: Are you threatening me??


    Soul King: No, I''m just stating the facts here.


    Keiko: I thought you would have understood a little by me in the past 600 years but it seems, I was wrong. I would rather help Yhwach kill you and stay in this world instead of jumping the hops for you.


    Soul King with a little smile on his face: Do you think you both can kill me?


    Keiko: We both know, you won''t be trapped in this crystal not because you want too but to prevent the world laws from getting to you. No, I don''t think I and Yhwach both combined will be able to kill you but tell me this, will you forever be able to keep me here? From what I understand those Primal gods of yours need something from me which is why I''m here.


    Soul King whose eyes were still closed weren''t able to see that Keiko who was standing in front of him, was smiling like crazy. Keiko''s eyes started changing from normal to EMS to Rinnegan. Keiko decided to use Human Path onto Soul King. While he wasn''t sure if this will kill the soul king but he was certain he will be able to read his mind.


    Soul King who was unprepared for the mental attack could not protect himself completely and Keiko started watching Soul King''s memories.


    In the beginning, the Soul King was one of the gods created to serve as a link between the world he had nothing to do with Souls or anything like that, but it all changed one day when one of his fellow lower gods introduced the method of increasing one''s powers and increase their boundaries. Soul King being Sneaky ran away from the lower gods court and stumble upon one of the low tier worlds in which energy was concentrated and without disruption decided to use his specialty and made the low tier world trap into space lock thus hiding himself and the world. He first started with the experimentation of the pure soul which he found in the world. Using his knowledge and divinity he created Hollows. His plan was simple, introduce the big bad villain to the world than save it and be treated like a god among man.


    Thus the introduction of Hollow, in the first few years everything went perfectly with his plan but he soon realized that the space lock over the world was slowly failing the world laws were started to bind him making him weaker and weaker turning him into a normal Human, not wanting to lose his power Soul King combined all the Hollows which he had created making the Grand Menos and killed it revealing himself to the entire world as the knight in the shining armor.


    But he in his plan didn''t consider one thing the nature of a human. Some people saw him as a source of power while many started fearing him afraid of his power thinking of various ways to destroy him, and one day he finally saw the world itself retaliate against him but creating the first Quincy itself, Quincy had the power to destroy the very soul of a creature itself thus was also being able to harm the now world laws weakened Soul King.


    In constant fear of his life and losing his power Soul king decided to kill the first Quincy before he could even understand the very nature of his power and come after him. For his, he hatched another plan he selected 5 of his Human followers and had the Quincy killed but the world destroyed his plan again by producing more entities that could somewhat harm or hurt him. Soul King filled with Parinoa decided to do what his fellow lesser god have told him, feeding on souls to gain power and prolong his powers.


    Do this he created his legacy as the savior and used the 5 human''s under him seal him in a crystal made out of the mass form of power which he extracted from the body of the First ever Quincy which world law has created, thus making the crystal seem natural and preventing world laws from imposing more, restrictions onto him.


    Thus creating, the perfect scenario from him, he feeds on the memories and deed of the people when their soul transmitted from one world he had created to another. Without actually destroying and violating the world laws itself which became more and more rigid after some time. His son Yhwach was created with the intent of his will of processing a shadow for himself to move around and control the world while he becomes powerful with each cycle of reincarnation. But world laws destroyed Yhwach''s will and made him a person on his own, without actually removing all the memories of his wills, thus began the struggle between the trapped Soul King and Yhwach who was part of himself over the control of all the power. Soul King, unlike Yhwach, wasn''t able to come into the real world and fight he had to remain in the special mass power crystal. Yhwach knowing this wanted to disintegrate the crystal to let the world laws deal with Soul King while he will absorb all his powers making him a true god.


    Soul king using his pawns such as Shinigami and souls which worshipped and followed him to destroy Yhwach and ending his enemy once for all but Shinigami were useless Yhwach was too powerful for everyone thus, Soul King decided to cut off his own hands and legs to make a part of himself come into the world and deal with him.


    Yhwach with all the memories of the will knew about everything regarding Soul King thus, was before hand-prepared for such things. Soul King along with Shinigami such as Yamamoto and Ichibe among others with his parts attacked Yhwach. Yhwach knowing he can''t make alone decided to take a step back and ran away with half of his powers seal while making everyone believe he is dead. But Soul King was still about to feel his presence into the world was very cautious and decided to hide his parts for later while he slowly feeds on everyone.


    But everything changed, One day space in front of Soul king cracked and came to a voice telling him that a child will be sent to him who he has to keep busy for a while until further instructions are sent. The voice also told him to make the child believe he the soul king was his ally and make the child relay on him. In return, the world laws imposed on him will be uplifted and he will be given the chance to join back in with the lesser gods court. And lastly that the person sent to him believes himself to be the successor of God of destruction thus to pretend to be a subordinate of the same making his task easier.


    Soul king was thrilled to no limits hearing this, he knew the voice he heard was from one of the higher gods decided to accept the deal and thus started his plan with Keiko. He closely observed Keiko and found him to be very ordinary in teams of powers and such, so he multiple times tried to probe into the soul and read the memories but felt some powerful forces protecting the soul making it impossible for him to understand everything about Keiko thus after some thinking he started manipulating him, he first gave him everything but then started using Ichibe as a medium to deal with his enemy Yhwach once for all using Keiko. He sent Keiko to the soul society and dragged him into the mess.


    But today, when Soul King heard Keiko wanted to leave in anger, decided to use primal gods but saw that Keiko didn''t even give them any face thus decided to use the reason of binding him and controlling him stating that he will first need to take care of Yhwach if he wants to leave thus hitting 2 birds with one stone, making Keiko stay here and ending Yhwach threat once for all.


    Keiko also saw other memories of lesser gods and information about the gods in general.


    From what Soul king had in his memories, there were 2 primal gods. God of Chaos and Goddess of Creation. Everyone else was just beings which came into being when worlds were builds. God of destruction was just a middle-tier god of a higher tier than the Soul king himself. Keiko wasn''t any way related to him. The god resided in the world of Dragon ball or so Keiko guesses and was known as one of the generals under God of Chaos.


    Keiko after reading all the memories show that the soul king''s soul was sucked into much lesser size due to the use of Human path. Now that he knew the exact situation of what was going on Keiko decided to play with the world itself because now this world was nothing but a joke to him. He left soul king alone, soul king opened his eyes from feeling the powers he had acc.u.mulated for more than 2000 years being halved. Keiko changed his eyes from Rinnegan to EMS and used Kotoamatsukami on the now eye open Soul king started changing his memories just a little bit. Soul King now will make Keiko in charge of the entire soul society while also making his parts which he had hidden away come out to Keiko.


    Keiko''s intent with the Parts was such that he wanted to understand the soul of a lesser god himself to remove whatever was imprinted onto his soul. He could use the same method used by Hollows to divide their souls into 2 parts. He would part the imprinted soul part and leave it alone thus removing all influence they had over him.


    Keiko decided to take it once for all, hatched a new plan. A good one this time.


    New Plan: Bleach World


    Titled: Destroy Bleach world.


    For he won''t leave a single being alone till he finds Asuna.

 Chapter 72 - Titled Part. II

    Keiko after meeting with the soul king learned many things, firstly Yhwach was an imprinted will of the soul king which wanted to absorb Soul king''s soul while adding his consciousness thus giving him both the power to rule as a god while not being trapped under the rules of world laws.


    Secondly, the soul king has trapped the entire Bleach world realm in the space lock which was his power due to which it is hidden away from rest of the gods thus making it a safe place for Keiko to stay and hid in after he had controlled soul king and take control over the domain. Which brought him to his next discovery and an important decision. Keiko found out the most important thing which is that when soul king comes out of the crystal, the Soul King in addition to being fall under the world laws would also become an existence which is part of heaven as a lesser god thus information about the ongoing activities of the god realm would be available to him, which would mean that Keiko while dragging and destroying Soul king using world laws can use the divinity connection of Soul King to find out news about his Asuna. But doing so would as Keiko estimates a mark of Soul King''s divinity which can be used by others to find bleach world even when it''s hidden in the space vortex. Thus Keiko had to choose if he wanted to use Soul King as a radio or keep his hidden place hidden.


    Thirdly, Soul king was much easier to deal with than he expected, his original plan was to gain everything from this world and leave then return when he is powerful enough to take on Soul King but now after reading the memories of the Soul king he understood that the soul king was in deep shit if he ever tries to leave the Crystal, the world laws will either destroy him or leave him in a mortal state which is why Soul king wanted Yhwach dead, he planned to use the body of Yhwach as his when Yhwach will which now has formed its consciousness destroyed.


    Keiko after thinking a bit about it decided to use soul king as a radio to listen to news about Asuna, the gods which sent him to this world already knew about the location of this world. As they sent him to soul king doorsteps already.


    With a clear mindset and goal, Keiko went to the Human world and looked into the world seed project which Hope informed him is already done. Hope following Keiko''s instructions along with the help of his Hollow army also created Nanotech in quantity to cover everything.


    With no sign of Arranrac showing up in the Human world, Keiko assumed that Aizen is following along his suggestion and looking for Yhwach. With this development, Keiko launched the World seed into the world. He had with his estimation little less than 2 years before Yhwach revives and starts acc.u.mulating powers. With Timeline, Keiko started slowly spreading his nanotech into everything from food to water thus making all humans infected with nanotech, Keiko only needed around 2 nanotech to be present in any human to forcefully upload person''s consciousness into the world seed.


    On one hand, his human world company expanded into everything and everywhere, while on other Hope started creating Sleeping chambers in the number in billions in the form of Hibernation chambers.


    Keiko left his Arrancar and Vasto Lorde to take care of everything in the Human world while also training. He had 20 Arrancar and 50 Vasto Lorde which all took 3 shifts and overlooked all projects in the human world using their Artificial Gagai which Keiko has developed.


    Keiko himself being on the clock returned to the Soul Society. Ichigo was questioned and experimented on by various people to understand his powers. Mayuri tested his body while Oetsu tested his Zanpakuto, Ochibe tested the nature of the energy he expelled. Orihime power where a mystory to everyone, Mayuri or Kirio were able to find anything about it.


    Keiko after knowing there was a way of knowing about Asuna wasn''t in the mood to play around anymore. Keiko first ordered his Hollow army to increase their power and train harder. He also felt that it''s time for Ichibe to take some rest from this world so he started forming a plan to remove him and Tenjio for one set for all. Oetsu was stilled needed as he wanted to meet each spirit of Zanpakuto in existence and leave an imprint on each of them using his black matter.


    The spirit according to what Oetsu has told Keiko was that they resided in a very secluded seal and hidden part within soul society itself which is only known to him few other people. When it is decided that a shinigami is worthy but hasn''t found a worthy Zanpakuto then on the recommendation of Center 46 Oetsu opened the pathway like done in the case of Toshiro Hitsugaya and his now dead friend Sojiro Kusaka.


    Keiko along with his Hollow army was powerful enough to deal with all 3 portions standing between him and soul king, Aizen with his Hollows, Yamamoto and rest of the shinigami supporting soul king and lastly Yhwach along with his Quincy followers. But Keiko wanted Yhwach to come out himself so that everything can end at once.


    Keiko returned to the Soul Society and acted like nothing happened while on one hand continuing his experimenting with Bounts and another observing Ichigo and Orihime powers up close. Ichigo''s soul was special as it could contain 2 spirits of different kinds and power thus making him an interesting test subject while Orihime powers drove directly from her soul created due to her nature.


    Keiko let Yamamoto and the rest of the people run around and do the test on Ichigo and Orihime powers while he focused on Bounts. Ugaki had turned into a powerful person after consuming the pure soul which Keiko had given him but with so much power of a pure soul, his soul started to burn a little. Keiko seeing this started feeding Ugaki more and more souls. With dramatic power-up, Ugaki screamed in pain continuously, his doll hungry for more power left Ugaki side and followed all orders of Keiko the person giving the soul instead.


    Painfully after 3 months, Ugaki died with his soul completely erased. Keiko seeing this started understanding more about souls in general.


    Soul king''s memories didn''t consist a lot about Soul only his method of using it in the reincarnation cycle. Keiko wasn''t able to get all the memories from Soul King as he had not absorbed the entire soul but only Half of it when he used the Human path on him. If he had consumed the entire soul then the world balance the soul king had created would have been lost. Hope also informed him that his soul after the absorption has increased leaps and bounds. While Soul King''s powers were halved due to Keiko, his powers have increased to at least fully charge 4 God trees.


    Keiko after done with Pure Soul consumption with his understanding of the bounts soul, started trying to modify a soul of a human into a bounts. After numerous tries, he was able to imprint a fake version of the soul turning a human into Bount.


    All the expriments which Keiko did were within his dimension thus leaving no trace to follow behind or chances of anyone ever knowing anything about him. Keiko''s dimension was part of his soul thus not under the preview of the world laws as he was from his understanding not under the world laws. Keiko thinking this brought out the Human immortal he has created out of there. The world laws in the form of lightning destroyed the Human as soon as he was brought out. Keiko stood on the side and watched as he didn''t want to mess with world laws and tribunals again after his experience in one piece world.


    Keiko seeing this understood only he was the exception, almost Completed with his bounts project, he checked the soul of the reproductive Bounts to understand what made her special. After all research into her soul and understanding more about the nature of the soul which world laws have let it exist even when it''s the kind which was out of the boundary of supernatural, he after done with his reseach let Jin Kariya using EMS had him do the little ritual thus creating Bittos.


    Feeding the souls of a different kind of learning how to create them. Keiko was finally done with Bounts after 3 months. Bittos which were created by Kariya extracted the soul of a human while alone taking the specific part of it thus making it unstable and turning the human from which it is extracted into nothing but ash. Keiko after understanding Kariya''s Bittos started using his approach of creating different types of Bittos, to extract souls from Hollows, Shinigami''s alike. This project took more than 7 months to complete leading to the creation of the Bittos army for Keiko for all kinds. Hollows, Shinigami or Quincy had a different kind of Bittos which could extract souls from them thus turning them into ashes.


    With his other army, Keiko once again turned his attention to Soul society, After 7 months of interrogations and research, nothing was found regarding Orihime and Sado to explain the bases or limits of their power. With both of them not done any kind of crime or harm in the soul society or the human world, Ichibe let them leave soul society and continue their day to day life. Keiko for being about to identify was also told to came and work to find answers which he flat out refused, Keiko was just like one of the high ranking members of the royal guard thus he had the chose to refuse anything which he wished, Soul King under the influence of EMS also agreed with Keiko''s side. Letting him run around free.


    While in the case of Ichigo was also released from Soul Society who wanted him to be their ally rather than an enemy in the upcoming battle. Yamamoto originally intended to Kill Ichigo and destroy the source of abomination one seat for all but with arguments from Byakuya, Yoruichi and some other captain''s along with the suggestion from Keiko and Oetsu, that Ichigo has done nothing wrong and can be used in the battle against Aizen as he hasn''t seen his Shikai making him a valuable asset. Thus Yamamoto, in the end, instructed everyone to train Ichigo and make him a soldier within the Soul society. After 1 year and 3 months, Ichigo was finally permitted to return to the human world and live with his family as humans.


    With inconsistency in the timeline, Keiko let the Gotei 13 play out with filler arc, creating it as a sort of test from them to overcome. Keiko in the meanwhile started training his Hollow army making them more powerful.


    With 11 months gone from the start of the nanotech project, the 80% population of the world infected by Keiko, Keiko focused on the hibernation chamber. With each Nanotech working divided into the world along with the satellite, Hope got the exact number of hibernation chambers required for the task, thus production fastened with a goal seat in the mind. Keiko seeing the inconsistency in the timeline, send some of his specialized probes into Hueco Mundo to look at the whole condition.


    Unlike the original timeline Aizen this time didn''t send his Arrancar into the human world to spy on Ichigo. Aizen was more focused on the idea, Keiko had implanted into his head. Aizen started researching the son of the soul king and Quincy''s powers. With the idea to combine all three, Aizen started his experiments in Hueco Mundo. Keiko seeing no one arrive or any development from Aizen side presumed Aizen will likely either join Yhwach in the final battle or fight against him in case Yhwach refuses to ally with him


    Seeing this Keiko returned to Royal palace where he along with Oetsu after the permission from Ichibe resumed his journey to met the Zanpakuto spirits.


    After over 8 months, He completed his task of at least knowing all the spirits using his Kamui and EMS. Using Kamui he traveled the entire journey faster while using his EMS to make Oetsu do all his bidding he completed this faster than it should have taken, there were millions of Spirits of different kinds and natures.


    With his secret probes into the Hollow World, Keiko after 2 months saw the arrival of Yhwach and his followers which were welcomed open arms by Aizen. Yhwach was mostly interested in the Hogyoku itself thus leading to a battle between Aizen and Yhwach while both of their sides watched from the sidelines. Yhwach little by little pushed, Aizen into drawing Hogyoku''s powers which after some time completely merged with him bringing his to the level of Yamamoto. Thus an alliance was created with Aizen becoming a follower of Yhwach.


    With the final battle at the doorstep, Keiko instructed his army to be ready and on the stand by. With the complete human society with nanotech in them, which also included fullbringers, people who had high Reiatsu within them, giving them special powers. Meanwhile, Keiko turned to the Visored were held, with his deep understanding of the Souls of Shinigami and Hollow, Keiko developed a method to create a reverse method for shinigami which has been turned into a Shinigami-Hollow hybrid. Keiko from his side was completely prepared now all he had to do was throw a matchstick into the situation and let the fight begin. He had already done everything in the world.


    Keiko using his Probe watched from the shadow of his dimension that the deal was made between Aizen and Yhwach, with Aizen getting the Soul Society for himself after Yhwach has destroyed the soul king and takes his place.


    Keiko started everything with the kidnapping of Orihime while making it seem kind the people doing it are Aizen''s people. Orihime soul was very interesting it was divided into various parts, each part characterized by different powers and entities. Keiko using Hogyoku started his experiments while also trying to change the entity, he cut up the spirits which formed Barriers for Orihime while making her provide more Reiatsu to them, Keiko observed that over the period the spirit would regain their powers if enough Reiatsu is provided and if there is too much damage the spirit along with the soul will be erased from Orihime herself thus making her lose memory a bit while also making her body weaker too. Using Hogyoku in his possession, Keiko also found a method to reverse the power process via which Orihime gained power. Thus concluding with his research on Orihime and finding a method to divide his soul into various small parts that would give birth to an entity depending on his soul''s characteristics.


    After Orihime''s disappearance, Soul Society didn''t take it lightly under the command of Byakuya a scout team was sent to Hueco Mundo. Byakuya without Ichigo along with 2 more captains and 3 lieutenants were instructed to go and scout out the condition of Hueco Mundo. The team consisted of Zaraki and Mayuri along with their Lieutenants with Byakuya in charge. Using one of the inventions created by Keiko for scouting, the scout team was able to find one of the Aizen lower Arrancar subordinates, Using Mayuri''s torture method they were able to get a grip over the situation and involvement of Yhwach. After their scouting and the knowledge of Yhwach and Aizen working together, Byakuya with the agreement with others decided to return and report back.


    Meanwhile, Yhwach and Aizen noticed the presence and then return of the Captains. Yhwach ordered Aizen to commence with his plan of attacking the human world while he will attack the Soul society and then the Royal palace which was hidden in it. Aizen due to the influence of Keiko''s EMS agrees with the order and gathers all his forces.


    Keiko seeing all this return to Soul society just in time for Byakuya and rest to return and report on the situation. Keiko under the pretense of the training was away had earlier left soul society and Ichibe. Keiko seeing the situation develop in such a manner recommended that Yhwach would have most likely already felt the presence of the captain the moment they arrived or left thus, attacking there now would be foolish of the sort as it would be simply walking into their trap. Thus, suggested that they should wait out the enemy and divide and conquer them, Kekio started telling them their plan: If we attack now, we will have to take all their defense and offense at the same time, but if we lure them one by one we can use it to decrease and annihilate out enemies for one for all. Yhwach would most likely attack Royal Palace, to do so I don''t think he is powerful enough which is why he wants to divide us into a group using Aizen. From my estimation, Aizen will attack the Human world to drive our attention while Yhwach along with his forces attack Soul society. What I suggest is that why don''t we divided our forces too? A group along with me and Ichigo will go into the Human world where Aizen will most like attack and take care of him, while Ichibe and Yamamoto will stay here and take care of Yhwach when he attacks. After Ichigo and the rest of the captain are done with Aizen they can advance to the Hueco Mundo and annihilate all the enemies base when all their forces are not concentrated in it while I will return and aid in the battle against Yhwach if there is still need for assistance.


    Seeing possibility in Keiko''s plan, Ichibe returned to the Soul Palace while Yamamoto along with 4 captains stays behind. Ordering the rest of the captains to go into the Human world and stop Aizen.


    Keiko under the role of leadership lead the team into the human world and set the 4 pillars to create fake Karakura Town. Keiko using the excuss of a surprise attack hid in his dimension.


    Keiko secretly ordered his Arrancar to complete their preparation and sweep clean all of Hecuo Mando when both Aizen and Yhwach leave with their armies. Collect samples of people who could turn out to be a potential test subject.


    Aizen was given additional troops by Yhwach to destroy the human town and to keep an eye on him. Aizen amused proceeds to attack the human town seeing this Yhwach attack Soul society with his people.


    Aizen arrives in the human world along with his forces saw some captains and Keiko the person on whom his Shikai didn''t work absent decided to go along with his plan, he first pretends to order people to commence the destruction but soon reveals his Shikai to all his and the enemy Shinigami forces. Thus hiding from the prying eyes.


    With Hypnosis underway, Aizen moves toward soul society.


    Keiko seeing this order his Vasto Lorde''s to activate world seed projects. His forces worked like a machine that each person forcefully uploaded into the world tree while their body being secured into the hibernation chamber. Keiko along with his forces, using Kamui went around and help as much as he can after screaming to all his allies that Aizen had run away and he would be following him. Captain''s and Aizen''s Arrancar fighting each other. Keiko focused on his project in the Human world while People fought each other.


    With 2 years of continuous training following Keiko, Yamamoto and other captains were powerful enough to give Yhwach ran from his money, the battle between the two while Royal guards also arrived and started pushing Yhwach and his forces back. Aizen who had also arrived watched from the shadows as Yhwach powers decreased little by little, Finally falling to the level which Aizen believe he can kill him. Aizen fully powered from Hogyoku backstabbed Yhwach meanwhile, Yamamoto and the rest of the forces also diminish their power fro the earlier fight seeing Aizen was confused. With Injuries Yhwach along with his forces started fighting a three way battle with Aizen dominating everyone else.


    Keiko in the meantime continued his project after being done with 3 countries out of 197 stopped and came back to see the fight. Most of Aizen forces were dead while some were struggling to see this Keiko ordered his Vasto Lorde''s come to join the battlefield and sweep clean everyone from the human world. Ichigo who was also fighting some Arrancar seeing the arrival of Keiko became hopeful before freaking out, Keiko from his dimension let out 50 all-powerful Vasto Lorde each which the power to defeat Yamamoto, the battle was one sided Ichigo was captured along with rest of the captains while all the Arrancar and Quincy forces which were sent were whipped clean.


    With Keiko sweeping 2 worlds of Hueco Mindo and the Human world turned his attention toward Soul Society and found, Yamamoto and Yhwach both badly injured fighting a 4 way battle with Aizen and Ichibe.


    Keiko with all his patients waited for his forces to clean everything, while the 4 people continue fighting each other.

 Chapter 73 - Titled Part. III

    Yhwach''s personality was such that when he wanted someone to become part of his empire he would put in great effort to do so even if he had to be forceful. Aizen due to Keiko''s manipulative suggestion was eager to learn about Yhwach and his powers to become more supreme and perfect his existence.


    Aizen secretly and slowly observed Yhwach from far away and started coming in his good grace and erasing any hint of betrayal from Yhwach''s mind.


    Along with his manipulative plan, Aizen also started secretly performing experiments on Yhwach''s armies which were originally Quincy but has evolved into a higher form due to the powers which were bestowed by Yhwah using the upgraded Hogyoku which was created with the combination of both Hogyoku he has created along with the one Keiko let his take from Rukia.


    Yhwach recovered all his memories and powers which were taken after 1000 years discovered that the Shinigami clan which he has let behind were getting more powerful after getting wind of his possible revival, Unlike other people he had the memories of the soul kind which meant that he knew more things which exist outside the boundaries of this world, thus after discovering Hogyoku took great interest in it, almost to the point to take in the person who had embedded Hogyoku into himself as his subordinate, Yhwach with his experience in the lesser god realm was a very paranoid person he as a means of making sure that subordinates around him don''t revolt against him placed a little soul piece of himself into everyone around him to observe them in shadows. Taking the same measure with the holder of the Hogyoku Yhwach placed a piece of his soul into Aizen too under the pretense of the granting more powers which everyone wanted.


    Aizen under the watchful hidden eyes of Yhwach continue doing experiments on his subordinated meanwhile, Yhwach formulated a plan to use Aizen to his advantage in the upcoming fight against Soul Society especially Yamamoto who''s Zanpakuto was very special as it consisted a spark of the origin flam which would burn all creation with the realm it was used in, But Yamamoto alone being a mortal was unable to utilize it completely but even so, Yhwach didn''t want to directly face such variable which if used in an efficient ways could potentially harm him or worst erase his. Thus with this in mind, he started formulating this plan.


    The day of the battle started, Yhwach with his plan to commence the battle against soul society. While ordering Aizen to leave from the battle in the human world to act as a distraction which he knew wasn''t going to happen took aside one of his subordinates who using his powers changed into Yhwach completely while using the in-depth research which Aizen has done for him on his subordinates Yhwach developed a method of his own via which he linked all the soul pieces which he has granted to his subordinates with each other which also included Aizen.


    With all preparations done, Yhwach decided to take one last step by taking in Uryu as his heir, which he did to have a vessel that would be left behind for himself in this mortal world in case he after absorbing is bound by world laws in anyways.


    Thus the battle commences, Yhwach from the shadows observed Aizen releasing his Shikai in the human world and trapping everyone there from the people he has sent with Aizen to give a sense of Aizen''s plan working perfectly. Ignoring the plea of the people who he has sent with Aizen, he observed that Battle between Yamamoto and his subordinate Royal Lloyd.


    Aizen in the meanwhile in the shadow watched the battle, waiting for Yhwach to get weaker slowly, seeing this using the link created between the soul pieces. Yhwach lowered Royal Lloyd''s powers by slowly transferring his powers to other subordinates which were fighting against Captains of other squads. Minimizing any kind of suspicious slowly, Yhwach wanted to bring out all the rats which were hiding to surprise attack him.


    Yhwach seeing the situation slowly develope moved to observe the Human world but all he saw was a destroyed and discriminated force of both sides completely. Thinking that there is some kind of method used by Shinigami to achieve mutual destruction, Yhwach not caring about the situation observed the battle in soul society. Yhwach observed that now along with Yamamoto, Ichibe was also fighting against Royal Lloyd seeing the situation go out of hand as he originally thought that Ichibe and the royal guard will not interfere with the battle until he reaches the Royal palace, Using the link between themself, the Wandenreich manage to hold on and create a stalemate situation between the two forces.


    Yhwach observed Aizen as the lateral with his full confidence jumped into the battle between the 3, Yamamoto, Ichibe, and the fake Yhwach. Aizen pretending to be on the Yhwach side started fighting Ichibe who according to Aizen was much more suitable to fight against as per his powers.


    With this fight commence with slowly the side of fake Yhwach and Aizen coming on top, Yamamoto who so far was fighting the way which Keiko has taught him without wasting his powers and using Kido arts while minimizing the Reiatsu output thus storing the power to wait for Keiko to finish in the human world and arrive here as backup. With Aizen''s arrival, he along with everyone was certain that Keiko too will come here soon and thus with his arrival the battle will end with their side winning.


    Seeing the change in the balance and feeling the suppression, Yamamoto with the signal of Ichibe released his Shikai completely.


    Seeing this as a change Aizen who was fighting beside fake Yhwach turned to Yhach and used his complete powers and attacked Yhwach from behind.


    Yhwach seeing this transferred all the energy which Royal Lloyd had to other people which were linked with Royal Lloyd due to soul network which he had created thus giving them a boost in power as they were fighting with Captains.


    With Royal Lloyd''s death, before dying the truth about him being fake Yhwach came to light. Yhwach without wasting time channeled Aizen''s energy into his subordinates thus crippling his power.


    Yamamoto who had already released his Shikai before Aizen''s betrayal quickly released his Bankai after seeing the real Yhwach enter the fight. Meanwhile, Ichibe also released his bankai sealing the entire area to trap Yhwach when he is distracted.


    Yhwach with his control over the soul piece, channeled all the energy out of Aizen thus incapacitating him while releasing his power of Medallion to seal the bankai of both Yamamoto and Ichibe but due to Yamamoto not wasting powers earlier and using Kido arts to fight through, fails to seal it while Ichibe being relatively weaker than Yamamoto failed and had his Bankai sealed.


    With Only real threat of Yamamoto hanging over his head, Yhwach signaled his subordinated to commence the backup plan in case, he fails to steal Yamamoto''s Bankai. Yhwach''s subordinate bring fought the hybrid of a newer version of an Arrancar made after Wonderweiss Margela which Aizen had created to trap Yamamoto''s powers in. Thus avoiding direct confentration.


    With wave of his hand the modified hybrid came out through the sealed space. By before it could do anything a heavy death aura fell on the entire soul society. Yhwach using his godly connection tried to find the source but heard the voice like of an ancient monster right next to his ears.


    "Are you ready to dance?"

 Chapter 74 - Titled Last: The bleeding God

    Keiko watched from his dimension as the fight went on, his original plan was to kill of all people while taking in few who looked interesting for experiments but as he watched the fight he observed a peculiar situation occur Yhwach from time to time-powered up and then suddenly lost everything the moment Aizen attacked him.


    Changing his EMS to Rinnegan he observed the link between Yhwach and his people which seemingly transfer Reiatsu from one person to another with a single chain going into space which seemed different then the entire circuit network. Keiko smiled as he looked at the entire picture. His Vasto Lorde either killed or sealed people which were deemed worth and completed their mission in the Human world meanwhile Arrancar which were sent off to completely swept the world of Hollows, sealing all higher form of Hollows and Quincy which were left behind. Aizen on instruction from Yhwach didn''t leave any forces for backup or such purpose thus making it easier for Keiko''s forces.


    With both forces done with their world, Keiko brought them all in his dimension while also releasing his Bounts army which was specialized in sucking out the soul force of different species. Thus those which were deemed to have potential will be sealed or taken prisoner while the rest will be turned into Liquid energy to become an energy fuel seal for Hogyoku''s which Keiko had created.


    With everything in place, Keiko watched as the real Yhwach jumped into the battle and sealed Ichibe''s Bankai while sucking energy from Aizen.


    Yamamoto who after Keiko''s training fought with minimizing his power outlet thus managed to suppress the seal Yhwach used.


    Seeing this as a right opportunity to jump into the fight, with a wave of his hand Keiko opens the dimensional gap. 7 Vasto Lorde jumped out of the gap and attacked the nearby fighting Shinigami and Quincy people luring them away from the Aizen and others fighting area while 10 Arrancar Jumped onto Gerard Valkyrie the heart of the soul king and Pernida Parnkgjas the left hand of Soul king, both of which worked under Yhwach.


    With the assurance of his future precious experiments secure, Keiko jumped into the battle himself while the remaining 10 Arrancar and 43 Vasto Lorde''s watched the battle from the tear, Keiko at fight arrived near the weakened Aizen and using 5 of the most powerful Hyogyoku he had in his possession to erase the Consciousness within Aizen''s Hyogyoku which was embedded into his body. With this he placed the last piece of his plan in place, using his Hyogyoku Keiko slowly started taking over the Aizen as a whole, erasing his and Yhwach''s presence from with his Body and soul-making them under his control.


    Keiko was interested in the power of Aizen''s Bankai, he from his memories remembered that Aizen could at the final moments was even able to affect the senses of Yhwach after the lateral has already absorbed Soul King.


    With Aizen under control, Keiko arrived behind Yhwach slowly releasing his power to 2 God tree little more than what Yhwach had.


    Keiko standing behind Yhwach slowly said: Are you ready to dance?


    All-purpose to fight Yhwach out in the open was to lure out parts of the soul king which were hidden into the world he had used his EMS to make soul king make the part come to him but didn''t get any response thus concluded that the parts must have formed their consciousness somehow with utter loyalty toward Soul king.


    Yhwach turned back and found the person which he found to be most threatening. Keiko for Yhwach was an entity which was outside the realm of his understanding, from his origin to powers, Yhwach even with the memories of Soul King and his lower gods knowledge wasn''t able to understand Keiko''s entity. Thus after thinking a lot, Yhwach made many different plans on how to deal with Keiko.


    Keiko seeing Yhwach simple standing there looked around and found the 7 Vasto Lorde which were sent to lure people away had done their job smiled and waved his hands. Within the Space came all 10 remaining Arrancars and 47 Vasto Lorde, without wasting time, Arrancars jumped into Yhwach while Vasto Lorde went after Yamamoto and Ichibe who were both delighted to see Keiko.


    Without caring much about the surprise reactions of Yamamoto and Ichibe. Keiko controlling Aizen created an illusion around the entire battlefield making it seems like Keiko is supporting Yamamoto and Ichibe.


    Yamamoto after ignoring the first surprise attack from an Arrancar looked at Keiko and screamed: Keiko, why are you just standing their help us?


    Keiko didn''t say anything but only kept looking with his ever glowing smile.


    Ichibe who under the direction of Soul King kept an eye on Keiko immediately understood what is going on and screamed: Bastard I treated you as my son, are you going to betray me.


    Keiko ignoring the cries turned his head and looked at Yhwach who was fighting the Arrancar.


    Yamamoto who was surrounded by 10 people understanding the situation and understood that he and Yhwach will die in this battle thus immediately decided to bring down everyone here along with him, screamed in anger and shouted: Bankai: Zanka no Tachi


    A burst of energy released in the air before a huge pressure falls from the sky and a pillar of fire rose in the sky. All forces regardless of Shinigami, Hollows or Quincy stopped fighting and looked at it from a distance.


    Keiko seeing this smiled and raised both his hands and released a beam of power into an unknown space and said: Seal.


    Immediately afterward the energy overflowing out of Yamamoto''s Bankai stopped. It turned into nothing more than an ordinary sword. Seeing this everyone got stunt.


    Keiko smiled and looked at Yamamoto and Ichibe and started explaining: Do you both remember my trip with Oetsu to meet the Zanpakuto spirits? Why do you think I wanted to visit them? Let me explain this to you. Do you remember the Zanpakuto rebellion? While most of the soul society was running around playing as they please. I was observing the situation very closely. Where you all chaos I saw an opportunity. Zanpakuto funny little things, Let me explain how Zanpakuto''s are formed. Each time when someone dies in any world regardless of their race human, soul or Hollows their soul during the process of being reborn in another world like let''s say A human soul transmitting into the Soul society cleanses itself. During this said Cleansing the soul not takes a person''s memories but also their soul identity thus when the process is done the little identical soul is standing there growing while being connected to your real soul. This identical soul is almost identical to your personality and slowly while absorbing energy present in the world which they exist in which is Soul Society the Home of Soul King himself. Then as the energy absorbed at denser and denser within that identical soul, the identical soul turns into what we can call a spirit after being trapped into a Zanpakuto which Oetsu did after finding them turns into Zanpakuto Spirits. Now you must be thinking if every characteristic of a Zanpakuto is copied from a person''s soul then why do spirits have such different personalities right? Well, the answer is very simple actually and something which I learned from a very good friend of mine - Because they don''t like being trapped. You trap them within your Zanpakuto and slowly start merging within your soul making their soul power your own. But now you must be thinking that there are many Zanpakuto which are very old and are used by many different Shinigami thus how can they be made out of single identical souls? Or like why do some Zanpakuto don''t give much trouble to their wielder and helps them. Well the answer, in this case, is also quite simple. Everyone believes they are different but in the end, people are not that different sure your souls are unique but when it comes down to it many people are somewhat similar thus when they die they release the same time of energy wave which acc.u.mulates into a singular entity like for example Hyorinmaru. The ice entity became what it is today after absorbing the energy of more than 1000 soul energy or like your own Zanpakuto spirit Yamamoto Ryujin Jakka with the energy of who knows how many souls. Each spirit after absorbing each energy change, some became arrogant and all might while some remain modest and outgoing thus making each spirit unique in itself and the power it wields. So what I did here was quite simple. I after visiting each Zanpakuto in their Habitat made them absorb some of my energy, thus corrupting them with my power. Unlike the normal process when the soul loses it''s power when it is cleaned my soul was within its perfect form thus making each and every Spirit which live in their inner world subdue to my energy. In a simple world, you can say each and every Zanpakuto there are in the world, all of them belong to me.


    Ichibe and Yamamoto''s face turned Ashed as they understood the meaning behind this, they have lost everything. All their weapons have been turned useless. Keiko taught them, Kido, thus he knew everything they could do and now their Zanpakuto which was their partner is every fight they had ever been had turned into an enemy''s weapon.


    Seeing this, Keiko waved his hands turned his Vasto Lorde thus signaling them to fight.


    Seeing the signal, one by one like wolfs jumping onto defenseless Sheep attacked Yamamoto and Ichibe.


    Keiko done with them turned to Yhwach who was bearly able to stand with only a right hand and a very injured stomach. Keiko seeing this smiled and decided to join in on the fight.


    Black mass slowly started leaking from Keiko''s hand turning into the shape of a simple Shundao sword with


    Using Kamui Keiko appeared behind Yhwach and took out the remaining hand completely ignoring the Blue veins which Yhwach had for protection. Yhwach using his powers started reattaching the arms using energy veins which restarted healing the arm. Seeing this Keiko moved his sword back once more and said in a low voice: Bankai: Zanka no Tachi Higashi: Kyokujitsujin. A huge burst of fire quickly spread onto the Black blade. Yhwach who was into the process of healing his arm seeing this knew about Yamamoto''s Zanpakuto''s powers to eradicate whatever it touches into nothing. Seeing this Yhwach decide to abandon his hand, and moved away.


    Escaping the attack, Yhwach decided to use the hidden card which he had hidden away to stop Yamamoto''s Bankai in case the fight drags out. Using his power to bring forth a specially modified Arrancar which Aizen on his instructions using the data he had gathered on experimentation with Shinigami and Hollows created to trap Yamamoto.


    Keiko seeing this smiled and whispered: Scatter: Senbonzakura, making millions of cherry bloom cutting the Arrancar which Yhwach bought out into meat slump.


    Seeing his hidden card fail, Yhwach turned to seek help from his companion and saw no one was around with all the connections with his people either destroyed or with other party energy almost drained. Realizing this, Yhwach turned to Yamamoto and Ichibe and show both of them being nailed to a wooden block with their arms ripped out.


    Yhwach finally panicked and moved his head back to the monster he was fighting. But before he could completely turn his head something grabbed it and forcefully moved it near Keiko. Keiko still having is all-natural heavenly smile said: Rinnegan: Human Path soul absorption.


    Yhwach started screaming, slowly painfully his soul ripped out of his body, and Keiko absorbed it. Keiko closed his eyes and started watching the memories of Yhwach and found the memories of Soul King within them during his God-hood days.


    Seeing them, Keiko smiled and turned his attention to one of the Arrancar under him, The name of the Arrancar was Kojito given to him by Keiko, Kojito who was standing among other Arrancar moved forward and came in front of Yhwach and took a piece of hair from his head and ate it, and slowly started changing turning into Yhwach himself.


    Keiko waved his hand and open the space in which 2 Arrancar took the now dead body of Yhwach and disappeared. Aizen who till now was acting along with Keiko, changed his illusion making it so that both Yamamoto and Ichibe had died after a brutal battle meanwhile Keiko is also gravely injured.


    With this, the now fake Yhwach moved into space and entered Royal Palace along with 7 remaining Arrancar following him.


    Keiko re-entered his dimension and started observing the game once again.


    Slowly, the fake Yhwach and the Arrancar forces moved into the deeper and deeper into the Soul Palace with the map, Keiko had provided them with. Leaving behind dead and deeply wounded in their path. Tenjiro with deep scars on his body with almost no energy left, Kirio with alone her upper half left behind, Senjumaru too deeply wounded and finally, Oetsu whose arms and legs were cut off and was placed on the broken sword to bleed out.


    Keiko just kept on watching from the shadows to catch the bigger fish. Slowly the Arrancar with the fake Yhwach left to go around Royal Palace to find for anything which can be deemed useful.


    While Fake Yhwach went forth and entered the Royal Hall were sealed Soul King was placed. Fake Yhwach arrived in front of it and raised his hand to cut the soul king when a dark matter from the shadows attacked Fake Yhwach, seeing the fish finally taking his bait, Keiko quickly jumped in and planted various seals around the Mimihagi the only part of soul king which was still loyal to him using Ichibe''s bankai which specialized in it. Done with trapping it, Keiko didn''t waste any time and used the device which he specially crafted for this, a huge pot, using his 3 god trees powers, Keiko slowly transferred all the black mass of Mimihagi into the pot thus crossing final goal from this world. With the battle over, Keiko informed all his troupes to return to the human world and resume there Human body collection activity.


    Keiko reabsorbed the black matter in which he formed the sword into his body and went out of the Royal Palace. Firstly he met Kirio to who he explained that using all the powers he had resealed Yhwach into a space vortex thus ending the war and also how Yhwach had destroyed both the world of the hollows and the humans thus, breaking the world cycle. Explaining to her that the space vortex which took Yhwach away lead to another world in which Yhwach will continue to gain power and destroy more worlds and finally, the concept of world seeds and how he is planning to enter space vortex himself to save and protect other worlds from whoever tries to harm it and lastly asking if she would like to join him or rest now that she is about to die. Like every being out their who clunches to life, Kirio seeing the opportunity to do good decisions to enter the world seed. Similarly, Oetsu, Tenjiro and finally Senjumaru all entered the world seed in which Keiko presented them with various subject thus expanding their knowledge sphere.


    With the Royal guards done, Keiko moved toward the Shinigami society explaining to them the destruction of both the Hollow and Human society. before finally explaining that Soul king has assigned a new mission to him. The mission to protect other realms from an entity like Yhwach, which has already destroyed this world''s order.


    Keiko left them with the choice to either join him or remain here with the Soul people with the only place Hell being open to them.


    Seeing their choices of being under Keiko or in Hell almost everyone chose to enter the world seed and work for Keiko. While some had their reservation. Watching the situation from the sidelines Keiko throws another bombshell among them, stating that if Shinigami wants they can have the normal Soul Society residents enter the world seed too but only with free consent and anyone who wants to enter and look around is also available if anyone holds any reservation. Soon after worlds, both Shinigami and Soul Society residents entered the world seeds.


    Done with everything Keiko moved back into the Human worlds were slowly all the Human bodies were placed into a Hibernation chamber and kept inside Keiko''s dimension.


    Collecting everything, Keiko entered the world of Hell, with all 13 Hogyoku with him. Keiko using his full speed passed layer by layer arrived at the Lowermost Level. And started absorbing the Souls which were trapped into Hogyoku making them more power, releasing all his 5 god tree powers, Keiko suppressed the guards and kept on collecting the soul cleaning out the hell. After being done from top to bottom, using the Quincy powers, Keiko started absorbing Hell''s essence itself thus gaining control over the Hell guards and the connection between them.


    With Hell as a personal live dimension under his control, Keiko moved to the soul society and started exploring it, absorbing the creatures such as Dragons.


    With his huge experience with both Dragons from Harry potter world and energy research into Reiatsu, Keiko being deeply interested in them started researching. Dragon mainly found within western Londer leaving as protector of the people from Hollows while in the shadows. Keiko started understanding that the so-called Dragon was a mass of energy which had enhanced formes which looked like dragons, which changed shape after absorbing a particular kind of energy like, if they absorbed negative energy they turned into what people referred as Dark dragon but in reality was such a mixer of Dark element from emotions mixed with concentrated energy.


    Seeing them form energy of their own gave Keiko a new idea regarding the energy in general. With his experiment done Keiko absorbed all the so-called dragons into Hogyoku and left to meet Ichibe and Yamamoto both of whom were tied from the pole and left behind after the fight.


    Keiko walked into their cells and removed their shackles and brought them down from their Poles. Yamamoto and Ichibe both were heavily injured with heavy blood loss after being Tied up for the past two weeks when Keiko was playing around with dragons and other things.


    Keiko slowly lifted one of them and placed them in White Bone Hell the invention made by Tenjiro but was later modified by Keiko in his image, the Hot spring water not only cleans any damaged Reiatsu but also slowly commends the Reiatsu network out of which Shinigami''s body parts are connected with. Thus fastening their Healing powers.


    After cleaning them of the damage and recovering their body loss using Blood Pond Hell, Keiko started using his own invented Kido art and started healing them.


    Both Yamamoto and Ichibe after the Blood Pond Hell gained consciousness but both chose to be completely silent and kept their eyes closed.


    Keiko slowly healed them completely. Slowly making them about to stand on their own then walk. No one said a single word.


    After several days Keiko placed Tea for both of them and seat down before them. As all of them enjoyed the Tea in silence, Keiko broke the month''s silence: I''m planning to move from this world. I want both of you to retire and stay comfortable. I have already taken care of everything.


    Ichibe slowly placed his cup down and asked: Why?


    Keiko: They took someone from me.


    Ichibe: Who are they?


    Keiko: Someone Soul King is working under.


    Ichibe: Then they must be powerful? Why don''t you just quit? Retire with us. Stay here.


    Keiko instead of replying only smiled and took a long tea sip.


    Ichibe: How sure are you?


    Keiko: About 5% after absorbing Yhwach.


    Yamamoto who was only listening with his eyes closed opened his eyes a little and looked at Keiko who was giving off his heavenly smile.


    Ichibe: Do you need our help?


    Keiko: No I just want to make sure you''re Okay when it begins. Have you ever seen me do something I''m unsure about?


    The silence befalls on the room they were drinking tea once again.

 Chapter 75 - Stay safe people :)

    Yo Everyone


    I hope you all have been well and remain well. I recently got a 3-week holiday due to COVID-19 so I was planning on started writing the story again. Thus just wanted to ask whether you would like me to


    Rewrite this story again


    Start a new one


    Keep working on this one.


    I''m asking this due to lack of response in general which is decreasing by each chapter I''m releasing, I know some of which is due to my lack of activeness but still. Just comment on your opinion or not. If no one commented then I might just as well start a new story.


    COMMENT 40 comments VOTE Load failed, please RETRY Privileged


    More Privileged Chapters


    Download the app and become a privileged reader today! Come take a sneak peek at our author''s stockpiled chapters! Download 40 Table of Contents Display Options


    Background default yellow dark


    Font Nunito Sans Merriweather


    Size


    Paragraph comments Chapter comments Write thought login liked newest Author:


    ? 0){ %>Chapter :


    Author: Machine Translation


    Editor:

 Chapter 76 - Im not too good at goodbyes

    Dear All,


    This is my last love letter to you all. After hearing your opinions, I have decided to re-write/ start a new story with some of the similar elements as this. I''m up for suggestions regarding the starting world. If you have any ideas or such kindly comment as for this novel will be ending here. I personally feel like MC in this novel let a lot of people live or die peacefully which I will be doing something about in the next one. Thanks to all the support for this novel, the next one will be slow-paced with dialogue and such between characters.


    Regards


    Author


    COMMENT 31 comments VOTE Load failed, please RETRY Privileged


    More Privileged Chapters


    Download the app and become a privileged reader today! Come take a sneak peek at our author''s stockpiled chapters! Download 31 Table of Contents Display Options


    Background default yellow dark


    Font Nunito Sans Merriweather


    Size


    Paragraph comments Chapter comments Write thought login liked newest Author:


    ? 0){ %>Chapter :


    Author: Machine Translation


    Editor:

 Chapter 77 - New novel

    Dear All


    The new novel has been released it''s by the name of "The last Anomaly", the Basic them of the storyline will be same, MC will be more ruthless than before, the pace will be fast for the first world of SAO within Only one chapter I think whereas Naruto world story will be completely different than before and will take a slow pace. I have tried to explain a lot of complicated stuff in the simplest manner in the first few chapters, even so, Feel free to ask questions about anything. Kindly rate and vote for the novel.


    Regards


    Kazru


    COMMENT 7 comments VOTE Load failed, please RETRY


    ¡ª The End ¡ªWrite a review Privileged


    More Privileged Chapters


    Download the app and become a privileged reader today! Come take a sneak peek at our author''s stockpiled chapters! Download Weekly Power Status See Who Voted -- Power Ranking -- Power Stone Vote 7 Table of Contents Display Options


    Background default yellow dark


    Font Nunito Sans Merriweather


    Size


    Paragraph comments Chapter comments Write thought login liked newest Author:


    ? 0){ %>Chapter :


    Author: Machine Translation


    Editor:

 Chapter 53 - Authors decision

    Dear all


    I after reading negative comment started working on the second approach and was done with 3 chapters when I read a very negative review regarding my novel. I while writing this novel had always tried to accommodate everyone''s needs and has been as connected as I can be but still something like this happened. Thus after reading that the criticism of someone who has never written or published anything of his own has decided to write what I truly intended to write. If someone doesn''t like it then I''m sorry every individual has different ideas and approaches regarding the stories mine is unable to satisfy yours thus kindly stop reading the novel.


    I''m always interested in listening to criticism and having a healthy conversation with everyone who wants to talk. Sorry to say this but I''m taking the first approach, kindly continue reading. Comment what you feel like, I will respond.

 Chapter 56 - I sometimes just want to paint the entire world in red

    Dear all


    Similar to Hermione''s situation, Kindly wait for the future chapters where the story will be explained in the detail regarding Asuna. No, she is not r.a.p.ed or turned against MC by being brainwashed.She is also not dead. And lastly no I''m not retarded my parents had me checked at the hospital at a very early age.


    Regards


    kazru T-T